Back To Basics: How-To Posts To Help You Thrive in The Kitchen - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/how-to/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 24 Nov 2023 13:54:28 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png Back To Basics: How-To Posts To Help You Thrive in The Kitchen - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/how-to/ 32 32 How To Cut Turkey Wings https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/#respond Tue, 24 Oct 2023 21:22:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71471 While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier process. Thankfully, nowadays, you can find turkey wings sold separately in supermarkets, making it easier for the consumer. You can certainly ask your butcher to do it for you, but if that is not an option, this short tutorial is here to show you how. Equipment You Will Need Cutting...

The post How To Cut Turkey Wings appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While cutting a whole turkey into parts can be a daunting task, segmenting turkey wings is actually a much easier process. Thankfully, nowadays, you can find turkey wings sold separately in supermarkets, making it easier for the consumer.

You can certainly ask your butcher to do it for you, but if that is not an option, this short tutorial is here to show you how.

Turkey wings cut into sections from the top view.

Equipment You Will Need

Cutting turkey wings into segments is a relatively easy task that requires a few basic kitchen tools, which you probably already have. You will need:

  • A sturdy cutting board: While any cutting board will work for cutting raw turkey wings, having a dedicated cutting board specifically for poultry is recommended. Most chefs recommend using a plastic cutting board that is easier to clean, so that is what we recommend.
  • A sharp knife: While a sharp Chef’s knife would work, if you have a smaller knife like a boning or pairing knife, it would be ideal. Poultry sheers could work as well, but cutting through turkey wing joints with kitchen shears proves to be more challenging than with chicken wings.

Parts of A Turkey Wing:

Before diving into how to section a turkey wing, it is essential to understand the fundamental parts of a turkey wing.

A turkey wing typically has three parts: the drumette, the wingette (or flat), and the wing tip (or flapper). The joints are the points where these parts connect. If you put your index finger in these joints, you can easily feel the natural gap between each section.

Three parts of a turkey wing on a cutting board with text over the image.

Now, you can cook turkey wings as a whole, but because of their uneven size and thickness, cutting them helps with even cooking and easier consumption. Plus, by separating wings into sections, you can achieve consistent browning and crispiness, especially if you are frying or roasting them in the oven.

This is especially true when it comes to the wing tip. Since it has very little meat and tends to burn easily, it is often used to make turkey stock.

How to Cut Up A Turkey Wing into Parts?

A collage of images showing how to cut a turkey wing into segments.
  1. Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on your cutting board. Dry it thoroughly on all sides. Turn it to its back, ensuring that the skin connecting the wingette and drumette lays flat on the cutting board.
  2. Cut the skin: Carefully cut the skin flap until you reach the joint. This step will give us more control when breaking the joints.
  3. Break the bone: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette. Simply use your index finger to locate the natural gap between the bones. Take the wingette with one hand and the wing tip with the other. Gently pull them away from one another to “crack” the joint. While this is an optional step, doing so will help you find and cut through the joint easily.
  4. Separate the wingette from the drumette: Place your knife over the joint and carefully apply pressure while adjusting the angle to cut through it. Be careful not to cut through the bone. Instead, aim for the cartilage and soft tissue of the joint.
Person cutting the wing tip of a turkey wing.
  1. Cut the wing tip: Locate the joint between the wing tip and the wingette. Run your knife through the joint to loosen it. If it is resisting, use both hands to break the joint to make it easier to separate them. 
  2. Examine for bone fragments: After cutting, check each joint to make sure that there are no small bone fragments left.

Expert Tips:

Cutting turkey wings might seem straightforward, but for the best results, there are a few nuances to consider. Below are some tips to help you refine your technique and make the process even smoother:

  • Safety first: Remember to always use caution when using sharp knives on slippery surfaces like raw poultry. Take your time as you cut through skin, and always make sure it is securely positioned on the cutting board to avoid any accidents. 
  • Do not skip the drying: While it may come as an unnecessary step, drying the skin on the wings will make it easier (and safer) to handle the wings and cut the joints. If they are still slippery, use a paper towel to grip and hold them.
  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Sanitize: Cross contamination is always a major concern when working with poultry. Therefore, it is important to thoroughly clean and sanitize all equipment and surfaces that come in contact with raw meat.

If you try this method, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of giving it a try.

Turkey wing sections on a cutting board from the top view.
Print

How To Cut Turkey Wings

Learn How To Cut Turkey Wings into segments at home using this step-by-step tutorial.
Course Meat
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 turkey wing
Calories 338kcal

Equipment

  • 1 Boning knife or any other smaller (easy to control) sharp knife
  • 1 Cutting Board (plastic) Ideally used only when handling poultry

Ingredients

  • 1 Turkey Wing

Instructions

  • Dry the wings: Place a turkey wing on the cutting board and pat it dry on all sides using paper towels. Position it so that the skin connecting the drumette and wingette is flat against the cutting board.
  • Cut the skin: Gently cut the skin flap up to the joint so that you can have better control as you “break” the joint.
  • “Crack” the joint: Locate the joint between the wingette and the drumette using your index finger. Try to feel the natural separation between the bones. Hold the wingette in one hand and the wing tip in the other and carefully pull them apart to expose the joint.
  • Separate the wingette from the drumette: Position your knife over the exposed joint and apply pressure. You would have to adjust as needed to cut through, navigating your way between the bone and the soft tissue.
  • Remove the wing tip: Locate the joint connecting the wing tip and wingette. If you can, cut through it. If it is tight, manually break the joint holding each piece with one hand and crack the joint. You may have to go back and forth with the knife to achieve a clean cut.

Video

Notes

  • Thaw first: If using frozen turkey wings, be sure to thaw them before cutting. Not only does it make the process safer, but it also ensures cleaner and more precise cuts.
  • Proper storage: If you are not using the wings immediately, store them in an airtight container or a ziplock bag in the fridge or freeze them right away to ensure freshness and prevent the potential spread of bacteria.
  • Need a delicious recipe to use your wings? Be sure to try our Baked Turkey Wings recipe.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Protein: 35g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 120mg | Sodium: 94mg | Potassium: 412mg | Vitamin A: 19IU | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Cut Turkey Wings appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-turkey-wings/feed/ 0
Baharat Spice Mix https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/ https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/#respond Mon, 04 Sep 2023 12:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70184 What is Baharat? Baharat is an aromatic blend of spices originating in Arabic regions and is now widespread across the Middle East and North Africa. While the word baharat directly translates to “spice” in Arabic, it has come to refer to a unique mix of seven ingredients.  This smoky, warm mixture typically includes a basic mix of 7 spices; Coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cloves, cardamom, and paprika, which is...

The post Baharat Spice Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
What is Baharat?

Baharat is an aromatic blend of spices originating in Arabic regions and is now widespread across the Middle East and North Africa. While the word baharat directly translates to “spice” in Arabic, it has come to refer to a unique mix of seven ingredients. 

Baharat spice mix in a jar with a spoon in it.

This smoky, warm mixture typically includes a basic mix of 7 spices; Coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cloves, cardamom, and paprika, which is why it is also referred to as “Middle Eastern 7 Spice.” With that being said, depending on the region, this spice blend may contain a few extra spices. 

A quintessential ingredient for Middle Eastern cuisine, cooks use this versatile blend in many different ways, including a dry rub for meat dishes, a seasoning for rice recipes, an addition to soups, and a topping for roasted vegetables.

Middle Eastern 7 spice blend, baharat, spices on a plate.

What Spices are in Baharat?

For this full-bodied baharat spice recipe, I include a typical blend of aromatic spices. However, I decided to use ground spices to simplify the process for those who don’t have a spice grinder or are simply looking for easier meal prep. 

Though ground spices will work wonderfully, you may also use whole spices to give your blend a heartier, more robust flavor profile.

  • Ground coriander 
  • Ground cumin
  • Ground black pepper
  • Ground nutmeg
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Ground cloves
  • Ground cardamom
Ground spices for baharat spice mix on a plate with text on each spice.

Optional Add-Ins

Though the basic ingredients of this Arabic spice mix rarely change, additional (often lesser-known) components may vary from region to region. Below, you’ll find iconic add-ins from across African and Middle Eastern cooking that will give your baharat spice blend recipe herbaceous, piquant, and sweet undertones.

  • In Turkey: For a lighter, earthier Middle Eastern spice mix, I recommend adding herbs like dried mint and oregano. This authentic Turkish blend adds delectably herbal notes that will balance the warmer taste of the other seven spices. And if you are a fan of spicy flavors, you can also add a pinch of Aleppo pepper into the mix.
  • In Palestine: Palestinian bharat spice is a spicier take on the original mix, adding paprika or dried chili peppers. You may also use smoked paprika for a touch of heat should you prefer a richer, smokier profile.
  • North Africa: One of the sweetest variations of the classic recipe, North African cuisine and Egyptian spice blends often include dried rosebuds for a floral, fragrant finish.

How to Make Baharat Spice at Home?

Few spice mixes are as simple and flavorful as this baharat seasoning recipe. You only need five minutes and two steps to prepare a mouthwatering blend that’s perfect for all your meals.

Baharat spice blend mixed in a plate with a spoon on the side.

If you are using ground spices, simply mix them in a jar and use it right away.

If you prefer to take this basic ground spice recipe to the next level by using whole, toasted coriander and cumin, then follow the steps below:

To Toast Whole Seeds:

Steps showing how to make baharat spice using a spice grinder.
  1. Heat the pan: Heat a dry skillet over medium heat.
  2. Toast the seeds: Add one teaspoon of whole coriander seeds and one teaspoon of whole cumin seeds to the skillet. Shake or stir the seeds for 2-3 minutes until they release their aroma. 
  3. Remove from heat: Once toasted, remove the seeds and let them cool for five minutes. 
  4. Grind the spices: Grind the now-cool seeds in a spice grinder or with a mortar and pestle until ground to a fine powder.

To Assemble the Baharat Mix: 

  1. Mix the ingredients: In a small bowl, add the ground coriander, cumin, black pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, cloves, and cardamom. Whisk the spices until thoroughly combined.
  2. Store: Place the baharat spice mix in an airtight container and store it in a cool, dry place until ready to use.

Uses for Baharat Spice Blend

It’s no wonder why baharat spice is one of the most prominent mixes in Turkish cuisine. This versatile, fragrant blend is workable in nearly any savory Turkish recipe, and you can use it as both a cooking spice and a finishing spice—perfect for the Middle Eastern multi-tasker. 

  • Meat rub and kabobs: Effortlessly elevate all your lamb, chicken, seafood, and beef dishes by adding this aromatic Arabic seasoning to your meat, either before or after cooking. This simple seven-spice mix transforms iconic Middle Eastern dishes—like Turkish Kofte, Shish Taouk, and Baked Chicken Kabobs—into five-star meals, and it also works as a delectable finishing spice for other simple weeknight meals, like Chicken Pita Wraps.
  • Soups and stews: If you are looking for the perfect soup seasoning, you have found it. This Middle Eastern seasoning adds immediate depth and complexity to dozens of tasty recipes. Add a tablespoon to iconic dishes, like Eggplant Beef Stew, Slow Cooker Chicken Stew, and Red Lentil Soup, and your mouth will be watering before your first spoonful.
  • Roasted vegetables: There’s no reason why veggies have to be bland. Sprinkle a bit of this baharat spice over your favorite roasted vegetable recipes—like my Whole Roasted Carrots, Roasted Portobello Mushrooms, and Roasted Eggplants—and every bite will burst with smoky, warm flavors.
  • Sauces and marinades: Want to add a touch of savory-sweet flavor to your favorite sauces? Add this Arabic 7 spice to Garlic Butter Sauce for an all-purpose pasta, bread, fish, and steak blend. Or, if you want to prep protein-packed, savory dishes, you can also mix baharat seasoning into delectable marinade recipes like Yogurt Chicken Marinade and Shrimp Marinade. If you want an even simpler way to use it, make a quick marinade by mixing 1 teaspoon of this mixture with ¼ cup olive oil and 2 tablespoons of lemon juice.
  • Eggs: Top your eggs with this seasoning for a quick, easy, and super flavorful breakfast you can make in minutes.

Storage Tips

The key to ensuring your baharat seasoning remains as robust and flavorful as possible is to store it in an airtight container (such as a glass jar) in a dark place, like a closed pantry. When stored properly, your mixture should remain fresh for up to one year.

Expert Tips

If you want to make a Middle Eastern spice blend that rivals that of Middle Eastern chefs, this master guide is just what you need. Get maximum, balanced flavor from your spices with these pro tips.

  • Start with whole spices if you can: If you’re serious about making your own spice blend, I highly recommend beginning with whole spices and grinding them at home. This process will ensure your spices are as fresh and fragrant as possible, resulting in a rich mix of delicious ingredients. To enhance your spice game, I also suggest investing in a spice grinder (affiliate link) with a removable bowl, as it’s easy to wash and even easier to use.
  • Get fresh, good-quality spices: You must use fresh, high-quality spices to make this seven-spice blend. Fresh spices have a more potent flavor, resulting in a robust, fully flavored mix that will last longer.
  • Take your time to toast spices: If you have time, I suggest toasting your spices before adding them to your mix. The toasting process helps the spices release their oils, producing a more fragrant, robust flavor.
  • Adjust the recipe as needed: Feel free to adjust the spices in your baharat recipe according to your tastebuds and your unique recipe. If you make changes, I recommend writing them down so that making your own version of this baharat blend is easier in the future.
  • Multiply the recipe: Generally, you’ll only need between one teaspoon and one tablespoon of baharat spice per recipe. However, if you need a larger amount of this spice blend to accommodate a bigger crowd, you may multiply the recipe as needed.
  • Shake the container before using: To help distribute the spices in the mix, shake your storage container before adding the blend to your recipes. This movement will help redistribute spices that have settled in the mixture, giving you a balanced flavor in every teaspoon.

FAQs

Want to be an expert on this gourmet seasoning mixture? This FAQ will answer all your questions, from baharat vs. garam masala to tasty recipe substitutes.

What is a good substitute for baharat?

Mediterranean Seasoning makes an excellent baharat substitute with a similar profile of warm, earthy undertones. To make a comparable spice recipe with pantry-ready ingredients, mix one-part ground cumin with one-part ground coriander, one-part ground black peppercorns, and one-part cinnamon.

What is the difference between Bharat and garam masala?

Garam masala and baharat both offer a warm, savory-sweet flavor profile. However, garam masala primarily appears as a finishing seasoning in Indian dishes with a more intense spiciness and aromatic flavor. Meanwhile, baharat is milder, with slightly sweet, savory overtones and only a bit of heat. Baharat is also more commonly used throughout cooking, such as when rubbing meat dishes before roasting.

What is the difference between ras el hanout vs. baharat?

Though both use similar spice blends, ras el hanout is a Moroccan mixture that creates a warm flavor profile with additional ingredients, including allspice berries, turmeric, cardamom pods, and ground ginger. Traditionally, ras el hanout appears in couscous, soups, and braises. By contrast, baharat uses fewer spices and is often used to season meats, stews, and roasted vegetables to add flavor like other cooking spices.

Other Seasoning Blends You Might Also Like

Is your spice cabinet full of spices? Try these other spice blends to add flavor to your food in a quick, easy, and inexpensive way:

If you try this Baharat Spice Mix recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baharat spices mixed in a bowl with a spoon in the bowl.
Print

Baharat Spice Mix Recipe

Put your spice cabinet to good use and make your own baharat spice mix with this quick and easy recipe. A staple in Middle Eastern cooking, this is the perfect blend of smoky, sweet, and tangy spice mixture that will help you enhance your savory dishes with the authentic flavors of the region.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 tablespoons
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground cumin
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground coriander
  • 1 tablespoon ground black pepper
  • 2 teaspoons ground nutmeg
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon ground cloves
  • 1 teaspoon ground cardamom

Optional add-in:

  • 2 teaspoons ground smoked paprika

Instructions

  • In a bowl or a jar, add the ground cumin, coriander, black pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, cloves, and cardamom. Whisk to combine.
  • Place in an airtight container and store in a cool, dry area.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 tablespoons of baharat. If you need more, you can multiply the recipe.
  • Storage: Keep it in a jar with a tight-fitted lid and store it in the pantry. When stored properly, it should last for up to 1 year.
  • Toasting & grinding whole spices: To get a full aromatic taste, try using whole coriander and cumin that has been toasted and ground. 
    • Toast: Use 1 teaspoon of whole coriander seeds and 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds (each spice will yield 1 ¼ teaspoon of ground.) Heat a dry skillet over medium heat. Add the whole coriander and cumin to the pan, shaking or stirring for approximately 2-3 minutes until their aroma is released. Remove from the heat and cool for 5 minutes. 
    • Grind and mix: Once cooled, grind in a spice grinder or in a mortar and pestle until fine. Mix with the rest of the spices.
  • Shake the container before using it to help distribute spices in the mix.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 512IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Baharat Spice Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baharat-spice-mix/feed/ 0
How To Cut Zucchini https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/#respond Fri, 14 Jul 2023 17:58:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69044 With this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn 6 easy ways to cut zucchini: trimmed, rounds, spears, diced, matchsticks, and thinly sliced. Follow our easy steps and gain all the confidence you need to use zucchini in all your favorite recipes. How to Trim Zucchini? The key to proper zucchini meal prep is ensuring your veggies are clean, unblemished, and fresh before slicing them. In just two simple steps, you can...

The post How To Cut Zucchini appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
With this step-by-step tutorial, you will learn 6 easy ways to cut zucchini: trimmed, rounds, spears, diced, matchsticks, and thinly sliced. Follow our easy steps and gain all the confidence you need to use zucchini in all your favorite recipes.

How to Trim Zucchini?

The key to proper zucchini meal prep is ensuring your veggies are clean, unblemished, and fresh before slicing them. In just two simple steps, you can transform this summer vegetable into dozens of low-carb meals, from a hearty stew to a savory stir-fry. 

A person showing how to trim zucchini in a collage of images.
  1. Wash and dry: Wash the zucchini under cold water, using your hand to remove dirt and debris. Use a clean kitchen towel to dry the veggie fully.
  2. Trim zucchini: Use a sharp paring knife to remove any remaining blemishes or bruises. Then, trim off the top and bottom of the squash—both the stem end and the base—cutting off about ½ inches on either side. Discard the chopped-off bits.

Do You Peel Zucchini Before Slicing?

It’s completely up to your preference when deciding whether or not to peel your zucchini before cutting. 

I personally like to keep the skin on before chopping. The skin is soft, thin, and perfectly edible—especially when the squash is in season. Plus, the skin often contains the highest concentrations of antioxidants and potassium, which may account for its ability to help bring down blood sugar and insulin levels.

Person shown as she is peeling a zucchini.

However, if you prefer, you can peel the zucchini skin. To do so, hold your trimmed zucchini firmly in one hand and use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin. Be sure to rotate the zucchini as you work your way around its surface until all of the skin is peeled.

How to Cut Round Zucchini?

Zucchini rounds make the perfect cut for many of my favorite preparation methods. Add olive oil to your frying pan and sautee panko-crusted veggie coins for a savory sautéed zucchini side, or fire up the grill and prepare yourself for smoky and tender vegetable kabobs. No matter how you cook it, zucchini makes the perfect summer vegetable to serve on the side of a main dish.

Images showing how to cut round zucchini.

However, remember that the ideal thickness of your rounds will depend on your recipe. For instance, cutting zucchini thickly is best when making kabobs, as the veggies will better withstand the grill’s high heat and the kabob skewer. However, sautéed zucchini works best with thinner slices to ensure thorough cooking.

  • How to Cut Zucchini Rounds? Use a sharp knife to chop the veggie perpendicular to its length. Beginning at one end of the squash, slice round pieces in your desired thickness.
A collage of images showing how to cut zucchini half-moons.
  • How to Cut Zucchini into Half-Moons?
    1. Slice the zucchini down its middle: Halve the zucchini, cutting lengthwise down its body. 
    2. Cut half moons: Lay the zucchini halves on their long edges next to one another. Arrange them perpendicularly to your knife, and chop half-moon cuts in your preferred thickness from one end of the zucchini to the other.

How to Cut Zucchini Spears?

If you’ve ever wondered how to cut zucchini fries or what shape to cut your zucchini for optimal grilling, this guide to slicing spears is just what you need. This shape is sturdy enough to take the heat of grilling and roasting, and it makes an irresistible side when coated in a panko-parmesan mixture and baked or air-fried.

A person cutting zucchini into spears.
  1. Cut the zucchini in half: Slice your zucchini lengthwise into two halves.
  2. Slice the spears: Cut lengthwise along each half, slicing each into three equal pieces.
  3. Trim: If necessary, cut your spears into shorter or thinner pieces to match your recipe.

Again, don’t be afraid to cut your spears to your desired length. For instance, if we are making roasted zucchini spears, we cut each zucchini in half, then cut each half into three equal slices—a great way to get firm, long strips of squash. However, you may prefer to chop the zucchini spears into smaller lengths should you prefer a more snack-friendly recipe such as zucchini fries.

How to Dice Zucchini?

Cubed zucchini—also known as diced zucchini and chopped zucchini—is a must-have for dozens of tasty recipes. 

Because of the bite-size pieces that result from this cutting method, it’s perfect for vegetable soups or stews—my favorite being a creamy, vegan-friendly Zucchini Soup! You can make the ultimate healthy side dish in minutes with just a handful of ingredients.

Two photos showing how to chop zucchini.
  1. Slice the zucchini in half: Cut your zucchini in half lengthwise.
  2. Cut spears: Draw your knife lengthwise along each half of the zucchini. Each half should yield about three equal spears, depending on your desired thickness.
  3. Cube the zucchini: Align your spears perpendicularly to your knife and dice the zucchini into your desired cube size. 

How to Cut Zucchini into Matchsticks?

There’s no need to stress when you want how to cut zucchini for stir fry. This matchstick cutting method—also known as a julienne cut—results in beautiful, thin strips of zucchini that make the ideal addition to dozens of stir-fry recipes.

Person showing how to cut zucchini in to matchsticks idea for stir fries.
  1. Halve the zucchini: Slice the zucchini lengthwise to get two halves. 
  2. Cut it into strips: Cut each piece lengthwise, slicing each half into smaller, thinner strips. If any strip is too large, you may cut it even more finely.

How to Thinly Slice Zucchini

Slicing zucchini thin is a perfect way to get exquisitely fine veggie strips, sheets, or ribbons.

The delicate, tender slices of thinly sliced zucchini are great for baked squash dishes. This cutting method is especially convenient when you need to slice zucchini for lasagna recipes with gooey cheese and a robust pasta sauce like my Zucchini Lasagna and Zucchini Lasagna rolls. They also make a great addition to delectably light salads, like my Zucchini Kale Salad.

I recommend using a sharp vegetable peeler when making these thin slices—ideally, a Y peeler if you have one. However, a sharp knife would also work to make zucchini ribbons, though getting uniform slices might be more difficult.

Person showing how to slice zucchini thinly.
  1. Shave the zucchini: Hold one end of the zucchini firmly in one hand. Use your free hand to grate your vegetable lengthwise with your vegetable peeler.
  2. Transfer to a cutting board: The zucchini will become too thin to hold as you start coming to the end of your peeling. When you can no longer easily grip your veggie, lay it on your cutting board and use the surface as support as you slice the final thin ribbons.

You can also slice your zucchini with a mandoline slicer to produce similarly thin, equal strips of vegetables. However, keep in mind that unless you have a protective glove (affiliate link), it may be difficult to get your veggies to stick to the blades while performing the slicing motion. Still, this easy kitchen tool is incredibly helpful when you have gloves on hand—even without a mandoline guard!

FAQs

Learning how to cut a zucchini is a no-brainer when for beginner-friendly kitchen skills. However, this easy FAQ will answer any remaining questions, from how to store zucchini to ideal cooking methods.

How to cut zucchini for grilling?

 The best way to cut zucchini for grilling is to slice it into spears. This cutting method is sturdy enough to withstand high heat and will result in perfectly tender, cooked pieces when grilling zucchini.

Can zucchini be frozen?

Yes! If you want to cut zucchini ahead of time, I highly recommend blanching your slices before placing them in the freezer. Blanching helps avoid flavor loss, discoloring, or unwanted texture changes—no one likes mushy, watery zucchini! To store your squash in the freezer, cut them into your desired shape, preferably at least ½-inch thick. Then, place the pieces into a large pot of unsalted, boiling water for 1-3 minutes or until they turn bright green, being careful not to overcook them. Immediately use a slotted spoon or colander to transfer the zucchini into an ice bath and stir until the veggies cool. Then, place the slices in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and paper towels. You may also use another sheet of paper towel to pat dry the tops of the veggies gently. Once you eliminate the excess moisture, transfer the baking sheet to the freezer for a few hours or until frozen. Then, portion the veggies into your desired amounts and place them in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. You can then store your zucchini in the freezer for up to six months.

How do I store cut zucchini in the fridge?

To keep your sliced zucchini in a refrigerator, cut your vegetable into your preferred shape and size. Then, place your veggie pieces into an airtight container or a Ziploc bag, squeezing out as much air as possible. Your zucchini will stay fresh—preferably in your fridge’s crisper drawer—for 3-4 days. Also, because zucchini tends to release excess water during storage, be sure to drain your pieces before using them in your recipe.

Similar How-To Guides

Need a refresher on sharpening your knife skills when cutting veggies? Here are a few more how-to guides you might also like:

Various cuts of zucchini on a white marble with text on the image.
Print

How To Cut Zucchini (6 Ways!)

Learn how to cut zucchini in 6 different ways:  trimmed, cut into rounds, spears, diced, mathcsticks, and sliced thinly. Follow this easy step-by-step guide to sharpen your knife skills and use zucchini with confidence in your recipes.
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 zucchini

Ingredients

  • 1 zucchini

Instructions

  • Rinse the zucchini under cool water. Use your hand to remove dirt and debris, then dry with a clean kitchen towel.
  • Use a sharp knife and sturdy cutting board to slice off the top and bottom ends of the zucchini. Slice off any blemishes or bruises. Discard the removed pieces.
  • Cut the zucchini according to your preferred method below.

Zucchini Rounds

  • Cut the zucchini in half lengthwise.
  • Beginning at one end, cut the zucchini perpendicularly to its length. Slice round pieces in your desired thickness.

Zucchini Half-Moons

  • Halve the zucchini down the length of its body.
  • Set the two halves next to one another, cut-side down and perpendicular to your knife. Begin at one end to slice down the veggie halves, cutting half-moon pieces in your preferred thickness.

Zucchini Spears

  • Cut the zucchini lengthwise into two halves.
  • Slice each half lengthwise into three equal pieces.
  • If desired, cut the spears into shorter or thinner pieces.

Diced Zucchini

  • Slice the zucchini in half down its length. Cut each half lengthwise into three equal slices.
  • Rotate the slices so they lie perpendicularly to your knife. Begin at one end and dice the zucchini into cubes of your preferred size.

Zucchini Matchsticks

  • Halve the zucchini lengthwise.
  • Cut each half along its length into your desired thickness. If desired, you may cut your slices shorter to match your recipe.

Thinly Sliced Zucchini

  • Firmly grasp one end of the zucchini in hand. With your other hand, draw a vegetable peeler (you can use a regular vegetable peeler or Y peeler) lengthwise along the vegetable.
  • Lay the zucchini on the cutting board when it becomes too thin to hold. Use the surface as a support to finish peeling down its surface.

Notes

  • Peeling zucchini is optional, as zucchini skin is edible. If you decide to peel your zucchini, be sure to trim it first. Then, firmly hold one end of the zucchini in one hand. Use a vegetable peeler to remove the skin, rotating the vegetable as you work your way around its surface.
  • Mandolin Slicer: You can also slice your zucchini with a mandoline slicer to produce similarly thin, equal strips of vegetables. However, keep in mind that unless you have a protective glove, it may be difficult to get your veggies to stick to the blades while performing the slicing motion. For that reason, we prefer a vegetable peeler instead of a mandolin slicer for cutting thinly zucchini slices (to make our Zucchini Lasagna recipe.)

The post How To Cut Zucchini appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-zucchini/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Homemade Blackening Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/#respond Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:52:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68051 Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and...

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Better than the cult favorite Zatarain’s blackened seasoning recipe, this five-minute rub builds upon cajun spice for an incredible flavor—something I always keep handy in my spice cabinet. Not only does it add an irresistible kick to dozens of foods, but it’s also the key ingredient of my Blackened Cod and Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe. Use this savory blackening rub for all of your proteins, veggies, grains, and more, and you’ll never be at a loss for simple and flavorful weeknight meals again.

Blackened seasoning on a plate with a spoon in the middle.

What Does Blackening Mean, and How to Blacken Foods?

“Blackening” is a process in which you pat dry your main ingredient (primarily meat and fish), brush it with melted butter or olive oil, then dredge it through a combination of spices—usually a traditional blackened seasoning blend. Then, cook the meat in a scorching cast-iron skillet until it forms a charred, spice-infused exterior.

Popularized by Paul Prudhomme, this technique of cooking and the seasoning mix is usually used when cooking seafood and chicken dishes, but you can also use a blackening rub on other meats—such as steak and pork—veggies, soups, grains, and even pasta. 

What is Blackened Seasoning?

Blackened seasoning, also referred to as “Blackening Seasoning”, is a traditional Louisiana spice blend that creates a crisp, blackened exterior when added to meat, poultry, or seafood and cooked in a hot cast iron skillet. 

Popular in Cajun cooking, this iconic spice mixture often includes paprika, onion powder, garlic powder, cayenne pepper, thyme, oregano, black pepper, and salt. 

What is in Blackened Seasoning?

You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this iconic Louisianian spice mix:

An image showing what spices are in blackened seasoning with text on each spice.
  • Paprika: Smoked paprika is ideal for giving this Cajun blackened seasoning its signature smoky flavor. However, regular paprika will also work.
  • Onion powder
  • Garlic powder
  • Dried oregano
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Kosher salt: Salt is the key ingredient to livening up the other spices’ unique flavors. However, if you’re watching your sodium intake or simply want to limit how much salt you use, you can easily make a salt-free blackened seasoning by omitting the salt. 
  • Cayenne pepper: Though cayenne pepper is optional, it’s a great addition if you want to give your rub a spicy kick. Feel free to heat level according to your taste buds.
  • Other optional additions: While these are the basic blackened spice mix ingredients, you can also add other spices for more complex flavor profiles. Some of my favorites include ground cumin, white pepper, and dried basil—though there are countless others to try.

How to Make It?

Making blackening seasoning is an easy way to infuse your kitchen with bold, aromatic flavors. With a total time of five minutes, making this recipe is as easy as it gets.

  1. Mix the spices: Place all the blackened seasoning ingredients in a small bowl. Stir them together until they blend evenly.
  2. Store: Transfer the mixture into an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid—such as a mason jar and store it in a cool, dry space. Your blackened seasoning will stay fresh for up to a year.

How to Use Blackened Seasoning?

You’ll add countless mouthwatering dishes to your recipe book when you make your own blackened seasoning. Prepare to cook like a master Lousianian chef with these tasty menu ideas.

Fish coated with blackened spice mix on a plate from the top view.
  • Meat: The traditional way to enjoy this blackening spice blend is by using it to create a flavorful crust on meats. I love dredging my favorite meats (i.e., shrimp and salmon) through this homemade seasoning, making the perfect blackening recipe for fish, chicken, seafood, and steak. I even use this seasoning as the flavor base of my Blackened Mahi Mahi recipe
  • Vegetables: This blackening spice recipe is essential when adding a savory, piquant flavor to grilled or roasted vegetables. Sprinkle it on veggies like corn, zucchini, potatoes, and eggplant for a simple veggie dish.
  • Pasta, rice, and grains: One of the best ways to use this versatile seasoning is in your favorite grain recipes. Add this secret ingredient to creamy pasta sauces, or sprinkle it in a bowl of plain rice to give it a kick of New Orleans flavor.
  • Nuts and popcorn: Transform your everyday snacks into five-star fare by adding a dash of this robust seasoning. I love sprinkling this DIY blackened seasoning over a bowl of nuts or popcorn, giving each bite an out-of-this-world taste.
  • Soups and stews: Just like Italian seasoning, this easy blackened seasoning recipe is just what you need to take your soup-making to the next level. With just a few simple ingredients, every tablespoon will burst with delicious, bold flavors.

Expert Tips

There’s no guesswork when making this easy blackening seasoning recipe. These pro tips will make your kitchen smell like a gourmet market any day of the week.

  • Fresh spices: The best blackened seasoning begins with fresh spices. Not only do quality spices have a more potent flavor, but they’ll also keep your seasoning fresher for longer. Be sure to check the expiration date of all your ingredients before adding them to your mixture, and use new ingredients whenever possible. 
  • Sealed storage: Tightly seal your blackened seasoning in an airtight container to keep it fresh during storage. I also recommend placing your sealed seasoning in a cool, dark place to keep the flavors from drying out.
  • Mix well: To give every teaspoon of this blackening spice mix a well-balanced taste, evenly blend the spices. Each spoonful should have an equal amount of every ingredient.
  • Make it your own: The best part about the ingredients in blackened seasoning is how easy they are to adjust. Feel free to experiment with each spice’s proportions to satisfy your own preferences. For example, you could give your rub more heat by increasing the amount of cayenne pepper. Or, add more paprika for a smokier, deeper taste.
  • Adjust salt: If you’d prefer a low-sodium blackening seasoning, add less salt to your mixture or omit it altogether.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your spices to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid this from happening, I recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

FAQs

Still have questions about this homemade blackened seasoning? Don’t worry! This simple guide covers everything from cajun seasoning vs. blackened seasoning to how to adjust spice levels.

Is blackening seasoning spicy?

It can be! This spice rub’s heat comes primarily from its cayenne pepper, so you can adjust how much you use to reach your desired spice level.

What does blackened seasoning taste like?

Blackened rub tastes very similar to cajun and creole seasonings, with a spicy, smoky, and savory flavor.

What’s the difference between blackening seasoning, cajun seasoning, and creole spice?

Though similar, slight variations exist between blackened, cajun, and creole seasoning. Cajun seasoning tends to be spicier, with a higher proportion of cayenne pepper, and people often add it to traditional Cajun cuisine dishes, such as gumbo and jambalaya. Meanwhile, creole spice uses more herbs—like celery seed and dried basil—to make milder, more refined creole dishes.

What is a good blackened seasoning substitute?

If you need a substitute for blackened seasoning, don’t worry! There are dozens of similar recipes to try. Cajun and creole seasonings use a similar base, producing comparable flavor profiles. Old Bay seasoning also has a similar taste but tends to be saltier. If you don’t have any pre-made spice mixes, you could make a stripped-down version of this recipe with a chili, onion, and garlic powder blend. You could also use homemade taco seasoning—usually a chili powder and cumin mix—for an earthier, more citrusy version. If you don’t mind a sweeter, tangier alternative, you could also use a Canadian classic made with brown sugar and dry mustard: Traeger Blackened Saskatchewan Rub.

If you try this Blackening Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Blackened chicken seasoning recipe on a plate with a spoon.
Print

Blackened Seasoning Recipe

Learn how to make your own blackened seasoning and use it to blacken fish, chicken, steak, and vegetables. This unique seasoning mix is an inexpensive and easy way to add spicy, smokey, and earthy flavors to all your favorite dishes.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 13kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons smoked paprika
  • 1 ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Optional:

  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • Mix all the ingredients in a small bowl and stir to ensure that they are evenly blended.
  • Store in a jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason or a small glass jar) for up to a year.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ¼ cup of blackened seasoning. It can be multiplied as needed.
  • Make it your own: Feel free to adjust the amount used according to your taste buds. This also applies to the amount of salt used. If you prefer to salt your food separately, we recommend omitting salt.
  • Safety: Proper air ventilation is a must when you cook with blackened seasoning. The high heat of the cooking process may cause your seasoning mix to smoke, resulting in coughing or irritation if inhaled directly. To avoid discomfort, we recommend turning on your kitchen’s overhead fan and, if possible, opening nearby windows.

Nutrition

Calories: 13kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 64mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 617IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Blackening Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blackening-seasoning/feed/ 0
How To Make Vegetable Stock https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/#comments Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:08:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66223 We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish. It is also a great alternative to chicken broth...

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish.

It is also a great alternative to chicken broth to make a recipe vegan or vegetarian. Not to mention, just like my Corn Cob Stock, making veggie stock takes much less time than meat stocks so you have no excuse not to try!

Vegetables in a pot to make vegetable stock.

Vegetable Stock Ingredients

The ingredients for vegetable broth are simple, healthy, and all-natural with a ton of add-in options.

For broth vegetables, I recommend using neutral vegetables with savory flavors, such as onions (with the onion skin!), carrots, celery stalks, and fresh garlic cloves.

To give your soup stock recipe extra rich flavor, you’ll also need fresh herbs, like fresh parsley and thyme; salt (both kosher salt and sea salt will work); whole peppercorns, and water.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls.

Optional Add-Ins

When considering what to put in vegetable broth, the options are limitless. You can select dozens of mouthwatering combinations to make your veggie broth recipe as savory, fresh, and delectable as possible. Below is a long list of ingredients you can use:

Other Vegetables You Can Use:

  • Alliums: Alliums—such as shallots, green onions (AKA scallions), leeks, and leek tops—can give this vegan stock a robust, mildly sweet flavor.
  • Mushrooms: Umami-rich mushrooms (and mushroom stems) will give your veg broth recipe an earthy, complex taste.
  • Fresh or dried bay leaves: This simple addition adds bright, herbal notes to any DIY stock.
  • Parsnips: Sweet and mildly spicy, parsnips add a nice sweet kick to the broth.
  • Fennel and fennel tops: If you like mild, anise-like flavors, then fennel is a great addition.
  • Corn cobs: The sweet buttery taste of corn cobs is a welcome addition during the summer months when corn is in season.
  • Tomatoes: If you want to give your DIY broth a touch of sweetness, I recommend adding chopped tomatoes. However, remember to remove the seeds first, as they can give your stock a bitter taste.
  • Apple or pear: Apples and pears are the perfect ingredients to add sweetness and help eliminate bitterness.

Add-Ins With Reservations

These are some of the ingredients to use in small doses when making homemade broth:

  • Carrot tops: When added in small amounts, carrot tops will it earthy, sweet undertones. Too many carrot tops, however, will result in a bitter-tasting broth.
  • Peppers: Are you a fan of heat? Then I recommend adding bell peppers, jalapeńos, or other hot peppers to your broth. However, don’t add too many (especially when using green bell peppers!) to avoid an acidic, bitter liquid.
  • Celery leaves: Use celery leaves for a bright peppery taste, but limit it to just a few ones to avoid making your stock bitter.
  • Soy sauce or tamari: You only need a small amount of soy sauce or tamari to give your homemade veg broth a complex umami taste.

Flavor and Nutrition Boosters

  • Dried kombu: Adding a bit of dried kombu to your simmering broth is an excellent way to give it briny, mushroom-like overtones.
  • Nutritional yeast: I recommend adding a pinch of nutritional yeast to your simmering pot for extra rich flavor.
  • Tomato paste: Give your stock sweet, mild tomato flavors by adding one tablespoon of tomato paste. To help your paste mix into the broth, I recommend removing a half-cup of simmering stock, whisking in the tomato paste, then re-adding it to the pot.
  • Roasted garlic: If you have made some for another dish (such as Baked Garlic Butter), use roasted garlic to incorporate caramelized flavors into your homemade stock.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric (or even Golden Paste): If you’re making an Asian-themed dinner, ginger, and turmeric make brilliant additions to your stock vegetables. Not only do these ingredients add a spicy, bright flavor, but they also help develop a light, appetizing color in your stock.
  • Dried mushrooms: If you are a fan of the rich umami flavors, dried mushrooms is a good addition. However, be sure to soak them for an hour (or so) in hot water before adding to the stock. 
  • Parmesan rind: If you don’t mind a non-vegan addition, parmesan cheese rind is a simple flavor booster that complements any Italian dish. 

How to Make Vegetable Broth

Wondering how to make your own vegetable broth? These simple, beginner-friendly instructions will give you exquisitely flavored, perfectly simmered broth every time.

A collage of photos showing how to make your own vegetable broth.
  1. Place ingredients in the pot: Add the onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley, fresh thyme sprigs, salt, pepper, and other optional add-ins into a large stock pot (affiliate link) or Dutch oven (affiliate link.)
  2. Add water: Pour the water into the pot.
  3. Boil & simmer: Place the lid atop the pot and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once the stock comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium. Let the mixture simmer for 60-90 minutes, stirring once or twice during this time.
  4. Cool & strain: Let the veggie stock cool for 10-15 minutes. Then, carefully strain the liquid with a fine mesh strainer (affiliate link) placed over a large, heat-proof bowl. Using the back of a spoon, gently press the vegetables for the stock into the strainer to release their juices. Discard the veggies once finished.
Straining broth into jars and a labeled jar.
  1. Store: Transfer the vegan vegetable stock into airtight jars. Let them cool to room temperature and label them before storing them in the fridge or freezer.

How Long to Cook Vegetable Stock?

Once your vegan stock comes to a boil, I recommend letting it simmer for 1 to 1½ hours. Any longer, and the vegetables’ flavors begin to break down.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

The best part of this homemade vegetable stock recipe is how easy it is to store for effortless meal prep. Store it to make a soup the next day, or freeze it for a handy ingredient to use months later.

  • Storage: Pour your veg stock into airtight mason jars (or any airtight container of your choice.) A large heat-proof measuring cup with a sprout (affiliate link) will help streamline this step. Once your jars reach room temperature, transfer them to the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing instructions: Transfer your cooled soup stock to freezer-safe, airtight containers—such as these Weck Jars (affiliate link) —being sure to leave a few inches open at the top. Then, store your stock in the freezer for up to 6 months. Adding removable freezer labels (affiliate link) helps me keep track of expiration dates. 
  • Thawing instructions: To thaw your homemade veggie stock, place it in the fridge overnight.
Veg stock stored and labeled in jars.

Vegetables to Avoid Adding to Broth

Though there are countless vegetables to use in vegetable broth, there are a few veggies to avoid. Eliminating the following ingredients will ensure your vegan broth recipe is as smooth and tasty as possible.

  • Starchy vegetables: I recommend avoiding starch-based vegetables, like potatoes (including sweet potatoes, baby potatoes, yellow potatoes, and potato peels) and turnips. These ingredients will make your stock clumpy and cloudy.
  • Zucchini and green beans: Vegetables like zucchini and green beans become bitter when simmered too long and may harsh the savory flavors of your broth.
  • Brassica family veggies: Vegetables from the Brassica family—including cruciferous vegetables, like kale, broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, mustard greens, and bok choy—will likely turn your veggie broth bitter. However, I often use kale stems (check out this handy guide to properly remove stems from kale) and chard stems as an addition. 
  • Beets and beet skins: These reddish-purple veggies will likely transfer their color into your stock, resulting in off-colored dishes when cooking.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make the best-tasting vegetable broth. Here are a few pro tips to help you as you make your own vegetable stock.

  • Rinse and chop veggies well: Be sure to remove all harmful debris from your veggies. When rinsing your ingredients, I recommend scrubbing them lightly under cold tap water with a soft vegetable brush. Then, chop your veggies into small pieces to ensure they release maximum flavor into your stock.
  • Choose fresh ingredients: Using fresh vegetables is the best way to give your vegetarian broth the best flavor. Avoid wilted or overripe produce, as these ingredients will give your vegetable soup stock a bitter taste. Organic vegetables are always preferable, but non-organic ones would also work.
  • Mix and match vegetables: To us, the secret to a good vegetable broth is to use a variety of vegetables in your mix. And when doing so, it is important to avoid using a lot of one kind. 
  • Roast or sauté your veggies: Roasting or sautéing your vegetables before adding them to your stock will help release their garden-fresh flavors, resulting in extra complexity and depth. These pre-cooked veggies will give you a brown vegetable stock with a more robust flavor than white stocks. To sauté your vegetables, cook them in a skillet with one tablespoon of olive oil for 15 minutes. To roast them, cook them in a 300-degree F. oven for 30-35 minutes.
  • Begin with cold water: I recommend beginning with cold water when cooking your veg stock. This more significant temperature differential will gradually extract the vegetables’ flavors, resulting in greater depth and a richer taste.
  • Simmer gently: After boiling your vegetable broth, reduce the mixture to a gentle simmer. This lower temperature will ensure that your stock comes out savory—not bitter—and clear.
  • Strain the veggie stock: Once the cooking time is completed, pour the mixture through a fine-mesh strainer to remove the remaining vegetable pieces. Some people also line it with a cheesecloth, but it is optional. Press the veggies against the strainer to extract their juices, then discard the remaining solids. This process will give your stock the most flavor while ensuring a smooth, clear texture.
  • Cool completely before storing: Before storing your DIY vegetable broth, let it reach room temperature. This cooling will ensure your storage containers don’t crack in the cold, reduce unwanted condensation, and prevent bacterial growth.
  • Adding salt: To avoid oversalting it, I prefer to begin with a small amount of salt —only one teaspoon—and add more as the flavors develop. However, if you prefer a saltier taste, you can add more.
Various veggie scraps in a sheet pan.
  • Vegetable Stock with Scraps: It is no secret that making homemade stock from vegetable leftovers is another popular method. Many people save their cooking trimmings and peels (such as carrot peels and onion skins) and store them in a freezer bag for future stock making. We are also fans of that method so we have dedicated a separate article to it, titled “How to make vegetable Stock from Scraps (and frozen scraps)”, where we covered the process in depth.

How to Use Veggie Stock

You can create hundreds of dishes using vegetable stock as a foundation point. Put it to good use with some of the suggestions below:

  • Vegetarian soup recipes: Veggie stock is a must when making these delectable soup dishes. Get your fall fix with a creamy, 30-minute dish like Pumpkin Ginger Soup or Wild Rice Chicken Soup. Or, use your stock for a soup recipe like my Spiced Chickpea Stew or Green Lentil Soup for a dish as delicious as it is filling.
  • Cooking grains or legumes: It doesn’t matter whether you prefer to cook quinoa on the stove, in an Instant Pot, in a rice cooker, or in the microwave. Prepare your quinoa with veggie broth, and you’ll be astounded by your grains’ savory flavor. You can even use vegetable stock for cooking wild rice or in popular wild rice recipes like my Wild Rice Pilaf or Wild Rice Stuffing. Looking for a hearty Mediterranean option? Cooking bulgur with this stock is an easy way to elevate your cooking or make dishes like Bulgur Pilaf. This vegetable broth recipe even makes an excellent base for cooking risotto!
  • Mashed potatoes: Looking for a healthy alternative to buttery mashed potatoes without sacrificing flavor? Instead of using milk or cream, try using veg stock instead! With this easy recipe, your mashed potatoes will come out rich and flavorful in no time.
  • Braising and sautéing vegetables: Add sophisticated depth to your favorite vegetable sides—like my Pan-Seard Mushrooms and Asparagus—by lightly braising them with vegetable stock.
  • Sauces and gravies: This quick vegetable broth provides an ideal base for dozens of savory sauces, like any of your pasta sauces or gravy.
  • Steaming vegetables: When you make your own vegetable broth, you have the perfect ingredient to give steamed vegetables an incomparably rich taste. Use your veg stock instead of water in Steamed Asparagus or any other steamed vegetable for an easy flavor upgrade.
  • Vegetable curries: Nothing beats the earthy, spicy taste of warm curry. Using my veggie stock recipe, you can add succulent flavor to dishes like Cauliflower Curry, Butternut Squash Red Curry Soup, and Curried Brown Rice.

FAQs

It’s a cinch to make vegetable broth from scratch. Here are the answers to some of the frequently asked questions:

What is the difference between vegetable broth and stock?

Vegetable stock generally has less seasoning and is often used as a base for other dishes. By contrast, vegetable broth tends to have more seasoning and can serve as either a recipe ingredient or a “finished dish,” ready to drink straight from a cup.

What not to put in vegetable stock?

I recommend eliminating starchy vegetables (i.e., potatoes), zucchini, green beans, cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, and beet skins from your ingredient list.

What is the most common vegetable mixture used in making stock?

The most common ingredient combination for veg broth is referred to as “mirepoix,” meaning the combination of onions, celery, and carrots.

Can you freeze homemade vegetable stock?

Yes! To freeze your homemade veggie broth, let it first reach room temperature. Transfer the liquid to airtight, freezer-safe containers, leaving 1-2 inches at the top of each container. It should be good for up to 6 months in the freezer.

How long does homemade vegetable stock last in the fridge?

When stored properly in airtight containers, this veg stock will last up to 5 days in the refrigerator.

What to do with the leftover vegetables from making veggie stock?

A great way to eliminate food waste and eliminate your vegetable scraps is to compost them.

What is the difference between white vegetable stock and brown vegetable stock?

White vegetable stock is made by simmering whole vegetables in water whereas the brown version is made by first roasting vegetables in water and then simmering them in water.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetables in a big pot to make vegetable stock.
Print

How to Make Vegetable Stock

Learn how to make vegetable stock at home cheaper than store bought vegetable broth. Homemade veggie stock is such as easy way to elevate any of your soups, stews, sauces and casseroles.
Course Vegan
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large onions roughly chopped
  • 4 medium size carrots chopped in 2-inch pieces
  • 2 celery stalks chopped
  • 1 whole head of garlic cut in half widthwise
  • 5 sprigs fresh parsley
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns about 8-10 whole peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 cup Mushroom or mushroom stems
  • 1-2 bay leaves
  • 1 leek with the top

Instructions

  • Place onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley and fresh thyme sprigs, salt and pepper and any of the optional add ins into a large stockpot or a Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water in.
  • Put the lid on and bring to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer, stirring once or twice, for about an hour to hour and a half.
  • Let it cool for 10 – 15 minutes and carefully strain using a fine mesh strainer placed over a large heat proof bowl, pressing the juices out of the vegetables with the back of a spoon. Discard the veggies.
  • Transfer the vegetable broth into jars. Cool them to room temperature before storing in the fridge or freezing for later use.

Notes

  • Rinse your vegetables well: It is best to give your vegetables a quick rinse to get any debris before using them in your stock. You can also use a soft brush to gently rub them (such as carrots). This way, there is no need to peel them. Needless to say, avoid using moldy or rotten vegetables.
  • Vegetables to avoid: You can use this basic recipe and add more veggies based on what you have on hand. However, we recommend avoiding cruciferous vegetables such as kale, cabbage, and Brussels sprouts as they can make your broth bitter. Also, starch veggies like potatoes would make your stock cloudy so it is best not to use them.
  • Storage & freezing instructions: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze it for up to 6 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock with scraps: You can make vegetable broth using kitchen scraps or even frozen scrap. The method is similar but there are a few other things to pay attention to. If you want to try that method, check out our detailed post on how to make veggie broth from scraps to learn more.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4780mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/feed/ 2
Vegetable Stock from Scraps https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/#respond Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:06:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66247 Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes. Add it to sauces for a rich, savory...

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes.

Add it to sauces for a rich, savory flavor, or use it as a delicious base for your favorite soups and stews. No matter how you use it, vegetable scrap broth will make your kitchen taste like a five-star restaurant. 

Kitchen scraps placed in a pot to make vegetable broth.

What Veggie Scraps to Use for Stock?

Don’t know what ingredients to add to your veggie scrap stock? Using this master list, you’ll find dozens of ideas, from hearty vegetable trims to savory veggie peels. 

  • The outer layer and skin of alliums: One of the most flavorful additions that you can add to a veggie broth from kitchen scraps is the outer layer of vegetables like onions, shallots, and garlic. In particular, onion skins and onion peels give scrap stock a hearty, robust taste.
  • Green parts of scallions and leeks: The green ends of green onions and leek tops can add mild, grassy undertones to your vegetable broth with scraps.
  • Fennel tops: Full of sweet, licorice flavor, fennel tops make a great addition.
  • Carrots and carrot tops: These carrot bits unlock sumptuous, sweet flavors in your stock. As a bonus, they also add great color!
  • Corn cobs: If you are like us a huge fan of the popular Mexican dishes, Mexican Corn Salad or Mexican Street Corn Soup and make them during the summer months, with this recipe, you can use the leftover corn cobs to lend your own vegetable broth a sweet, buttery taste. And if you have so many corn cobs then you can also make our Corn Broth recipe.
  • Mushroom stems: Don’t throw away your mushroom scraps the next time you make Roasted Portobello Mushrooms or Shiitake Mushroom Soups. Mushroom stems are the perfect ingredient to give your homemade stock an earthy, full-bodied flavor.
Veggie scraps to use for stock are on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Tomatoes and tomato skins: Some of my favorite leftover vegetable scraps to add are tomatoes and tomato skins. These pantry-classic ingredients add a bright and sweet flavor to any homemade broth.
  • Vegetable peels: Nearly any vegetable peel will work in this flavorful stock recipe, from carrot peels to squash peels. Even pea pods add delicious notes to this flavorful vegetable stock.
  • Herbs and herb stems: After using fresh herbs in a dish be sure to add your leftover stems to your vegetable stock! Fresh parsley and thyme are some of the best things to brighten up the taste of your vegetable scrap stock.
  • Peppers: There’s no need to let the tops of your bell peppers go to waste. Add them in for a light, earthy flavor. However, I recommend using bell peppers in small amounts, as they can give them a bitter taste if used too much.
  • Asparagus ends: Put your leftover asparagus bits (including the woody ends) to good use and add to the saved scraps pile. 

Optional Add-Ins

Want to add even more flavor to your veggie stock from scraps? Here are a few additional ingredients to elevate veggie scrap broth:

  • Onion, carrot, celery: These three ingredients—a mix called “mirepoix”—form a hearty vegetable stock base. They are also the backbone of a good vegetable broth. While scraps are usually enough, (optionally) you can also add an equal amount of each of these vegetables to ensure that your broth from veggie scraps has a rich, well-balanced flavor profile.
  • Garlic: If you prefer a bold, rich flavor, garlic cloves are a great way to add complexity to the stock. You don’t need to peel them, either; simply smash the cloves and add them directly to your vegetable scraps.
  • Bay leaf: I love to add bay leaves as they give the liquid irresistible herby undertones. Even better, you only need one bay leaf per batch of broth.
  • Salt: Salt can be a secret weapon when making veggie stock from scraps. Add a small amount of kosher salt (or sea salt) to bring out the nuanced flavors of your broth veggies.
  • Black peppercorns: Whole peppercorns are a classic ingredient in any stock recipe and this one is no exception.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric: Ginger and turmeric are my go-to’s when making Asian-inspired dishes. Use a small amount of these ingredients to complement your dish. Keep in mind, however, that turmeric will likely change the color of your broth.

What Vegetable Scraps Are Not Good for Stock?

There are no strict rules regarding which veggie scraps should be avoided in making vegetable stock. With that being said, in an ideal scenario, it would be preferable to exclude certain vegetables or at least use them sparingly. Below are a few of those:

  • Cruciferous vegetables: Avoid adding many vegetables from the Brassica family—such as kale, cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, chard, and Brussels sprouts, as these veggie scraps may give your broth a bitter flavor.
  • Starchy vegetable trimmings: I don’t recommend adding the skins and trimmings of starchy vegetables, like potatoes or potato skins, to your broth recipe, as they tend to make the stock cloudy.
  • Beets: I avoid beets in my kitchen scraps pile because they carry an intense color and overpoweringly earthy flavor.
  • Eggplant: I recommend avoiding eggplant trimmings in your food scraps to eliminate an unwanted slimy texture and unnecessarily strong flavor.
  • Spicy peppers: It isn’t easy to cook with veggie stock that’s too spicy. That’s why I avoid spicy peppers—such as jalapeños, serranos, and habaneros—when preparing my vegetable scrap stock.
  • Artichokes: Artichoke pieces tend to have a powerful taste that will overwhelm the other, more nuanced flavors of vegetable scrap broth.
  • Rotten or moldy vegetables: The most important rule of thumb is to use vegetables that aren’t rotten or moldy, as these ingredients will give your stock a bitter flavor and even pose a health risk.

How to Save Vegetable Scraps for Stock

Wash the vegetables well before use to keep the scraps as fresh, clean, and tasty as possible. A soft kitchen brush works well to eliminate any unwanted soil and debris. This way, your peels, ends, leaves, stems, and trimmings are ready to use directly after cutting.

Photos showing how to save scraps for stock in plastic bags.
  • In the fridge: You may store your vegetable scraps in an airtight Ziploc bag in the refrigerator and add them to your veggie scrap stock once you collect 4-6 cups. Labeling your bags will help ensure your ingredients don’t go bad before you use them. 
  • In the freezer: Another way to collect vegetable scraps is by putting them in an airtight container or a freezer bag in the freezer. Once you reach 4-6 cups, you can save them for later or make veggie stock immediately.

How to Make Vegetable Broth from Scraps

Making vegetable stock from scraps is the best way to use up vegetable leftovers without hassle. Follow these effortless instructions for savory, rich broth every time.

A collage of images showinghow to make veggie broth from scraps.
  1. Add the ingredients: Place all the veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a large stock pot or Dutch oven. If you’re making vegetable stock from frozen scraps, you don’t need to thaw them first. Just keep in mind that the total time of cooking will be longer. Pour the water over the veggie scraps, put the lid on the pot, and bring the contents to a boil over the stovetop. 
  2. Let it simmer: After it boils, leave the lid ajar, and let it simmer for 1-1½ hours.
  3. Strain: Strain the veggie stock broth by placing a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Discard or compost the leftover vegetables.
  4. Cool the stock: If you are using it right away, use it in your dish. Otherwise, pour the stock into mason jars or airtight plastic containers, and let the liquid cool to room temperature.
  5. Store: Once the liquid has cooled, store it in the fridge, or freeze it for later use.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

  • Store: Place broth in airtight plastic containers or mason jars. Once they are fully cooled, place them in the fridge and use them within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, let the liquid come to room temperature in freezer-safe airtight containers (such as Weck jars). Leave 1-2 inches at the top of each container. Then, store the stock in the freezer for up to 6 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broth in the fridge overnight.
Veggie scrap stock in a jar labeled with the date.

How to Use It In Your Cooking?

There are countless ways to use this flavorful homemade veggie stock from scraps. From creamy risotto to hearty soup recipes, the possibilities are endless when you make your own vegetable stock. 

  • Soups and stews: Veggie scrap stock makes a rich, flavorful base for countless delicious soup and stew recipes. Whether you whip up an umami-packed, one-pot Shiitake Mushroom Soup or a hearty, vegan French Lentil Soup, your kitchen scraps can create mouthwatering flavors in under an hour.
  • Poached vegetables with meat and fish: Who can resist buttery, tender veggies alongside a protein-packed main? Use your vegetable broth from scraps to make these crowd-pleasing menus, and your dinner guests won’t resist a second plate.
  • Risotto: Rich, creamy, and utterly delicious, risotto is one of my favorite Italian dishes. Now you can add incomparable savoriness to every bite by whipping up this classic recipe using this simple recipe as the cooking liquid.
  • Cooking grains: There’s no reason why your grains have to be bland. You can give anything from Jasmine Brown Rice, Black Rice Pilaf to white rice, and even Stovetop Quinoa gourmet taste using vegetable scrap stock.

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips for the best results as you make your own veggie broth from scraps:

  • Don’t use old or moldy vegetables: Even though we’re using scraps, you don’t want to use moldy or rotten vegetables. These unpalatable veggies will give your broth a sour, bitter taste and may introduce unwanted bacteria to your recipe. Be sure, too, to give your veggies a good rinse before adding them to your mix.
  • Mix and match veggies: Don’t be afraid to experiment with new blends of vegetables. Various combinations will result in different flavors, which may better suit a specific recipe or taste preference.
  • Don’t overuse any vegetables: One of the best parts about making broth from veggie scraps is that the flavor improves with a balanced mix of vegetables. Try not to use too much of any one kind of vegetable, as this will give your broth’s favor a monotone, often unsavory taste.
  • Try to compliment your favorite recipes: Nothing tastes better than using a perfectly paired veggie stock to make a recipe. I recommend tailoring which veggie scraps you use to bring out your menu’s natural flavors. For example, when cooking Asian-inspired dishes—like my fan-favorite Ramen Bowl—I love adding ginger to my veggie scrap mix. 
  • Roast or sauté the scraps: Though this extra step takes more prep time, roasting or sautéing veggie scraps before adding them to your broth mix will give your stock a rich, caramelized flavor. To roast your veggies, bake them in the oven at low heat (300 degrees F.) for 20-25 minutes, and toss them halfway through the cooking process. To sauté them, cook them in a pan for 5-7 minutes with a bit of olive oil.
  • Cook it at a gentle simmer: To avoid giving your veggie scrap stock a bitter flavor, bring your mix to a gentle simmer after it reaches a boil. Don’t cook it for more than 1½ hours, and be sure to taste it before adding it to other recipes.
  • Store it in small portions: Store your stock in 1-2 cup portions, which makes it easy to use in future meals (including your weekly meal prep.)
Vegetable scrap broth with veggies after the cooking time is completed.

FAQs:

Have more questions about this homemade vegetable broth with scraps? This simple guide covers everything from making vegetable broth from frozen scraps to alternate cooking methods.

Can I reuse/recycle the veggie scraps after making veggie broth?

I don’t recommend reusing veggie scraps after making homemade broth because you’ve likely already extracted all their flavor and nutrition. Instead, you can discard or put the scraps in a compost bin.

How to make vegetable stock from frozen scraps?

You don’t have to thaw your vegetable pieces when you make veggie stock from frozen scraps. Simply follow the recipe as usual, considering the cook time will be longer.

How to make vegetable stock from scraps in an Instant Pot?

To make veggie scrap broth in a pressure cooker, use the same amount of ingredients written in the recipe and set your Instant Pot to high pressure for 30 minutes. Though, keep in mind that it will take about 20 minutes for your mix to reach high pressure before beginning the cooking process.

How many cups of vegetable scraps should I use for stock?

Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetable stock from scraps in a big pot from the top view.
Print

Vegetable Stock from Scraps Recipe

The foolproof method for making vegetable stock from kitchen scraps. This method is not only delicious but also much cheaper than the vegetable stock you buy at the grocery store. Use it in soups, stews, casserole, sauces, and more!
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 7kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-6 cups of veggie scraps ie peels, trimmings, tops, and bottoms
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 8-10 black peppercorns
  • 8-10 cups of water

Optional Add ins:

  • 2-3 cloves of garlic smashed
  • 3-4 parsley stems

Instructions

  • Place veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a stock pot or a Dutch oven. If using, add garlic and parsley stems.
  • Pour water over the veggie scraps.
  • Bring it to a boil and let is simmer for 1 to 1 ½ hours (partially cover it with the lid.)
  • When done, turn the heat off and let it cool for 20-30 minutes.
  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and strain vegetables. Discard or compost vegetables.
  • Pour the veggie scarp stock into jars (or plastic containers), bring to room temperature, and store in the fridge or freeze for later.

Notes

  • Ratio of kitchen scraps to water: Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.
  • Vegetables that are good for scraps: Trimmings and peels of alliums (onions, leeks, shallots), carrot, celery, garlic, tomatoes, and corn cobs are a few to name.
  • Vegetables to avoid: Peels and trimmings of cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, spicy peppers, and artichokes are a few to name. We also recommend avoiding any moldy or rotten vegetables or scraps.
  • Frozen scraps: You can use this exact recipe with frozen scraps. There is no need to thaw. The only difference would be the time of cooking.
  • Storage & freezing: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a Weck jar or a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can freeze it for up to 6 months. We recommend thawing it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock using whole veggies: If you prefer making stock using whole vegetables (instead of kitchen scraps), be sure to check out our detailed post on Homemade Vegetable Broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 7kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.01g | Saturated Fat: 0.003g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 773mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.05mg

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/feed/ 0
11 Types of Eggplants https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-eggplants/ https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-eggplants/#respond Thu, 30 Mar 2023 15:15:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65661 Eggplant is a versatile vegetable that gets a range of reactions from people. Some adore its rich, meaty texture, while others find its distinct flavor to be an acquired taste. With so many eggplant varieties and recipe ideas, this summer vegetable offers something for everyone who enjoys the unique flavor of this spongy vegetable. Whether you are interested in Roasting Eggplant Halves, Baking Eggplant Slices, Charring Eggplant on the Stove,...

The post 11 Types of Eggplants appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Eggplant is a versatile vegetable that gets a range of reactions from people. Some adore its rich, meaty texture, while others find its distinct flavor to be an acquired taste. With so many eggplant varieties and recipe ideas, this summer vegetable offers something for everyone who enjoys the unique flavor of this spongy vegetable.

Whether you are interested in Roasting Eggplant Halves, Baking Eggplant Slices, Charring Eggplant on the Stove, Roasting Eggplant as a Whole, Sauteeing Eggplant, or Grilling Eggplant, this informative guide will teach you how and when to use each type.

Different kinds of eggplant from the top view with text on the image.

Eggplant, known botanically as Solanum melongena, is technically a berry, but we cook and eat it like a vegetable. A member of the nightshade family, eggplant thrives in hot weather.

Globally, it goes by many different names, including aubergine, brinjal, melanzana, garden egg, patlican or guinea squash.

1. Globe Eggplant

Globe or American eggplant is the most common eggplant sold in grocery stores throughout the United States. Of all the eggplant types, this is the one that you can use in (pretty much) any eggplant recipe.

Two globe eggplants next to each other on a white backdrop.

Plump and spherical, with a somewhat teardrop shape and deep purple color, globe eggplants are available year-round. While the skin is edible, the thick skin can be tough or bitter to some, which is why some people peel it before using it in recipes.

With that being said, I personally do not peel the eggplant before cutting it down into smaller pieces (or cubes) or slices. If you are new to it, here is a quick guide to How to Cut an Eggplant.

This is a variety of eggplant that is extremely versatile, as it can be grilled or roasted whole, then blended into Babaganoush or Turkish Eggplant Dip, sliced, breaded, and made into Baked Eggplant Parmesan, braised in Eggplant Beef Stew  and Eggplant Curry.

2. Italian Eggplant

With a teardrop shape, Italian eggplants are similar in appearance to globe eggplants but smaller in size. This means the flesh will be much more tender once cooked, with a sweeter flavor. 

An Italian eggplant in the hands of a woman from the top view.

Versatile in nature, Italian eggplants can be easily cooked using various techniques like braising, grilling, sauteing, frying, and stewing. They are wonderful when they are used to make Crispy Roasted Eggplant or popular Italian dishes like Eggplant Involtini and Eggplant Caponata. 

Similar to the globe variety, there is no need to have to take the extra step of Salting Eggplant as it does not have the bitter taste that you experience with some of the other types of eggplants.

3. Sicilian Eggplant

Sicilian eggplants in a farmer's market stand.

Sicilian eggplant falls under the same umbrella as the Italian variety, but these are small, round, and light pink or lavender in color. Their flesh is custard-like and sweet, making it a must-try if you are lucky enough to spot them at the farmer’s market. Other varieties of this small purple eggplant go by the name Rosa Bianca eggplant.

4. Graffiti Eggplant

Graffiti eggplants have interchanging purple and white stripes (hence the name graffiti) with smaller seeds and thinner skin. This makes them sweet (almost fruit-like) and never bitter. 

Graffiti round eggplants in the farm stand in a basket.

While this light purple eggplant is considered an Italian eggplant, it is larger than Sicilian eggplant with a skin color with similar hues of purple. Graffiti eggplant bodes well roasted whole like a potato, then split and enjoyed just as is or turned into stuffed eggplants like my Karniyarik recipe.

5. Chinese Eggplant

Chinese eggplants as one of the long thin eggplant varieties.

Chinese eggplants are elongated, thin eggplants with skin ranging from pastel purple to lilac. They have a white flesh interior with fewer seeds, making them sweeter than globe eggplants. Chinese eggplant, sometimes used interchangeably with Japanese eggplant (see below), is best enjoyed in stir-fry dishes like this Eggplant Stir Fry recipe.

6. Japanese Eggplant

Japanese eggplant is similar to Chinese eggplant. However, they have deep purple skin and are shorter in length. Both of these long skinny eggplant varieties are sometimes labeled Asian Eggplant and make a wonderful addition to stir-fry dishes.

7. Indian Eggplant

Indian eggplants in a bowl from the top view.

One of the small eggplant varieties, Indian eggplants are plump and round with rich purple skin. Oftentimes, you can spot them at the farmer’s market, labeled as Baby Eggplants, as fully mature Indian eggplants only get about 2 inches long. Popular in Indian cuisine, they are quick-cooking and make a wonderful addition to curries. Their small size also bodes well for stuffing and roasting.

8. Thai Eggplant

Thai white eggplant doesn’t really look like eggplants at all, as they have white to pale green skin (although some can be purple) and a small, round shape.

Thai eggplants in a bowl from the top.

They have a mild flavor and are slightly crunchy, which is why they are oftentimes eaten raw in salads or served crudité style with a flavorful dip or spread in South Asian cuisine. Thai eggplants are usually hard to find, but a specialty Asian market or farmer’s market may be your best bet to spot them.

9. White Eggplant

White eggplants on a white backdrop.

White eggplants are similar in shape and structure to globe eggplant, with one exception – their glossy white skin. They also have a mild taste and can be used interchangeably with globe or Italian eggplant in recipes.

10. Fairy Tale Eggplant

Fairy tale eggplants are slender and small eggplants with thin, purple, and white streaked skin. Their flesh is delicate and creamy and benefits from a quick saute or stir fry.

11. Heirloom Eggplants

Heirloom eggplants can range in color from white to light purple to deep violet and have a mild, sweet flesh. The term ‘heirloom’ denotes a traditional variety of plants not associated with modern or commercial agriculture. In other words, these seeds have been passed down through generations of farmers and can be any variation of the eggplant crop.

Heirloom eggplants are easy to find at farmer’s markets, especially during the summer months, when eggplant is in its peak season (July – October). Different varieties go by different names, but some notable ones include Black Beauty, Little Fingers, Kermit, Barbarella, Santana, Ping Tung, Turkish Orange, Old White Egg, Early Long Purple, or Little Green eggplants.

Eggplant Varieties Chart

The color, shape, taste, and cooking technique varies based on each eggplant variety. Here they are broken down into a handy chart:

Eggplant NamesColorShapeTasteBest Uses
Globe / AmericanDeep Purple, VioletLarge, Oblong, Spherical, TeardopSour, Bitter, Sweet, MeatySaute, Broil, Grill, Roast, Puree, Braise, Stir Fry, Stuff
ItalianDeep Purple, VioletSmall, Oblong, TeardropSweetSaute, Broil, Grill, Roast, Puree
SicilianLight Pink, LavenderSmall, RoundSweet, Custard-likeSaute, Broil, Grill, Roast, Puree
GraffitiWhite and Purple StreaksSmall, OblongSweet, TenderSaute, Broil, Grill, Roast, Puree, Stuff
ChinesePastel Purple, LilacLong, ThinSweetGrill, Saute, Braise, Stir Fry
JapaneseDeep Purple, VioletShort, ThinSweetGrill, Saute, Braise, Stir Fry
IndianDeep Purple, VioletVery Small, RoundSweet, TenderStuff, Roast, Braise, Curry
ThaiPale Green, White, Sometimes PurpleSmall, RoundMild, CrunchyRaw, Salads, Crudite, Curry
WhitePure White, GlossyLarge, Oblong, TeardropMild, SweetSaute, Broil, Grill, Roast, Puree, Braise, Stir Fry, Stuff
Fairy TalePurple and White StreaksSmall, SlenderDelicate, CreamySaute, Grill, Stir Fry
HeirloomWhite, Light Purple, Lilac, Deep Purple, Reddish-OrangeSmall, Oblong, Round, Plump, RippledMild, Sweet, Meaty, NuttySaute, Broil, Grill, Puree

FAQs

What does an eggplant look like?

Although we associate the world of eggplants with the large dark purple eggplants with a green calyx, commonly referred to as Globe eggplants, they can range from round to oblong, thin to thick, and white to purple in color.

How many different types of eggplant are there?

There are countless eggplant varieties, it’s hard to know exactly how many. Commercially grown eggplants are easy to spot in stores, while rare heirloom varieties of eggplants may be available at farmer’s markets during peak season.

What is the best-tasting eggplant?

Although more about personal preference, globe eggplants seem to win over most for their versatility in cooking and perfect balance of sweet and sour flavors.

Which eggplant is sweeter?

Typically, Italian, Sicilian, and Heirloom eggplants all have a sweet note. This is thanks to their thinner skin and smaller, sometimes fewer seeds.

Sicilian eggplant vs. regular eggplant, what is the difference?

Sicilian eggplant is small and round with a light pink to lavender colored skin, whereas regular eggplant is large, oblong, and deep purple.

Chinese eggplant vs. Japanese eggplant, what is the difference?

Chinese eggplant is pastel purple to lilac in color with a long, slender shape. Japanese eggplants are deep purple, short and thin.

Chinese eggplant vs. regular eggplant, what is the difference?

Chinese eggplant is long, thin, and light purple, as opposed to regular globe eggplant, which is large, thick, and deep violet.

Japanese eggplant vs. regular, what is the difference?

Japanese eggplant is small, thin and deep violet, whereas regular eggplant is large and spherical.

Can you substitute regular eggplant for Japanese eggplant?

Yes, in most instances, depending on your recipe, you can substitute regular eggplant for Japanese eggplant. The key, as with most eggplant recipes, is to season liberally and cook until tender.

The post 11 Types of Eggplants appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-eggplants/feed/ 0
How To Cut Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-eggplant/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 18:09:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65404 Eggplant is a mild-flavored veggie that comes from the nightshade family, which also includes zucchini, tomatoes, and peppers. While there are many Types of Eggplant, we’re using the globe eggplant in this guide. The globe eggplant is the most common variety in the United States and is easily recognizable as rounded, glossy, and deep-purple in color. However, this guide will work for any type of eggplant, like Chinese or Japanese...

The post How To Cut Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Eggplant is a mild-flavored veggie that comes from the nightshade family, which also includes zucchini, tomatoes, and peppers. While there are many Types of Eggplant, we’re using the globe eggplant in this guide. The globe eggplant is the most common variety in the United States and is easily recognizable as rounded, glossy, and deep-purple in color. However, this guide will work for any type of eggplant, like Chinese or Japanese eggplants.

Eggplant cut into various shapes on a cutting board shown from the top view.

A ripe eggplant has many health benefits, including a high amount of fiber, antioxidants, vitamins, and minerals. If you’re looking to incorporate this nutrient-dense veggie into your daily diet, use this guide to learn how to prepare eggplant for your favorite vegan, vegetarian, or meat dishes

How to Trim an Eggplant?

Before learning how to chop an eggplant, you’ll first want to know how to trim it. Doing so helps you create a flat bottom that makes cutting the vegetable easier and safer. Here’s how to trim eggplant:

A person showing how to trim an eggplant from the side view.
  1. Trim the stem: Rinse the eggplant under cold running water. Use a sharp knife to cut the stem off the top of the whole eggplant. Discard. 
  2. Cut the bottom: Spin it around and cut a small slice off of the bottom of the eggplant. Discard. 

Keep in mind that some recipes that use halved eggplant, such as my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, don’t require trimming beforehand. 

Should I Peel Eggplant Before Using in a Recipe? 

Eggplant skin is nutritious and soft once cooked, so peeling an eggplant isn’t necessary before slicing. However, if you’d prefer to peel your eggplant’s skin, you can do so with a vegetable peeler (affiliate link.) 

A person using a vegetable peeler to peel the skin from an eggplant.

I recommend trimming it first (following the instructions above). You can either set it down horizontally on the cutting board, supporting it with your hand and peeling it along its length, or place the eggplant upright to peel it vertically.

How to Cut an Eggplant Crosswise?

Cutting eggplant crosswise (into rounds) is one of the most simple and easy ways to prepare it for cooking. Eggplant rounds are perfect to roast in the oven for a simple side dish or to use in recipes like my Baked Eggplant Parmesan. To cut eggplant crosswise, simply:

  1. Trim the eggplant: Use a sharp chef’s knife to cut the stem from the top of the eggplant. Spin it around and cut off a small part of the bottom. 
A person cutting an eggplant into rounds shown from the side view.
  1. Slice into rounds: Lay the eggplant on its side and carefully slice it into rounds, holding it firmly with your non-dominant hand as you slice. You can make each eggplant slice as thick as desired, but most recipes call for ½-inch thick slices. Continue to slice until you’ve reached the end. 

How to Slice an Eggplant Lengthwise? 

Slicing eggplant lengthwise is another easy technique that yields longer strips instead of rounds. This technique is the best for grilling but is also required for various popular dishes. Here’s how to slice eggplant:

A person cutting off the top and bottom of an eggplant and then peeling it.
  1. Trim the eggplant: Use a sharp chef’s knife to cut the stem from the top of the eggplant. Spin it around and cut off a small part of the bottom. If you prefer to peel your eggplant, you can do so during this step. 
A person slicing eggplant into long slices shown from the top view.
  1. Cut lengthwise: Stand the eggplant up vertically on your cutting board. Using one hand for a firm hold, cut eggplant into thin slices (about ½-inch thick) from top to bottom. Cutting it vertically is usually easier to do with shorter or smaller eggplants, as they’re more sturdy when standing up. If you are cutting a larger eggplant, you can begin by standing it up to cut it vertically and, when you get closer to the end of the eggplant, lay it down on its side to finish slicing it horizontally. Alternatively, you can slice the entire eggplant horizontally if that is more comfortable for you. 

How to Cube an Eggplant?

Our final technique, dicing eggplant, yields small, fairly equally-sized cubes. Diced eggplant is ideal to use for stir-frying, pasta dishes, soups, and stews. Keep in mind that eggplant shrinks as it cooks, so you may want to cut it into larger cubes. If you’re wondering how to dice eggplant, here’s how:

  1. Trim the eggplant: Use a sharp chef’s knife to trim the stem end of the eggplant. Spin it around and cut off a small part of the bottom.  If you prefer to peel your eggplant, you can do so during this step. 
A person cutting an eggplant into slices and then cubes shown from side view.
  1. Cut lengthwise: Stand the eggplant up vertically on your cutting board. Hold the top firmly with one hand and slice ½ inch strips from top to bottom. If you’re cutting a particularly long or large eggplant, it might be more difficult to cut it vertically as you reach the end of the eggplant. To make things easier, you can lay it on its side to finish cutting it horizontally as you reach the end of the eggplant. 
  2. Cut into strips: Stack the slices on top of one another and set them flat-side down on the cutting board. Cut the slices vertically into ½ inch strips. 
  3. Dice: Rotate the eggplant strips 90 degrees and cut ½ inch slices widthwise (against the lengthwise slices). Continue cutting until the entire eggplant is diced. 

Expert Tips for Cutting Eggplant

Now that you know how to cut an eggplant into cubes, slices, and rounds, follow these additional tips to achieve the best results, optimal freshness, and maximum flavor. Here’s what I recommend:

  • Use proper equipment: Before preparing your eggplant, make sure you have the proper equipment. Eggplants are fairly large, so you’ll want to use a large, sharp chef’s knife (affiliate link). Alternatively, you can also use a serrated knife, which will offer more control as you’re cutting. Always hold the eggplant firmly to avoid accidental cuts, and keep your fingers away from the sharp blade. To prevent slippage, it’s a good idea to use a sturdy, stable cutting board. 
  • Keep it fresh: If you aren’t planning on preparing your eggplant right away, store it in the vegetable drawer in your fridge. I recommend using it within two days and cutting it up right before you plan to use it. An eggplant will start to oxidize and turn brown soon after cutting it, but you can follow two methods to slow this process and keep it fresh. First, you can store it in the fridge in a bowl filled with cold water and salt. Alternatively, you can brush your slices with lemon juice and store them in a plastic bag in the fridge. 
  • Salt your eggplant: If, while cutting your eggplant, you realize it’s particularly juicy, you may want to consider salting it. This is especially true if you plan to roast or grill your slices and want to prevent them from getting soggy during the cooking process. Simply put, salting raw eggplants helps to draw out excess moisture from the eggplant while also eliminating bitter flavors. To learn more, check out my post on How to Salt Eggplant.

How to Use Cut Eggplant in Recipes

Using only the three simple techniques outlined in this guide, you can prep an eggplant for use in endless recipes. This versatile veggie is perfect to serve roasted as a simple side dish or in crowd-pleasing, popular Italian recipes. Here are some ways to use your cut eggplant: 

  • Cut crosswise (rounds): Once you cut your eggplant into rounds, you can make Roasted Eggplant Slices and Stovetop Eggplant with just a small amount of oil, salt, and pepper. For extra fun, dippable party food, make these Baked Breaded Eggplant Cutlets with panko bread crumbs. Finally, for everyone’s favorite dish, use your slices in a classic Eggplant Parmesan
  • Sliced lengthwise: Long strips of eggplant are an ideal pasta replacement in classic Italian recipes like Eggplant Lasagna and Eggplant Parm. For a lighter yet just as delicious take on Italian involtini, try my Eggplant Involtini. Lastly, for a fun, late summer side dish, use your eggplant slices to make Grilled Eggplant. 
  • Cubed: Chopped eggplant cooks up quickly in a pan and is ideal for pasta dishes like Eggplant Baked Ziti and Eggplant Pomodoro Pasta. Eggplant cubes are also perfect to use in veggie-based recipes like Ratatouille and Eggplant Stew!

FAQs

How to cut eggplant for grilling?

The best way to cut an eggplant for grilling is lengthwise into strips. Simply trim both ends of the eggplant and sit it upright on your cutting board. Holding the eggplant firmly with one hand, cut it from top to bottom into ½ inch slices. These longer slices are easier to turn on the grill and have plenty of surface area to prevent them from falling through.

How to cut an eggplant for eggplant parm?

You can use either round slices or longer, lengthwise slices for eggplant parm. First, trim both ends of the eggplant. For round slices, lay it on its side and cut it into ½-inch thick rounds. For lengthwise slices, sit your trimmed eggplant upright on the cutting board and cut into ½-inch thick slices from top to bottom.

Do you remove seeds from eggplant before cooking?

It is not necessary to remove the seeds of an eggplant before cooking. Some eggplants have a very mild flavor, but different varieties may have seeds contributing to a bitter taste. If preferred, to decrease the bitterness of the vegetable, you can remove the seeds by cutting the eggplant in half lengthwise and scooping out the seeds with a spoon.

Is it safe to eat the skin of an eggplant?

The purple skin of an eggplant is perfectly safe to eat and even contains a variety of vitamins and other nutrients, but whether to peel it is up to your personal preference. If you’re wondering how to peel an eggplant, I recommend trimming the ends, sitting it upright on a cutting board, and peeling it with a vegetable peeler.

How to choose a good eggplant at the grocery store?

When it comes to choosing a good eggplant from the grocery store or your garden, make sure to pick one that feels heavy for its size, is slightly firm (yet not hard), and has vivid, shiny skin. Older eggplants will have soft spots and a dull appearance.

Reader-Favorite Roasted Eggplant Recipes

Once you know how to cut up eggplant, you’re ready to use this yummy, nutrient-dense veggie in endless recipes! Here are some favorite cooked eggplant recipes to try:

If you try this How to Cut Up an Eggplant recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant cut into shapes on a cutting board with a knife.
Print

How to Cut Eggplant

Learn How to Cut an Eggplant with this easy guide that will help you safely and confidently sharpen your knife skills! We've included step-by-step instructions for cutting an eggplant into rounds, lengthwise slices, and cubes, making this delicious, nutrient-dense vegetable ready to add to your favorite recipes.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1
Calories 115kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Eggplant

Instructions

  • Trim: Rinse the eggplant under cold water. Use a sharp knife to cut the stem off the top of the eggplant. Turn it around and cut a small slice off of the bottom of the eggplant. Discard both pieces.
  • Peel: If desired, use a vegetable peeler to peel the eggplant’s skin. You can either stand it up to peel it vertically or set it down horizontally on the cutting board, supporting it with your hand, to peel it along its length.
  • To cut into rounds: Lay the eggplant on its side and carefully slice it into ½-inch thick rounds. Continue to slice until you’ve reached the end.
  • To slice lengthwise: Stand the eggplant up vertically and cut it into thin slices (about ½-inch thick) from top to bottom. For particularly a long or large eggplant, lay it down on its side as you reach the end to finish slicing it horizontally.
  • To dice: Follow the instructions for slicing the eggplant lengthwise. Stack the slices on top of one another and set them flat-side down on the cutting board. Cut the slices vertically into ½ inch sticks. Rotate the eggplant sticks 90 degrees and cut ½ inch slices widthwise (against the lengthwise slices). Continue cutting until the entire eggplant is diced.

Notes

  • Globe Eggplant: We used a globe eggplant in this tutorial since it is widely available here in the US. However, you can apply the same techniques to other types of eggplants that have similar shapes or sizes.
  • Keep it fresh: If you aren’t planning on using your eggplant right away, store it in the vegetable drawer in your fridge. I recommend using it within two days and cutting it up right before you plan to use it. An eggplant will start to oxidize and turn brown soon after cutting it, but you can follow two methods to slow this process and keep it fresh. First, you can store it in the fridge in a bowl filled with cold water and salt. Alternatively, you can brush your slices with lemon juice and store them in a plastic bag in the fridge. 

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cut Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-eggplant/feed/ 0
Types of Oats https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-oats/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 03:07:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65176 Oats have a wonderful reputation for being a heart-healthy breakfast with plenty of fiber, vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. But because this whole grain comes in so many different shapes and sizes, it’s important to distinguish one from the other. Whether you want to discover the difference between types of oatmeal or names of oats, this ultimate guide will get you started. And if you are a big oat lover, be...

The post Types of Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Oats have a wonderful reputation for being a heart-healthy breakfast with plenty of fiber, vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants. But because this whole grain comes in so many different shapes and sizes, it’s important to distinguish one from the other.

Whether you want to discover the difference between types of oatmeal or names of oats, this ultimate guide will get you started. And if you are a big oat lover, be sure to check out our other posts on the subject: the difference between steel-cut oats and regular oats and quick oats vs. rolled oats.

Different types of oats are placed in bowls from the top view.

How Are Oats Made?

Unprocessed oats originate from the cereal plant known as Avena sativa. This cereal grain is grown for its seed, with the stalks and inedible hull attached. Once these stalks and hulls (outer layer) are removed, it becomes what we know and recognize as whole oat groats.

The impressive health benefits of oats have much to do with the fact that it is a whole grain, with the bran, endosperm, and germ still intact. All these parts combined contribute to oats’ high amounts of fiber (most notably beta-glucan), vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants.

Once processing and manufacturing take place, that’s when the oat groats become their varying cut and/or steamed counterparts. Each difference in manufacturing alters the taste, texture, and cooking process. As a result, cooked oats, also known as oatmeal, vary in texture and taste depending on the kind of oats used.

Oats are naturally gluten-free. However, they are often processed in facilities that also process wheat and barley, both of which are gluten-containing grains. Therefore, if you are following a gluten-free diet, it is important to check the packaging to ensure that they are certified gluten-free.

Different Types of Oats

With so many different types of oats on grocery store shelves, it’s important to know the difference between them so that you can be a master of oats and even experiment with different kinds of oatmeal with ease. Let’s discover the unique characteristics of each cut of this whole grain.

Different kinds of oats (steel cut oats, Scottish oats, and Whole oat groats) are in bowls from the top view.

Whole Oat Groats

Whole Oat Groats (Oat Kernels / Oat Berries) is a cereal grain in its whole form and the least processed form of oats.  Although popular in many health food stores, this one takes the longest to cook, with a cooking time of about 30-45 minutes. Because of this, many recipes feature whole oat groats made in the Instant Pot or slow cooker. Thanks to their nutty and chewy texture, they are a great choice for savory dishes like grain salads or risotto.

Steel Cut Oats / Irish Oats

Steel Cut Oats (Irish Oats / Irish Oatmeal) are just as the name suggests. They are whole oat groats that have been cut into 2-4 smaller pieces with steel blades. This allows more water to penetrate into the oat kernels, resulting in a chewier texture and a shorter cooking time (compared to Whole Oat Groats), about 20-30 minutes. 

However, you can shorten the active cooking time by using different techniques such as soaking them overnight as I did with this Steel Cut Overnight Oats recipe or cooking them in an instant pot like in this Steel Cut Oats in a Pressure Cooker recipe, or even letting the slow cooker do most of the work for you as I did in this Overnight Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats recipe.

Alternatively, you can also use it in savory dishes like my Savory Steel Cut Oats for a healthy and satisfying meal. With a rich and nutty flavor, steel-cut oatmeal is perhaps one of the most satisfying breakfasts you can make for yourself.

That being said, even though a bowl of steel-cut oatmeal is a delicious meal, I do not recommend them for baking recipes like granola bars, baked goods, or muesli because of its long cooking time.

Scottish Oats

Scottish Oats are whole oat groats that have been stone ground to create milled oats of varying shapes and sizes. Although not too common here in the United States, it has been the traditional Scottish breakfast for quite some time. With a unique texture and flavor, Scottish oats are mostly used in porridge (aka hot cereal) and oatcakes. They take about 10 minutes to cook on the stove top and can also be prepared in the microwave.

Rolled oats, quick oats, and instant oats in small bowls from the top view.

Rolled Oats / Old-Fashioned Oats

Whether you call them Rolled Oats, Old Fashioned Oats or Regular Oats, these are by far the most popular variety of oats on the market. These are made by first steaming the whole oat groat and then rolling them flat with steel rollers. This rolling process stabilizes oils in the grain, creating a longer shelf life and shorter cooking time, which makes them a pantry staple for many. Thickness varies based on brand, with thicker oats contributing to a chewy texture.

Since they are Incredibly versatile, rolled oats can be used in so many different applications, including Almond Milk Oatmeal, Baked Oatmeal with Dates, Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal, Greek Yogurt Overnight Oats, Overnight Muesli, Oatmeal Raisin Cookies, and Homemade Granola.

Quick Oats

Quick Oats take processing a step further. They are rolled oats that have been steamed and then rolled thinner, sometimes chopped into smaller pieces. Because they are thinner, this creates a greater surface area, and as a result, the cooking time is much shorter. A quick 1-3 minute zap in the microwave and quick-cooking oats are ready for consumption.

With that being said, you can get away from cooking them if you let them soak for a few minutes in your choice of liquid (milk, water, juice, etc.) That is why, I use quick oats in my Homemade Muesli recipe (aka breakfast cereal.)

Instant Oats

Instant Oats are the most processed of the whole oat kernel. Once steamed and rolled thin, instant oats are precooked, dried, and then cut into even smaller pieces. As the name suggests, instant oatmeal cooks in an ‘instant’ after only a quick soak in hot water or a 1-minute cook time in the microwave.

Since instant oats appear in many processed foods, it’s important to steer clear of those with added sugars or preservatives, as this simply negates the health benefits of oats. If you are in need of instant oats, ‘oats’ should be the only ingredient on the label.

Oat Bran

Oat Bran is the outer layer of the whole oat kernel. Technically speaking, it is not a whole grain since it does not contain the endosperm or germ, but it is celebrated for its high fiber content. Oat bran makes a wonderful addition to porridge, cereal, smoothies, or baked goods if you are looking to increase your fiber, but keep in mind that too much oat bran will alter the final texture.

Oat flour in a bowl from the top view.

Oat Flour

Oat Flour is basically rolled oats that have been ground into a fine powder. It is also a gluten-free flour that is high in fiber and protein. A wonderful addition to baked goods, oat flour can be used as a thickening agent as well. If you own a food processor, you’re in luck and can make homemade oat flour whenever the recipe calls for it.

Types of Oats Appearance and Texture

The appearance and texture of whole oats vary based on the cut and style. Here they are broken down into a handy chart:

Type of OatLooks LikeTextureCook Time on Stovetop
Whole Oat GroatsRice, BarleyGrain Pilaf30-45 minutes
Steel Cut OatsRice cut into piecesToothsome, Chewy20-30 minutes
Scottish OatsCoarse mealRich, Creamy10 minutes
Old Fashioned (Rolled Oats)Flat, irregularly round flakesCreamy, Chewy5-10 minutes
Quick OatsCoarsely chopped, thinner flakesMushy1-3 minutes in the microwave
Instant OatsVery thin, small chopped flakesVery Mushy1-minute hot water soak or microwave
Oat BranBrown, very thin flakesCreamy, Chewy3 minutes
Oat FlourSlightly beige, fine flour / powderSoft, TenderVaries – based on use / application

Nutrition Information for Most Common Kinds of Oats

The nutritional value of oats varies based on manufacturing. According to Nutrition Value, here are their key nutrition facts broken down in the table below:

Note: The nutritional values below are based on Bob’s Red Mill brand. The values below are for reference only and may change based on the brand and amount you use. As always, refer to your preferred nutrition calculator.

Nutrition Facts per 2 oz (56 grams)Whole Oat GroatsSteel Cut OatsScottish OatsRolled OatsQuick OatsInstant Oats 
Calories227219221221227230
Protein6.3 g6.4 g9.5 g7.4 g7.6 g7.1 g
Carbs43 g40 g36 g40 g40 g41 g
Fiber6.3 g6.5 g6.3 g6.3 g5.1 g5.3 g
Net Carbs36.7g33.5 g29.7 g33.7 g34.9 g35.7 g
Fat3.2 g3.2 g3.9 g3.7 g3.8 g4.4 g
Sugar0 g1.3 g0 g1.1 g0 g0 g

Nutritional Value resources are: Steel Cut Oats, Rolled Oats, Quick Cooking Oats, Whole Grain Oat Groats, Scottish Oats, Instant Rolled Oats.

FAQs

Which type of oats is healthiest?

Steel-cuts oats and Scottish oats are considered the healthiest as these are the least processed and have the lowest net carbs and effect on your blood sugar.

Where do oats originate from?

Modern oats originate from the cereal grain known scientifically as Avena sativa. They are primarily grown in North America and Europe.

What’s the difference between oats and oatmeal?

Oats refer to uncooked whole grain, while oatmeal refers to the porridge-like dish that results from cooking in water, milk, or plant-based milk such as Almond Milk.

What is the difference between rolled oats and old-fashioned oats?

Rolled oats and old-fashioned oats are the same things. Oftentimes the terms are used interchangeably.

Is there a difference between Quaker oats vs. rolled oats?

Quaker oats is the brand. Their product line contains rolled oats, along with steel-cut oats, quick oats, instant oats, and bran cereal.

Are steel cut oats or rolled oats whole grain?

Both steel-cut and rolled oats are whole grain as they are made from the whole oat kernel, which includes the bran, endosperm, and germ.

Is it OK to eat oats raw?

According to Healthline, it is safe to eat rolled oats raw since they have already been heated during the manufacturing process. But raw oats should be soaked in some sort of liquid or milk prior to consumption to improve digestibility and nutrient absorption.

The post Types of Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-oats/feed/ 0
Steel Cut vs Rolled Oats https://foolproofliving.com/steel-cut-vs-rolled-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/steel-cut-vs-rolled-oats/#respond Thu, 09 Mar 2023 03:05:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65183 Considered one of the healthiest whole grains, easy recipes made with oats (like Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Almond Milk Oatmeal) have become all the rage. But did you ever wonder which is better for you and your lifestyle? With all the different types of oats to choose from, it’s important to know the unique characteristics of each one. Let’s dive deep into the world of regular oats vs. steel-cut...

The post Steel Cut vs Rolled Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Considered one of the healthiest whole grains, easy recipes made with oats (like Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Almond Milk Oatmeal) have become all the rage. But did you ever wonder which is better for you and your lifestyle?

With all the different types of oats to choose from, it’s important to know the unique characteristics of each one. Let’s dive deep into the world of regular oats vs. steel-cut oats to discover which option is best for you and your family.

Steel cut oats and old fashioned rolled oats in bowls with text on the image.

What Are Steel Cut Oats and Rolled Oats? And What Do They Look Like?

Raw oats begin as any whole grain, with their hulls and stalks attached. After harvest, these inedible hulls are removed, resulting in whole oat groats (or oat kernels). You can purchase whole oat groats at many health food stores, but they take the longest to cook, which is why their cut and rolled alternatives are preferred. 

A bowl of steel cut oat and another one with regular oats from the top view.

Steel Cut Oats

Steel Cut Oats, also known as Irish Oats, are whole oat groats that have been cut into 2-3 smaller pieces with large steel blades, hence the name ‘steel-cut.’ This allows more water to penetrate into the oat kernels, resulting in a shorter cooking time when compared to whole oat kernels. It is considered one of the least processed forms of oats.

Rolled Oats

Rolled Oats, also known as Old Fashioned Rolled Oats or Regular Oats, are whole oat groats that have been steamed and then rolled into flakes. This rolling process stabilizes the grain, creating a longer shelf life and shorter cooking time.

Other Types of Oats

If you browse grocery store shelves, you may also come across these two different types of oats:

Different types of oats in small bowls with a text on each bowl.
  • Scottish Oats: Scottish oats are oat groats that have been stone ground as opposed to cut with a blade. This creates pieces of varying sizes and, some say, a creamier texture once cooked.
  • Quick Oats / Instant Oats: The more the oats are either steamed or rolled, the faster the cooking time and softer the texture. This results in quick-cooking oats or instant oatmeal. If you want to know more about them, be sure to check our article on Rolled Oats vs. Quick Cooking Oats for more information.

What is the Difference Between Steel Cut Oatmeal and Regular Oatmeal?

First things first, oatmeal or porridge is the cooked version of the oats themselves. But because steel cut and old-fashioned oats vary in shape and texture, the end result is different too.

Steel cut oatmeal and oatmeal made with rolled oats in small bowls from the top view.

Steel Cut Oatmeal: Steel cut oatmeal will have a coarser texture and chewier bite with a nutty flavor, but they also take longer to cook. I like to think I have mastered the art of steel-cut oats at home with Steel Cut Oats in a Pressure Cooker, Overnight Slow Cooker Steel Cut Oats and Savory Steel Cut Oats.

Old Fashioned Oatmeal: Regular oatmeal is much quicker to cook because of the greater surface area of the oat flakes, and the texture is softer and creamier. Because old-fashioned oats are so versatile, flavor and texture will vary based on their method of preparation. 

I love to prepare Baked Oatmeal with Dates, Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal, and Overnight Greek Yogurt Oats, depending on my cravings.

Although commonly used to make oatmeal, regular oats are also a prominent ingredient in many baking recipes like Oatmeal Raisin Cookies, Pumpkin Oat Muffins, Overnight Muesli, and Homemade Granola.

Steel Cut Oats vs Old Fashioned Oats Nutrition Comparison

The nutritional value of both steel-cut and old-fashioned oats varies. According to Nutrition Value, here are their key nutrition facts broken down in the table below:

Nutrition Facts per 2 oz (56 grams)Steel Cut OatsRolled Oats
Calories219221
Protein6.4 g7.4 g
Carbs40 g40 g
Fiber6.5 g6.3 g
Net Carbs33.5 g33.7 g
Fat3.2 g3.7 g
Sugar1.3 g1.1 g

Nutritional values are based on Bob’s Red Mills’ Steel Cut Oats and Rolled Oats.

Benefits of Rolled Oats and Steel Cut Oats

The benefits of rolled vs. steel cut oats are diverse and more about personal preferences to taste, texture, and cooking time. Below is a summary of some of the key benefits:

  • Taste: Steel-cut oats are nuttier with more depth of flavor when compared to rolled oats, which have a milder flavor.
  • Texture: Steel cut oats have a coarse and chewy texture, whereas rolled oats are soft and tender.
  • Cooking Time: Depending on the brand, stove top cooking times for steel-cut oats can take up to 20-25 minutes versus rolled oats which only take about 5-8 minutes.
  • Nutrients: In addition to being a complex carbohydrate and a good source of protein and fiber, they are both good sources of many vitamins and minerals, including thiamine (B1), magnesium, phosphorus, zinc, iron, copper, manganese, and selenium.
  • Fiber: Oats in any form are a great source of both insoluble and soluble fiber. They are an especially good source of beta-glucan fiber, a specific type of soluble fiber that has proven health benefits for you and your digestive tract.
  • Glycemic Index (GI Scores): According to Medical News, Steel cut oats have a glycemic index of 53, whereas rolled oats have a glycemic index of 57. They also say, “Steel-cut oats may take longer to digest, reducing spikes in blood sugar levels. Both oat types are better choices than other forms, such as instant oats, which have a GI of about 83.”
  • Gluten Free: Oats are inherently gluten free, and a great choice for those with celiac disease or those dedicated to a gluten-free lifestyle. All that being said, based on the manufacturing process and risk of cross-contamination with gluten-containing products, it is important to purchase certified gluten-free oats if gluten is a health concern. Some of my favorite brands include One Degree and Bob’s Red Mill.
  • Use: Wondering which one should you use in cooking? Both steel-cut and rolled oats can be made into a delicious bowl of oatmeal or porridge. However, if you are a baking aficionado and looking to incorporate oats into baked goods, muffins, cookies, bread, granola or granola bars, or the popular Swedish breakfast muesli, rolled oats are the better option.

Shopping and Storing

Look for both the steel-cut variety and rolled oats in the breakfast cereal aisle of grocery stores, or purchase a bag or two online.

  • Shopping: When selecting oats, opt for unsweetened oats with no added sugar or preservatives. Whole oats (also referred to as Whole Grain Oats) should be the only ingredient.
  • Storage: Once opened, both can be stored in the pantry for up to 4 months or in the freezer for up to 8 months.

FAQs

What are steel cut oats made of?

Steel cut oats are whole oat kernels that have been ‘steel-cut’ into 2-3 smaller pieces. This creates greater water retention when making oatmeal or porridge.

Why is it called steel cut oats?

Steel-cut oats are so named because they are literally cut with a steel blade. They may also be referred to as Irish Oats or Irish Oatmeal.

Are rolled oats whole grain?

Yes, rolled oats are whole grain with the bran, germ, and endosperm intact. Old-fashioned rolled oats are whole oat groats that have been steamed, then rolled into flakes.

What is steel-cut oatmeal?

Steel cut oatmeal is oatmeal that has been prepared using steel-cut oats. Liquid and cooking time will vary based on the brand you use.

How much protein in steel cut oats?

One 2 oz (56 g) portion of steel-cut oats contains 6.4 g of protein. Keep in mind this is the quantity of protein in steel cut oats only. The end result will vary depending on the milk or yogurt you use to cook and or soak the oats.

Are steel cut oats better than rolled oats? Which one is healthier?

Gram for gram, steel cut oats contains more protein and fiber, and fewer carbs, when compared to rolled oats. But note that the cooking time of steel cut oats is much longer. Since the variation in health benefits is so minimal, both steel cut and rolled oats are healthy whole grains to add to your pantry.

Can I substitute rolled oats for steel cut?

Rolled oats vs steel cut oats are diverse, and it is hard to substitute rolled oats for steel-cut oats. The cooking technique changes with each version of this whole grain, so it’s best to use the appropriate cut based on the recipe or application.

The post Steel Cut vs Rolled Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/steel-cut-vs-rolled-oats/feed/ 0
Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats https://foolproofliving.com/rolled-oats-vs-quick-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/rolled-oats-vs-quick-oats/#comments Thu, 09 Mar 2023 03:03:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65287 If you are an avid oat consumer, then you know there are so many different types of oats on grocery store shelves. While the world of Oat Types is vast (with so many different types of oats), today, we are covering the difference between old-fashioned oats vs. quick oats. This post will help you discover everything you need to know, including how they are made, their nutritional content, and their...

The post Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you are an avid oat consumer, then you know there are so many different types of oats on grocery store shelves. While the world of Oat Types is vast (with so many different types of oats), today, we are covering the difference between old-fashioned oats vs. quick oats. This post will help you discover everything you need to know, including how they are made, their nutritional content, and their uses in the kitchen.

And if you want to learn more about oats, check out Steel Cut Oats vs. Rolled Oats, too.

A bowl of rolled oats and a bowl of quick oats from the top view.

What are Rolled Oats, and How are They Made?

Regular Rolled Oats, also referred to as Old-Fashioned Oats, Regular Oats, and Large Flake Oats, start out as whole oat groats with their husks (outer shell) still intact. Once the husk is removed, the oats are steamed, then rolled flat with heavy steel rollers (hence the name rolled oats), and dried in a kiln (thermally insulated chamber). Thickness varies depending on brand and manufacturing, but the general process remains unchanged.

The beauty of rolled oats is that the drying process contributes to their mild flavor and stabilizes the healthy oils in the grain by deactivating an enzyme that can cause the oats to spoil. This creates a longer shelf life, usually, about 6-9 months once opened, making them a staple pantry ingredient for many.

What are Quick Cooking Oats and How are They Made?

Quick Oats (Quick-Cooking Oats) start out just like rolled oats. They are the whole oat kernel with the husk intact. Once the husk is removed, the oat kernels are steamed for a longer period of time, then rolled thinner. The thin oat flakes are then cut into smaller pieces.

The thinner and smaller oats create a greater surface area, resulting in less time on the stove.

Showing the difference between quick oats vs old fashioned oats vs instant oats by displaying each type of oat in a bowl.

Quick Oats vs. Instant Oats

Now, at this point, you might ask; Are quick-cooking oats and instant oats that I see on the shelves of my local grocery store the same?

The answer is no. Instant Oats are not the same as quick oats. Instant oats take processing a step further. They are quick oats that are precooked, dried, and then cut into even smaller pieces. Instant Oats are ready to eat after a 1-minute soak in hot water or zap in the microwave.

Additionally, most packaged instant oats brands sold in the markets today are geared toward people who are looking for a quick and easy breakfast. While there is nothing wrong with that, most of these individual-sized packaged instant oats are packed with sugars. So, it is best to read the ingredients label and decide whether or not it is the right option for you.

What is the Difference Between Rolled Oats and Quick Oats?

Rolled oats are steamed for a shorter period of time and rolled into larger, thicker flakes. Quick oats are steamed longer and rolled into thinner flakes, then cut into small pieces.

Because quick cooking rolled oats have a greater surface area, they can absorb liquid more quickly, which makes for a faster cook time and a softer texture. Rolled oats take longer to fully cook and absorb liquid.

Old fashioned oats and quick oats in small bowls with text on the image.

Here are the differences in appearance, texture, and cook time broken down into a handy chart:

Type of OatLooks LikeTextureCook Time
Old Fashioned (Rolled Oats)Flat, oval flakes (thickness varies)Toothsome, Chewy, Texture8-12 minutes
Quick Oats(Quick Cooking Oats)Thin, small, irregular flakesSoft, Mushy1-2 minutes

Nutritional Comparison

The nutritional value of quick-cook oats vs. rolled oats varies based on manufacturing. However, in general, both types of oats are nutritious whole grains that are high in antioxidants, fiber, vitamins, and minerals. According to Nutrition Value, here are their key nutrition facts broken down in the table below:

Note: The nutritional values below are based on Bob’s Red Mills’ Rolled Oats and Quick Cooking Oats. Values will vary based on brand. As always, refer to your preferred nutrition calculator.

Nutrition Facts per 2 oz (56g)Rolled OatsQuick Cooking Oats
Calories221227
Protein7.4 g7.6 g
Carbs40 g40 g
Fiber6.3 g5.1 g
Net Carbs33.7 g34.9 g
Fat3.7 g3.8 g
Sugar1.1 g0 g

Old Fashioned Oats vs. Quick Oats Glycemic Index

According to the British Journal of Nutrition, researchers from Quaker Oats tested the Glycemic Index of 72 oat products. Based on their research, rolled oats have a glycemic index of 53, while quick-cooking rolled oats have a glycemic index of 71.

If you are not familiar, the glycemic index measures how much a food spikes your blood sugar with a value between 0-55 being low, 56-69 being medium, and 70-100 being high.

It appears that rolled oats have a lower glycemic index, and quick oats can raise your blood sugar quicker because of their smaller size.

Keep in mind certain packages of quick oats also contain added sugars and salt. This will alter the nutrition information and glycemic index as well.

Can Old Fashioned Oats be Substituted for Quick Oats?

The answer truly depends on the recipe. Here are the best uses for rolled oats and quick oats, along with some substitution suggestions:

  • Uses of Rolled Oats: Rolled oats are incredibly versatile and can be used in so many different applications. Some of my favorites include Cinnamon Apple Oatmeal, Almond Milk Oatmeal, Baked Oatmeal with Dates, Homemade Granola, and 5-Ingredient Granola Bars.
  • Uses of Quick Oats: Quick oats are smaller and cook faster, which alters the texture of many recipes. With that being said, if you don’t mind a few extra minutes of soaking time, you can get away with cooking them. I love to use quick oats in Homemade Muesli as quick oats quickly soften as soon as it interacts with liquid without having to cook them.
  • Substituting: Generally speaking, you can use rolled oats and quick oats interchangeably in healthy breakfast recipes like regular oatmeal or porridge, smoothie recipes, baked goods like Healthy Oatmeal Raisin Cookies, Pumpkin Oatmeal Muffins or Oatmeal Cookies, or homemade oat flour (made by processing oats in a food processor until they are pulverized.)
  • Overnight Oats: The only application where substituting quick oats for old-fashioned oats may not be the best idea is when making overnight oats with almond milk, Yogurt Overnight Oats, and Overnight Muesli, as quick oats break down too much and become too soggy. With that being said, in a pinch, you can use quick oats instead of regular oats in your favorite overnight oats recipe. The texture would be softer (and mushier), but it would still work.

FAQs

Are rolled oats the same as oatmeal?

Rolled oats typically refer to the uncooked, rolled grain, while oatmeal is the porridge-like dish that results from cooking oats with milk or water and serving them (usually) warm in a bowl for breakfast. There is also instant oatmeal that is usually made with quick oats or instant oats.

Do you have to cook rolled oats?

According to Healthline, you do not have to cook rolled oats, and it is safe to eat rolled oats raw since they have already been heated during the manufacturing process. A great example of using raw rolled oats in a recipe is the popular overnight oats. It is made by soaking raw oats in milk for a long time, which not only helps make them softer but also improves digestibility and nutrient absorption.

Rolled oats vs. quick oats, which is healthier?

Nutritionally speaking, rolled oats and quick oats contain similar amounts of protein and fat, with slight variances in calories, fiber, and net carbs. And since they both come from whole oat groats, they have very similar health benefits, like being high in antioxidants and beta-glucan (the soluble fiber that helps lower the LDL (or bad) cholesterol and makes you feel full), which help reduce the risk of heart disease and type 2 diabetes. However, because of how they are produced, quick oats also have a higher glycemic index and fewer grams of fiber when compared to rolled oats. Therefore, rolled oats are considered healthier than quick oats.

The post Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/rolled-oats-vs-quick-oats/feed/ 1
15 Best Substitutes for Bulgur Wheat https://foolproofliving.com/substitutes-for-bulgur-wheat/ https://foolproofliving.com/substitutes-for-bulgur-wheat/#comments Fri, 09 Dec 2022 18:03:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62929 Whole-grain bulgur wheat is one of the many healthy grains on the market. Before packaging, the whole wheat kernels go through a process of being parboiled, dried, and then cracked. If you are new to it, be sure to check my foolproof guides on bulgur; What is Bulgur Wheat and How to Make Bulgur. It is no secret that bulgur is a staple food in Middle Eastern, Mediterranean, and Turkish...

The post 15 Best Substitutes for Bulgur Wheat appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Whole-grain bulgur wheat is one of the many healthy grains on the market. Before packaging, the whole wheat kernels go through a process of being parboiled, dried, and then cracked. If you are new to it, be sure to check my foolproof guides on bulgur; What is Bulgur Wheat and How to Make Bulgur.

It is no secret that bulgur is a staple food in Middle Eastern, Mediterranean, and Turkish cuisine. It is the star ingredient when preparing my bulgur wheat pilaf or easy tabbouleh salad recipe

Substitutes for Bulgur Wheat such as barley, millet and quinoa placed in bowls from the top view.

But there are times when I run out of this hearty grain yet still want the same slightly nutty flavor and chewy texture. That’s when an alternative to bulgur wheat comes in handy.

What Can I Substitute for Bulgur?

Here are the best bulgur substitutes, most of which are easy to find in grocery stores or online. Below you will also find plenty of options for those following a gluten-free diet due to celiac disease or for personal reasons.

Bulgar substitutes in small bowls from the top view.

Quinoa

Quinoa is a gluten-free substitute for bulgur wheat with a similar profile of health benefits. It is also a great one to use as a substitute for tabbouleh, which is probably the most popular bulgur recipe. Quinoa tabbouleh is just as delicious and refreshing as its traditional version made with bulgur.

With plenty of quinoa meals already on the blog, we love this pseudo-grain because it is a complete protein containing all essential amino acids, vitamins, and minerals and cooks up just as fast as bulgur. It also offers the same texture, making it an excellent substitute and an ideal bulgur replacement. Additionally, quinoa is a great choice for soups, stews, and salads and can be used 1 to 1 for bulgur.

You can use quinoa and bulgur interchangeably in any of my quinoa salad recipes. And if you are new to cooking this superfood, be sure to check our guide on how to cook quinoa on the stove.

Couscous

Whole wheat couscous, also known as pearled couscous or Israeli couscous, is actually a type of pasta made from crushed durum wheat semolina. Native to North Africa, it is ideal to add to salads, stews and even to serve with roasted vegetables. It still has the same chewy bite as bulgur and cooks up in a matter of minutes. This makes it a great bulgur alternative when short on time.

Cracked Wheat

Cracked wheat is whole wheat berries that have been milled into smaller pieces. It offers a similar nutty taste and firm texture to bulgur, while the main difference is that it requires a longer cooking time since the grains have not been par-boiled before packaging. It is a good bulgur alternative to my Bulgur Wheat Patties.

Wheat Berries

Speaking of wheat berries, whole wheat berries are another great alternative to bulgur, with a bouncy, chewy texture and super nutty flavor. Because they are the whole berry with the bran, germ, and endosperm, they can take upwards of an hour to cook. Just make sure to keep that in mind if adding to soups or stews.

Kamut

Kamut, another popular ingredient in ancient times, is a great bulgur wheat substitute with a touch of sweetness. It has a buttery, nutty flavor similar to that of buttered popcorn. Keep in mind that this whole grain that takes about an hour when cooked on the stove.

Farro

Farro is another whole grain with a nutty flavor and super chewy bite similar to that of bulgur wheat. Because the grains are larger, they need to be boiled longer. But the plump, tender kernels make a great addition to soups, stews, and side dishes.

Barley

Barley is another replacement for bulgur wheat that’s just as easy to prepare. Technically speaking, it is not a whole grain since it does not contain the outer bran, but the flavor is just as pronounced and nutty. Thanks to its firm texture, it is ideal for stir-fries, casseroles, soups, and stews. I use it often in this Ottolenghi butternut squash salad recipe.

Grains considered as bulgar wheat alternatives in small bowls from the top view.

Orzo

Orzo is a pasta that comes in the same shape as rice. Because the pasta is so small, it cooks up rather quickly on the stove and offers a similar texture profile as bulgur. Stick to whole wheat orzo for even more fiber and minerals. Orzo is a great replacement for bulgur wheat when making my One-Pot Bulgur with Chicken recipe.

Rice

Rice is another versatile ingredient that can be used in place of bulgur (especially when making my Turkish Bulgur Pilaf). White rice is soft and chewy, whereas brown rice has a delicate texture and nutty flavor. Just note that brown rice takes much longer to cook but contains much more fiber and minerals than white rice.

Bamboo Rice

Bamboo rice is a short-grain rice variety infused with fresh bamboo juice since it is the seed from the flowering bamboo plant. The bamboo juice adds a delicate green color and the grains cook up tender with a bright, herbaceous flavor. This makes it a unique twist to traditional bulgur. That being said, bamboo rice can be hard to find, so if you are lucky enough to spot it in stores, pick up a bag and get cooking.

Buckwheat

Buckwheat groats are a gluten-free cereal grain that is light-dark brown in color with a slightly triangular shape. It was first cultivated in southeast Asia, then brought to Europe and America. Botanically speaking, it is a fruit seed (related to rhubarb) rich in vitamin b prepared just as you would any other grain that cooks up to a silky, chewy texture. It is a good option for soups, salads, or hot morning breakfast cereals. I usually use it when making my Buckwheat Overnight Oats, which is a great alternative to Bulgur Porridge.

Millet

Millet grains are small, circular beads with a slight yellow hue. They make a great alternative to bulgur since they cook up fast and provide a good source of nutrients. It’s important to note that you must soak millet overnight to remove the acid in its outer coating.

Amaranth

Amaranth, very similar in shape and size to millet, is an ancient grain from South America that is very nutritious. It is an easy-to-prepare flowering grain that can be cooked on the stovetop or even microwaved to make puffed amaranth grain. Just like millet, the grains must be soaked overnight before cooking.

Teff

Teff grains are the smallest of the bunch and are indigenous to Ethiopia. Since the grains are so small, the texture and palatability are different than bulgur, but it still packs a nutty punch. Plus, they are the quickest cooking grain, only needing about 10 minutes on the stove.

Shelled Hemp Seeds

Shelled hemp seeds (aka cannabis Sativa) are a wonderful gluten-free replacement for bulgur wheat. They are nutty, chewy, buttery, and packed with plenty of protein. Hemp seeds are a great choice for tabbouleh or grain salads. They can be consumed raw, so there is no need to cook them.

FAQs

What grain is similar to bulgur?

There are a number of grains that are similar to bulgur, but the top contenders include quinoa and rice, which both happen to be gluten-free.

What can you use instead of bulgur for tabouli?

Quinoa is the best alternative for bulgur when making tabouli. The small seeds are very similar in shape, size, and taste to a traditional bulgur tabouli recipe.

Is barley a substitute for bulgur?

Yes, barley can be a good substitute for bulgur. Just keep in mind that barley is not a whole grain since it does not contain the outer bran.

What can I substitute for bulgur wheat in kibbeh?

Either quinoa or rice. Quinoa has the same nutty flavor, whereas rice is a bit softer and has a milder flavor.

Can I substitute bulgur for cracked wheat?

Yes, bulgur can be substituted for cracked wheat and vice versa. The only difference is that bulgur has been par-boiled (whereas cracked wheat has not), so the cooking time for bulgur is much shorter.

Can you substitute quinoa for bulgur?

Yes, quinoa can be substituted for bulgur at a 1:1 ratio. It is a great substitution when preparing pilaf, tabbouleh, and salads.

Is bulgur and buckwheat the same thing?

No, bulgur is a whole wheat grain, whereas buckwheat is a gluten-free seed. Although different, they can both be used interchangeably in recipes.

Can you substitute oats for bulgur?

Substituting rolled oats for bulgur is not recommended. However, steel-cut oats make a unique and interesting twist when using them in place of bulgur wheat in recipes. They would make a great choice for tabbouleh or salads.

More Helpful Bulgur Related Articles

  • What is Bulgur Wheat?: Learn about bulgur wheat’s types and nutritional benefits in this comprehensive guide, along with tips on how to buy and store.
  • A Comprehensive Guide to Cooking Bulgur Wheat: Cooking bulgur on the stove, in the microwave, or in a rice cooker has never been easier, thanks to this foolproof guide.

The post 15 Best Substitutes for Bulgur Wheat appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/substitutes-for-bulgur-wheat/feed/ 2
How To Make Beef Gravy https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/#respond Tue, 15 Nov 2022 19:04:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61843 Mixed with bold garlic and hearty beef broth, this homemade beef gravy makes a decadent addition to mashed potatoes, steak, meatloaf, and dozens of other beef dishes. Making brown gravy with beef broth is a surefire way to add a creamy, seasoned taste to dozens of tasty dishes. My easy beef gravy pairs with everything from roast beef to Rosemary Mashed Potatoes to beef tenderloin, and it only takes minutes...

The post How To Make Beef Gravy appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Mixed with bold garlic and hearty beef broth, this homemade beef gravy makes a decadent addition to mashed potatoes, steak, meatloaf, and dozens of other beef dishes.

Making brown gravy with beef broth is a surefire way to add a creamy, seasoned taste to dozens of tasty dishes. My easy beef gravy pairs with everything from roast beef to Rosemary Mashed Potatoes to beef tenderloin, and it only takes minutes to make. Say goodbye to stressful holiday dinner prep and start making gravy using my easy recipe.

A person ladling gravy over mashed potatoes from the side view.

Before we start, please note that people refer to beef gravy using various terms, such as brown gravy, dark gravy, and beef stock gravy. Essentially, all these terms refer to the same thing, which is gravy made with beef stock, broth, or pan drippings leftover from cooking beef. 

Ingredients

To make this homemade brown gravy recipe, you only need a handful of simple ingredients that you probably already have in your pantry. I prefer to prepare this dish with Low-Sodium Beef Broth (affiliate link), though you can also use my recipe for homemade Chicken Stock in a pinch and skip the grocery store altogether. 

Ingredients for a gravy made of beef broth from the top view.

You can also use beef stock instead of beef broth if you prefer making gravy from beef stock. Beef stock tends to have a thicker, milder flavor than beef broth, but you can use the two interchangeably in this recipe.

  • To make beef gravy with cornstarch: To make this quick gravy, you’ll need cornstarch, butter, beef broth, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. And if you need to make this recipe gluten-free, you can use arrowroot starch instead of cornstarch.
  • To make brown broth gravy with flour, simply use the same ingredients except for all-purpose flour instead of cornstarch. You may also use gluten-free flour for a gluten-free gravy recipe.
  • Homemade beef gravy with drippings: If you prefer making gravy from drippings, save the drippings from a pot roast, steak, beef roast, prime rib, beef tenderloin, or another beef dish for future use. Then, for every 2 cups of broth, use 2-3 tablespoons of pan juices instead of butter. In some cases, you might not have as much at the bottom of the pan. If that is the case, you can use a combination of butter and pan drippings.
  • Beef gravy with bouillon: No beef broth? No problem! You can easily make beef gravy with bouillon cubes instead of broth. I recommend using one beef bouillon cube or one teaspoon of Better Than Boullion (affiliate link) for every cup of hot water. To give your make-ahead beef gravy recipe extra rich flavor, you can also use an equal mix of beef and chicken bouillon.

Optional Seasoning Ideas:

When it comes to seasoning beef gravy, you have several options. Here are some of my favorites:

  • Fresh herbs: Add an exquisite, garden-fresh flavor by infusing your gravy with a bouquet of fresh herbs, like thyme, sage, parsley, and rosemary. 
  • Switch up the fat: You can also use bacon fat instead of unsalted butter for extra savoriness. Or, give bold depth by adding smoky Roasted Garlic or creamy Garlic Butter.
  • Worcestershire sauce: I use Worcestershire sauce as my secret ingredient for its sweet, vinegary undertones. However, you can omit it and add a splash of wine or sherry instead to brighten your gravy’s flavors. Another option is to add ½ teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a hint of tangy, sharp notes.

How to Make Brown Gravy Without Drippings?

Most people make brown gravy from pot roast, steak, beef tenderloin, and even bacon drippings. However, there are dozens of other tasty solutions if you don’t have drippings. For me, this is usually the case when I want to make it ahead of time and have it ready for serving. 

Below, you’ll find two methods to make a homemade beef gravy recipe without drippings. The first is made with flour and the second is made with cornstarch:

Using Flour

If you’re a fan of bold flavor, making gravy with beef broth and flour is the way to go. Slightly browned butter gives the mixture a rich, caramelized flavor, while its flour base helps the classic brown gravy store and reheat better.

The most important thing when it comes to making DIY beef gravy with flour is to thoroughly cook the butter and flour before adding the remaining ingredients. If you skip this step, you will end up with beef gravy with raw flour taste, and let’s face it, no one wants that. 

A person showing how to make beef gravy with flour from the top view.
  1. Prepare the flour roux: Melt the butter over medium heat in a medium saucepan or skillet. Then, add the all-purpose flour to the pan and cook, constantly whisking, until the flour mixture turns light golden brown (~3 minutes). The secret here is to be patient as you constantly whisk the mixture with a wire whisk (affiliate link). Initially the mixture will clump up and collect on the whisk, but it should loosen and turn brown as you continue whisking.
  2. Thicken the beef broth: Pour the beef broth into the pan, ¼ cup at a time. Whisk it thoroughly after each pour. Once you add the beef broth, continue to whisk the liquid until it thickens (3-4 minutes).
  3. Add seasoning: Stir in the seasonings. Taste your beef broth flour gravy and add in more as necessary.
  4. Simmer the beef stock gravy: Turn the heat to medium-low and let it simmer for 5-7 minutes, stirring occasionally.

Using Cornstarch

Making beef gravy with cornstarch from scratch is quicker and easier. You use the same set of ingredients, except that you substitute plain flour with cornstarch.

A person whisking gravy on the stove from the top view.
  1. Boil the mixture: Melt butter in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat. Once melted, stir in the beef broth, Worcestershire sauce, and seasonings. Bring the beef mixture to a boil, then let it simmer for 2-3 minutes, stirring occasionally.
A person showing how to make brown gravy from scratch on the stove.
  1. Prepare a cornstarch slurry: While it simmers, place the cornstarch in a medium-sized ramekin or measuring bowl. Then, transfer 4 tablespoons of the hot liquid to the ramekin and whisk it until it forms a paste. If it doesn’t form a paste right away, you can add more liquid until it does.
  2. Thicken the beef base gravy: While whisking constantly, slowly pour the cornstarch paste into the beef mixture. Continue stirring until the gravy reaches your desired consistency (2-3 minutes). Keep a close eye on it, as this happens quickly. Please note that heating beef gravy with cornstarch for too long will thin it out. So, it is best to remove it from the heat as soon as it reaches your desired level of thickness. If it thins out, you can thicken it by making a small amount of cornstarch slurry and stirring it into the gravy.
  3. Serve: Transfer the quick beef gravy into a cup or gravy boat and use it in your recipe.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Thaw

Make-ahead beef gravy is a boon for easy meal prep and hassle-free storage. After just one go, you’ll be making gravy from beef broth all year round, from holiday gatherings to weeknight dinners. 

  1. Make ahead: You can make this brown beef gravy up to three days ahead of time. Be sure to let it reach room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container and storing it in the fridge until ready to use.
  2. Reheat: To reheat, microwave it in 30-second increments (making sure to stir after each time) until it reaches your desired temperature. You could also heat it over the stovetop, mixing regularly. Another crowd-friendly option is to heat it in the oven alongside other dishes like turkey or beef roast. Remember that you might need to add more beef stock or water if your gravy is too thick.
  3. Store: To store leftovers, let them reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  4. Freeze: You can freeze it in an airtight container for up to 2 months. When ready to use, thaw it overnight in the fridge.

Expert Tips

Making brown gravy from scratch is the easiest way to transform simple ingredients into an irresistible condiment to serve along with your favorite dishes. With a few tips and a few minutes, you can make this easy brown gravy recipe like a pro.

  • Your gravy will thicken: Keep in mind that this basic beef gravy recipe will thicken as it sits. If your mixture becomes too thick, you can add a splash of beef stock or cold water while reheating it. 
  • Taste for seasoning: The key to making homemade brown gravy super flavorful is to ensure that it is properly seasoned. So, be sure to give it a taste and add extra seasoning as necessary. You may also enhance its flavor by adding other seasonings like fresh herbs or a splash of wine.
  • Lumpy gravy: You should not end up with lumpy gravy if you are whisking it constantly. However, if your brown gravy sauce ends up having chunks of flour or cornstarch, don’t worry. You can remove them by processing the gravy with an immersion blender or running it through a strainer. 
  • The best equipment to use: When making beef gravy from scratch, it’s important to have the right equipment. If you choose to make brown gravy with cornstarch, I recommend using a medium saucepan (affiliate link). However, I suggest using a stainless steel skillet (affiliate link) to make beef gravy with flour, as you’ll need a wide area for browning your butter and making the roux. You’ll also need a roasting pan to prepare brown gravy with drippings.
Mashed potatoes topped with beef gravy in a bowl from the top view.

Where to Use Dark Gravy?

Using beef gravy for mashed potatoes and steak is a classic, but why stop there? Here are a few other dishes that you can pair with this tasty homemade gravy:

  • Potato dishes: The rich flavor of creamy beef gravy makes it the perfect topping for potato-based dishes like Rosemary Mashed Potatoes and Mashed Potato Casserole. You can also serve easy homemade beef gravy with French fries for an effortless take on classic poutine.
  • Beef recipes: It should come as no surprise that gravy made from beef stock makes an excellent pair with—what else?—beef! Satisfy your comfort food cravings by serving this easy recipe with meatloaf, Pot Roast, or Instant Pot Pot Roast. Or, transform your kitchen into a five-star restaurant by serving this traditional beef gravy alongside steak, beef tenderloin, Salisbury steak, or even prime rib.
  • Poultry: With a gorgeous brown color and well-seasoned taste, this simple recipe makes the perfect gravy for dozens of poultry dishes. Serve this easy homemade brown gravy with Turkey Meatloaf, Bone-in Chicken Breast, or Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a hearty weeknight meal.

FAQs

What is beef gravy made of?

Beef gravy ingredients generally include cornstarch or flour, butter, and beef stock as a base. If you need to make beef gravy without beef broth, you can also make it using bouillon cubes instead. After preparing the gravy base, seasonings often include onion and garlic powder, salt, and black pepper.

How to thicken beef broth for gravy?

To make thick gravy, add more cornstarch (in the form of a water-cornstarch slurry) to the pan and whisk the mixture until thoroughly blended. You could also reduce it by cooking it a little longer at a constant heat.

What to add to gravy to make it taste better?

In addition to seasoning it with garlic powder, onion powder, and salt, you can add robust, rich flavor with other ingredients like Roasted Garlic, Garlic Butter, fresh herbs, and ground spices such as ground cumin and coriander. You can also use bacon fat instead of butter or add a splash of wine for a more complex palate.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Beef Gravy recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Gravy in a ladle over a pot from the side view.
Print

How to Make Beef Gravy

Learn How to Make Beef Gravy with this simple recipe for rich, bold gravy you can pour over a variety of recipes. You can make gravy with either cornstarch or flour, and we'll teach you how to do both! Pick your favorite method and whip it up it only 10 minutes.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 97kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup cornstarch* or all-purpose flour
  • 2 cups beef broth

Seasonings:

  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce optional
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

To Make Brown Gravy Using Flour:

  • Make the roux: Melt butter in a medium saucepan or skillet over medium heat. Add the all-purpose flour and cook, whisking constantly, for about three minutes or until it turns light golden brown.*
  • Add the broth: Slowly pour in the beef broth ¼ cup at a time while whisking well after each addition. Once you incorporate all of the beef broth, continue to whisk until it starts to thicken, which happens within the next 3-4 minutes.
  • Add additional ingredients: Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, if using. Season it with garlic powder, onion powder, and salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add in more if necessary.
  • Simmer: Turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for about 5-7 minutes, stirring occasionally.

To Make Beef Gravy Using Cornstarch:

  • Combine ingredients: In a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat, heat butter until melted. Stir in the beef broth, Worcestershire sauce (if using), garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper. Bring to a boil and let it simmer for 2-3 minutes while stirring occasionally.
  • Make the slurry: Meanwhile, place cornstarch in a medium size ramekin (or a measuring bowl). Carefully add 4 tablespoons of the hot liquid and whisk until it forms a paste.
  • Thicken the gravy: Slowly pour the cornstarch slurry into the beef mixture while constantly whisking it. Continue to whisk until it reaches your desired consistency, about 2-3 minutes. This happens so fast, so do not leave it unattended.
  • Serve: Pour into a cup and use it in your recipe.

Notes

  • Cooking butter and flour: Be patient when whisking together the butter and flour. Initially the mixture will clump up and collect on the whisk, but it should loosen and melt as you continue whisking. 
  • Color: If you are after the rich dark brown color of beef gravy, you can also add in a small cube of bouillon or a teaspoon of Better Than Boullion.
  • Make ahead: You can make this beef gravy up to three days ahead of time. Be sure to bring it to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge until ready to use.
  • Reheat: When it comes to reheating, you have three options:
    • Microwave: Reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments (making sure to stir after each time) until it reaches your desired temperature. 
    • Stovetop: Reheat in a saucepan over medium-low heat, stirring regularly.
    • Oven: Reheat it in the oven alongside other dishes like turkey or beef roast. Remember that you might need to add more beef stock or water if your gravy is too thick.
  • Store: To store leftovers, let them reach room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Freeze: You can freeze it in an airtight container for up to 2 months. When ready to use, thaw it overnight in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 97kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 649mg | Potassium: 116mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 179IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Make Beef Gravy appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-beef-gravy/feed/ 0
Turkey Rub Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-rub-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-rub-recipe/#respond Mon, 14 Nov 2022 17:56:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61905 Speaking of turkey, we have several turkey recipes here on the blog that you can serve for holiday gatherings or even everyday weeknight dinners. If you don’t want to cook a whole turkey, use this seasoning blend to flavor Baked Turkey Tenderloin, Roasted Turkey Legs, Turkey Breasts, or Air Fryer Turkey Drumsticks.  Any one of these turkey recipes pairs beautifully with my Sweet Potato Casserole and Maple Cranberry Sauce for...

The post Turkey Rub Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Speaking of turkey, we have several turkey recipes here on the blog that you can serve for holiday gatherings or even everyday weeknight dinners. If you don’t want to cook a whole turkey, use this seasoning blend to flavor Baked Turkey Tenderloin, Roasted Turkey Legs, Turkey Breasts, or Air Fryer Turkey Drumsticks

A blend of herbs and spices in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

Any one of these turkey recipes pairs beautifully with my Sweet Potato Casserole and Maple Cranberry Sauce for a crowd-favorite holiday meal that’s sure to impress. 

Ingredients

We’re using classic, recognizable spices and herbs for this easy turkey seasoning, so you likely already have all the ingredients in your spice cupboard. This turkey seasoning rub recipe makes enough for 10-12 pounds of turkey, but feel free to adjust or multiply based on your quantity of turkey. 

Spoonfuls of a variety of herbs and spices laid out on paper from the top view.

To make the turkey dry rub recipe, gather light brown sugar (or coconut sugar for a refined-sugar free option), paprika (or smoked paprika), dried thyme, dried sage (or oregano), dried rosemary, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

Substitutions

The beauty of this turkey spice blend is that it’s super easy to customize and very forgiving when it comes to substitutions. So, don’t sweat if you don’t have all the ingredients or if you’d like to make some swaps based on personal preference. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Sugar: I made a brown sugar turkey rub, but you can also substitute coconut sugar for a refined-sugar free rub recipe for turkey. Coconut sugar is similar to brown sugar in taste and appearance, leaving you with a very similar flavor profile. You can also completely omit the sugar for a sugar-free option. 
  • Paprika: You can use either sweet or smoked paprika for this simple turkey rub, but smoked paprika would add extra smoky flavor if you’re using this rub for smoked turkey. If you don’t have paprika on hand, you can substitute chili powder for a little kick of spice. 
  • Salt: I generally use (and recommend) Diamond kosher salt (affiliate link) when seasoning the turkey for roasting because it has larger, coarser grains than table salt, making it easier to spread evenly over your food and preventing over-salting. If you must use table salt, use half the amount that the recipe calls for to ensure you don’t over-salt your spice blend. 
  • Fresh herbs: If you’re making this turkey rub seasoning recipe for a Thanksgiving dinner or holiday meal and have leftover fresh herbs from other recipes, you can put them to good use in this blend of savory spices. When substituting fresh thyme, rosemary, sage, or oregano, make sure to give the herbs a good chop and use double the amount that the recipe calls for. 
  • Other spices to add: If you and your family are spice fanatics, kick this homemade spice rub up a notch by adding a ¼ teaspoon of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for some great flavor. You can also add about a half teaspoon of crushed bay leaves for a festive flavor for holiday turkey. 
  • Last minute additions: If you juiced a lemon or an orange for one of your holiday recipes, don’t throw it away just yet. You can use the peel to add lemon zest or orange zest to your seasoned roasted turkey, which will add brightness and a subtle tangy flavor. 

How to Make Turkey Seasoning Rub

This dry rub for turkey couldn’t be easier to throw together. Simply add the light brown sugar, paprika, dried thyme, dried sage, dried rosemary, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and pepper to a small bowl. Mix it all together, and you’re done! 

A person mixing together herbs and spices to make a turkey rub for baking.

How to Season a Turkey Before Roasting 

If you’re using this turkey spice rub for your Thanksgiving bird, you’ll want to season it a minimum of 12 hours and a maximum of 24 hours before cooking (I’ve found that 12 hours is the best way to go). 

Also, if you purchased a frozen turkey from the grocery store, make sure to thaw it before applying the homemade turkey rub. Follow the steps below for an easy way to achieve a perfectly seasoned turkey that’s ready for the oven:

  1. Pat dry: Use paper towels to pat dry the turkey on all sides. 
  2. Apply the dry rub: Don’t be shy when applying the simple turkey seasoning. Try to cover the whole bird with the seasoning mixture, paying attention to all the turkey parts, and don’t forget to apply some seasoning under the skin of the turkey. Seasoning a turkey for roasting using this method will give it lots of flavor! To rub the spice mix under the skin, carefully separate the skin from the meat and use your hands to apply the roasted turkey seasoning. 
  3. Place turkey in the fridge: Place the seasoned turkey in a shallow roasting pan and store it in the fridge, uncovered, for 12 hours. It may sound a little scary to store raw turkey meat uncovered in your fridge, but according to this article on how to dry brine, doing so allows the skin to dry out and results in golden-brown, crispy skin. If you’re worried about leaving the turkey uncovered in your fridge, you can cover it loosely with foil or plastic wrap. Just make sure to pat the skin dry before roasting to help it crisp up in the oven. 

Optional Wet Rub

If you’re roasting your turkey in the oven, you also have the option of turning this dry rub for a turkey into a wet rub by mixing it with butter or olive oil. The addition of fat helps the skin crisp up nicely and gives the turkey that beautiful, golden-brown appearance.

As an added bonus, the pan juices, extra seasoning, and butter or olive oil left at the bottom of the pan create an incredibly flavorful gravy that you can pour over the turkey once it’s roasted. 

If you choose to make a wet rub, add a half cup of softened butter to your homemade turkey seasoning rub, mix, and apply to the outside of the turkey. 

Storage Instructions

Since this seasoning for turkey is so versatile, I recommend making a big batch to store for future recipes. Simply store your turkey rub seasoning in an airtight container or spice jar for up to 3 months.

FAQs

What herbs and spices go with turkey?

Classic holiday herbs like sage, rosemary, and thyme make for a good turkey rub for baking, but combining these herbs with other spices for turkey creates a balanced rub that makes for an extra flavorful turkey. My turkey herbs and spices recipe combines light brown sugar, paprika, dried thyme, sage, rosemary, garlic and onion powder, and salt and pepper for a traditional turkey seasoning.

When to season turkey?

I recommend seasoning your turkey 12 hours before you plan to cook it. You can season the turkey the night before, but make sure not to season it any more than 24 hours in advance.

Should I use oil with a dry rub?

Whether or not to use oil in your dry turkey rub recipe comes down to personal preference. I don’t recommend adding oil to a rub if you’re planning on deep frying, as you’ll be adding too much liquid. If you’re roasting, you can rub the turkey with oil or butter and add your turkey seasoning recipe. When rubbing a turkey with butter, it helps to use softened butter, so it applies easily.

How to season under turkey skin?

For a well seasoned turkey, gently separate the skin from the meat (being careful not to tear the skin) and use your hand to carefully apply the spice rub under the skin. 

If you try this homemade Turkey Rub Recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Spices for turkey rub in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkey Rub Recipe

This Turkey Dry Rub Recipe combines herbs, spices, and brown sugar for a classic holiday seasoning blend that's perfect for your Thanksgiving turkey. You can also keep a jar of this blend in your pantry year-round to use on chicken, burgers, and even veggies.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 12 pound turkey
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon light brown sugar or coconut sugar
  • 1 tablespoon paprika or smoked paprika
  • 2 teaspoons dried thyme
  • 2 teaspoons dried ground sage or oregano
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt* or 1 tablespoon table salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Mix everything in a bowl and store it in an airtight container for up to three months.

Notes

  • Servings: This recipe makes approximately ⅓ cup turkey seasoning, which will be enough for a 10-12 pound turkey. 
  • Salt: This recipe uses Diamond Kosher salt, which is less salty than Morton Kosher Salt and table salt. If you don’t have Diamond Kosher salt, you can use half the amount of Morton Kosher Salt or table salt.
  • Storage: For long-term storage, place it in an airtight container and keep it in your pantry. It should be good for up to 3 months.
  • To Season Turkey for Baking:
    • Pat dry: Use paper towels to pat dry the turkey on all sides. 
    • Apply the dry rub: Try to cover the whole bird with the seasoning mixture, paying attention to all the turkey parts, and don’t forget to apply some seasoning under the skin of the turkey. 
    • Place turkey in the fridge: Place the seasoned turkey in a shallow roasting pan and store it in the fridge, uncovered, for 12 hours. Letting it fully dry will result in super crispy skin. However, if you’re worried about leaving the turkey uncovered in your fridge, you can cover it loosely with foil or plastic wrap. Just make sure to pat the skin dry before roasting to help it crisp up in the oven.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 13968mg | Potassium: 316mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 3550IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Turkey Rub Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-rub-recipe/feed/ 0
4 Simple Steps to Unload Your Dishwasher Fast https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-unload-dishwasher/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-unload-dishwasher/#comments Tue, 01 Nov 2022 19:48:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61408 Raise your hand if you dread unloading your dishwasher. There’s no way around it; that appliance full of clean dishes must be emptied, and unfortunately, there aren’t any magic kitchen fairies to do it for us.  Unloading the dishwasher used to be a pretty haphazard process for me, involving a million trips back and forth from the dishwasher to various cabinets and drawers. There was no rhyme or reason to...

The post 4 Simple Steps to Unload Your Dishwasher Fast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Raise your hand if you dread unloading your dishwasher. There’s no way around it; that appliance full of clean dishes must be emptied, and unfortunately, there aren’t any magic kitchen fairies to do it for us. 

Aysegul organizing the dishes on the counter.

Unloading the dishwasher used to be a pretty haphazard process for me, involving a million trips back and forth from the dishwasher to various cabinets and drawers. There was no rhyme or reason to how I loaded the dishwasher, resulting in intermingling silverware, matching bowls and plates in different locations, and a random spatula thrown in there somewhere. It was chaos, and it would always take me FOREVER to put everything away. 

Recently, I learned that the ultimate trick to an easy-breezy unloading process is simply thinking ahead a little! Thankfully, it’s not rocket science.

Woman placing dishes in the dishwasher.

I compiled four simple tips and tricks that make unloading your dishwasher easy, fast, and even (dare I say it?) fun! Not to be dramatic, but these tips are truly life-changing and have helped me save so much time in the kitchen. So keep reading to learn how you can, too!

1. Start with the end in mind.

If your end goal is an organized, strategic unloading process, then your loading process must also be organized and strategic! It makes sense, right? 

The easiest way to load your dishwasher in an organized fashion is to create “zones” for each type of dish that you load. Think of your dishwasher as a multi-story house with separate rooms, or “zones,” for your dishes. All the plates share a room, all the bowls bunk together, and the silverware gets cozy, too! 

This way, all the similar items will already be grouped when it’s unloading time, saving you all those trips back and forth to the same cabinet or drawer!

So what’s the best zone for each type of dish? Here are some tips:

Top shelf

A man placing a glass in the top shelf of a dishwasher.

Place fragile, delicate, and glass items on the top shelf to keep them away from the powerful spray arm on the bottom of the dishwasher. This will include your wine glasses, coffee mugs, drinking glasses, and fragile bowls. 

Did you know that you can lower the top shelf in your dishwasher to accommodate tall items like wine glasses? I learned this recently on TikTok, and it blew my mind. Simply press and hold the tabs on either side of the shelf and push down firmly. Just pull up on the shelf to raise it again!

Bottom shelf

Woman placing a dirty dish in a dishwasher.

Your larger items, like plates, large bowls, and pots and pans (if you don’t hand-wash them), should go on the bottom shelf. Face all these items towards the center of the dishwasher to ensure they get nice and clean.  

Silverware basket/cutlery rack 

If your dishwasher has a silverware basket, load the basket with tines and spoons facing up to ensure they get cleaned properly. Load all knives face-down to avoid hurting yourself! Group your spoons, forks, and knives separately to make for easy unloading, but make sure to spread your spoons out so they don’t nest together.

Woman filling up the silverware rack of a dishwasher with spoons.

I love my Beko dishwasher because it has a third rack for my silverware in addition to a cutlery basket! I like using the third rack because it allows me to spread out my silverware to ensure an even clean while still allowing plenty of room in the adjustable middle rack for bowls and glasses.

2. Know your dishwasher and use it to your advantage. 

Can you believe that people used to hand-wash everything? In our beautiful, modern-day world, thank goodness we have dishwashers to do most of the work for us. And dishwashing technology has come a long way!

I encourage you to learn about your dishwasher’s capabilities and unique technological features so you can use them to your advantage. For example, does your dishwasher have any special washing or drying capabilities? Taking advantage of these features will help you save time by ensuring that every dish is clean and dry when it’s time to unload. 
My Beko dishwasher has some innovative features that make unloading a breeze. One feature I particularly love is Beko CornerIntense® technology.

An image showing Beko's cornerintense technology.

You know how dishwashers have that rotating piece at the bottom that sprays water? That’s called the spray arm, which usually rotates on a fixed axis so that it makes a circular spray pattern. The problem with most spray arms is that they don’t get the corners of your dishwasher, resulting in not-so-clean dishes (ew). 

Beko’s spray arm rotates on a moveable axis, spraying each corner of the appliance, so I can be confident that every single dish is getting clean! 

Another pet peeve of mine is having to hand-dry my clean dishes, which slows down the unloading process. Thankfully, my Beko dishwasher has a SelfDry™ feature that solves this problem for me! When it’s done, the dishwasher unseals and opens the door to let in ambient air that dries the dishes naturally. 

This innovative feature dries the dishes and does so without the use of extra energy! In fact, it uses 25% less energy than the average dishwasher. Win-win.

3. Use a two-tiered approach. 

Another time-consuming aspect of the unloading process is the back and forth between the dishwasher and cabinets or drawers. To combat this tiring method, follow two easy steps: open all drawers and cabinets before you start unloading, and group items together before putting them away.

Woman placing plates in a cabinet.

Opening your drawers and cabinets before you start unloading will not only save time but will prevent you from awkwardly fumbling with a handle or knob while holding fragile dishes. It also allows you to visualize where your clean dishes will go, so you can make room beforehand if necessary. 

As I’m unloading each “zone” of my dishwasher, I like to group similar items on a clean counter before putting them away. For example, stack all your plates together on the counter and then carry them to the cabinet. Just be careful with heavy items, and carry them in smaller stacks if necessary. 

4. Make it fun! 

I know that unloading a dishwasher sounds anything but fun, but hear me out on this one. I always dread everyday tasks a little less if a fun game is involved. With just a little creativity, you may even find it enjoyable. Here are some ways you can make this mundane task just a bit more fun:

Set an alarm

I find that setting an alarm turns unloading the dishwasher into a fun little challenge that encourages me to work faster. Set an alarm for five minutes and see if you can empty the dishwasher in that time! 

You can also use the stopwatch feature on your phone to see exactly how long it takes you to unload. Next time you unload, try to beat your own record!

Get the family involved

Dwight is emptying the dishes with a smile on his face.

Here’s an opportunity to teach your kids (and husband) that chores can be fun! Challenge the kids to unload the dishwasher in a certain amount of time, or have them set their own personal record by using a stopwatch. 

Depending on your kids’ ages, you could also make up a fun song to sing while emptying the dishwasher. Or, reward them with a special treat afterward for a job well done. 

Play some music

Music always seems to make the time go by faster, so put on your favorite upbeat song while you unload. Songs with a fast tempo always make me work a little faster! You can also make it a challenge to empty the dishwasher by the end of a song or two. 
Well, there you have it, four easy-to-incorporate steps that will help you save time, streamline the unloading process, and even have a little fun while you’re at it. If you enjoyed this article and want to learn more, be sure to check out Beko’s Healthy Kitchen Initiative.

This is the second part of our Beko series. If you enjoyed this post, be sure to check out our article on How To Clean As You Go While Cooking.

The post 4 Simple Steps to Unload Your Dishwasher Fast appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-unload-dishwasher/feed/ 4
Roasted Acorn Squash Slices https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/#respond Thu, 29 Sep 2022 21:07:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=60475 I love roasting various kinds of squash in the fall and winter months, as this vegetable family is so versatile and always caramelizes beautifully in the oven. If you’re like me and can’t wait to roast squash this season, be sure to also try my other favorite squash recipes; Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Delicata Squash.  Similar to those recipes, this roasted acorn squash recipe is vegan, gluten-free and low-carb...

The post Roasted Acorn Squash Slices appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I love roasting various kinds of squash in the fall and winter months, as this vegetable family is so versatile and always caramelizes beautifully in the oven. If you’re like me and can’t wait to roast squash this season, be sure to also try my other favorite squash recipes; Roasted Butternut Squash or Roasted Delicata Squash

A plate of oven-roasted acorn squash slices from the top view.

Similar to those recipes, this roasted acorn squash recipe is vegan, gluten-free and low-carb friendly, which is ideal if you are serving people with multiple dietary restrictions.

Ingredients

We’re using lots of classic fall flavors in this recipe for roasted acorn squash. The maple and cinnamon mixture complements the nutty, buttery flavors of the squash, and a pinch of salt and pepper adds a savory element that perfectly highlights the sweetness of this recipe. All you need are a few simple ingredients: 

Ingredients for roasting acorn squash slices from the top view.
  • Acorn squash: Green, white, and even golden acorn squash would work just fine for this paleo acorn squash recipe, or you can even use the smaller variation called “carnival squash” for roasted carnival squash slices. Try to choose a squash between 1 and 1 ½ pounds, which will yield about 4-5 slices. When selecting your squash at the store, look for one with skin that’s green and orange in color with a smooth, slightly dull appearance. Give the flesh of the squash a squeeze to ensure it’s firm, and choose one that feels heavy for its size. 
  • For the olive oil-maple syrup mixture, gather olive oil, pure maple syrup, ground cinnamon, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and (optional) chopped pecans or pumpkin seeds and chopped fresh herbs such as sage leaves, thyme, or parsley. 

Substitutions, Seasoning Ideas, Optional Toppings

These oven-roasted acorn squash slices are delicious with just their simple maple-olive oil topping, but you can also dress up your slices with various fall-inspired toppings or spices to give them a little extra flair. I’ve included some topping suggestions here, along with a few simple ingredient swaps: 

  • Oil: While I used olive oil in this healthy acorn squash recipe, you could also use coconut oil or avocado oil. For an extra rich flavor, try using melted butter instead.
  • Maple Syrup: I chose maple syrup for the sweet component of this recipe so that everyone, including my vegan friends, can enjoy this vegan roasted acorn squash! However, if you’re not vegan and don’t have any maple syrup on hand, feel free to use honey instead. 
  • Seasoning: If you’re itching to use those warm autumn spices, like ground cloves, allspice, or nutmeg, add them to the maple syrup mixture before brushing it on the slices for an extra cozy flavor. 
  • Topping ideas: To add an extra nutty crunch and take this caramelized acorn squash to the next level, try topping the slices with nuts or seeds like pumpkin seeds, walnuts, or pecans. I recommend roasting your nuts or seeds in the oven or in a pan to really bring out their flavor. Simply add your desired toppings to the roast sliced acorn squash once it comes out of the oven. 
  • Fresh herbs: It’s amazing how a just sprinkle of fresh herbs can perfectly complement the nutty flavor of this slow-roasted acorn squash recipe. If desired, garnish your oven-roasted acorn squash slices with fresh thyme, sage, or parsley after the baked squash slices come out of the oven. 
  • Brown sugar: Brown sugar is often paired with similar golden acorn squash recipes to add a touch of sweetness. We like to stray away from refined sugars here on the blog; unfortunately, brown sugar falls into that category. While you’re free to dust your squash slices with brown sugar if desired, I recommend using coconut sugar instead. They have a very similar flavor profile, and coconut sugar still provides that warm sweetness! Dust a tablespoon of coconut sugar over the slices while they’re warm. 

How Do You Cut Acorn Squash into Slices

Cutting a squash may seem like a daunting task because of the vegetable’s size, but this easy step-by-step guide will help you prepare your squash slices for roasting in no time. Here’s how to cut up acorn squash:

A person showing how to cut an acorn squash from the top view.
  1. Cut off the top of the squash: Identify the top of the squash, which is where the stem is located. Lay the squash on its side on a cutting board and, holding firmly with one hand, cut off the top. I recommend using a sawing motion while gently applying pressure with a sharp knife. 
  2. Slice the squash in half: Position the squash on the flat surface you created by the cut so that the bottom of the squash faces up. Cut it in half down the center. 
  3. Scoop out the seeds: Use a melon baller or a large spoon to remove all the seeds. 
  4. Cut the squash into slices: Lay down the squash halves and cut into 1-inch thick slices. The slices should resemble inch-think half-moons. Alternatively, you can skip step 2 and cut the slices into circles after removing the top of the squash. From there, you can use a knife or cookie cutter to remove the seeds so that the slices resemble acorn squash rings. 

How to Bake Acorn Squash Slices

Once you prepare acorn squash by cutting it into slices, all you have to do is brush on the maple syrup-olive oil mixture and roast your acorn squash slices in the oven. Plus, your kitchen will smell heavenly while these are baking! Here’s how to roast acorn squash slices: 

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
A person showing how to roast squash slices in the oven.
  1. Add the squash slices: Place your slices of acorn squash on the parchment-lined sheet pan, taking care to arrange them in a single layer. Use two sheet pans to avoid overcrowding, if needed. 
  2. Prepare the topping: Combine all the ingredients for the maple syrup mixture in a small bowl.
  3. Brush squash slices: Using a pastry brush, apply the mixture to each sliced acorn squash evenly. If you’re left with extra mixture, set it aside for later. 
  4. Roast: Roast the slices in the preheated oven for 15 minutes. Remove the cookie sheet from the oven, flip the slices, and bake for another 15 minutes or until they appear lightly golden brown. Remove the sheet pan acorn squash and let cool for about 5 minutes. 
  5. Add remaining topping: If you have any of the olive oil-maple syrup mixture left over, brush it on the warm squash slices. Arrange the slices on a large plate or serving platter. 
  6. Garnish and serve: Top the slices with toasted nuts, seeds, or fresh herbs, if desired. The slices are delicious when served warm or at room temperature. 

What to Serve it With

These roast acorn squash slices are the perfect addition to a fall salad or a beautiful complement to a number of fall and winter main dishes. If you’re still wondering what to do with your roasted squash slices, see below for some inspiration: 

How to Store Leftovers

Store leftover sliced roasted squash in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 

You can technically freeze baked acorn squash, but I find that it loses its texture after it is thawed. Therefore I would not recommend freezing it.

A plate of squash that has been roasted in the oven shown from the top view.

How to Make This Recipe Savory

While the flavor profile of this recipe is definitely on the sweet side, did you know that you can also make these baked acorn squash slices savory? If your dinner table or holiday spread requires a savory side dish, here’s how you can make this recipe less sweet but equally delicious:

  • Omit the maple syrup: Since the syrup mixture gives this recipe a kick of sweetness, simply omit the syrup for a sugar-free acorn squash recipe. Doing so also lets the squash’s natural sweetness shine through and gives you a more savory baked acorn squash flavor. 
  • Switch up the spices: Instead of using ground cinnamon, which is usually paired with sweet flavors, try seasoning acorn squash with ¼ teaspoon of each chili powder (or paprika) and garlic powder. 
  • Add some cheese: The nuttiness of parmesan cheese perfectly complements the caramelized flavors of roasted squash and gives it a more savory flavor profile. Add some chopped fresh herbs and sprinkle on 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese for herb roasted parmesan acorn squash.

FAQs

Do you have to peel acorn squash?

The skin of an acorn winter squash is edible, so there’s no need to peel. This is especially true after roasting, which softens the peel and makes it more palatable.

What temperature do you cook acorn squash?

After testing this recipe, I’ve found that the best temperature for roasted acorn squash is 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Roasting acorn squash at this temperature yields a perfect caramelization.

How long to cook acorn squash?

The cook time for acorn squash depends on the temperature of your oven. The higher the oven temperature, the shorter the cooking time. If you’re wondering what temperature is best to bake acorn squash, I’ve put together an easy guide to make baking acorn squash slices a breeze. Acorn squash roasting time would be:

40-45 minutes if roasted at 350 degrees F.
35-40 minutes if roasted at 375 degrees F.
30 minutes if roasted at 400 degrees F.
20-25 minutes if roasted at 425 degrees F.

Other Squash Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Roasted Acorn Squash Slices recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A plate of squash that has been oven-roasted shown from the top view.
Print

Roasted Acorn Squash Slices Recipe

These Roasted Acorn Squash Slices are beautifully caramelized in the oven and generously coated in a maple-cinnamon mixture for warm, fall flavors in every bite. Serve them on salads, add them to recipes that call for squash, or bring them to your next holiday gathering!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 2 acorn squash
Calories 437kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 small acorn squash 1 to 1 ½ pounds each rinsed and dried
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or coconut or avocado oil
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • Pinch of black pepper

Optional Toppings:

  • ¼ cup chopped pecans or pumpkin seeds *
  • 1-2 tablespoons fresh herbs such as sage thyme, or parsley, chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Cut the squash: Start by cutting the top of the squash (where the stem is located) while holding it firmly with your other hand. It is best to use a sawing motion while gently applying pressure with your knife. Lay squash down using the now-flat surface created by the cut. Cut it in half from the center. Scoop out the seeds using a melon baller or a large spoon. Then lay each half down and cut it into 1-inch slices.
  • Add the squash slices: Transfer acorn squash slices onto the parchment-lined baking sheet and arrange them in one layer. If needed, you may have to divide them into two sheet pans.
  • Make the maple topping: Mix olive oil, maple syrup, ground cinnamon, salt, and black pepper in a bowl.
  • Coat the squash slices: Brush each acorn squash slice with the maple syrup mixture on both sides. Depending on the size of your squash, you might be left with some, don’t throw it away.
  • Roast: Roast in the oven for 15 minutes. Remove from the oven, flip each slice and bake for another 15 minutes or until lightly browned. If you are using two sheet pans, be sure to rotate the sheets as well.
  • Let cool: Remove from the oven and let it cool for 5 minutes.
  • Add the remaining topping: Brush each slice with the remaining olive oil-maple syrup mixture. Arrange the roasted acorn squash slices on a large plate.
  • Garnish and serve: If preferred, garnish with toasted nuts (or seeds) and/or fresh herbs like sage or parsley. Serve warm or at room temperature.

Notes

  • Toasting pecans/pumpkin seeds: If you do have the time, I highly recommend toasting the nuts (or seeds) you use as this quick step will make them taste better and compliment the caramelized flavors of your roasted acorn squash. Simply place pecans (or pumpkin seeds) in an empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes. Be sure to keep a close eye on it and stir frequently. It should be ready when it starts smelling and changes its color slightly.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 
  • How to make it savory? To make this roasted acorn squash recipe a savory side dish: 
    • Omit maple syrup.
    • Use ¼ teaspoon chili pepper (or paprika) and ¼ teaspoon garlic powder in place of ground cinnamon.
    • After it is roasted, sprinkle it with 2 tablespoons of parmesan cheese or top it off with ¼ cup of crumbled goat cheese.

Nutrition

Calories: 437kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Sodium: 598mg | Potassium: 1603mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 1758IU | Vitamin C: 50mg | Calcium: 177mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Roasted Acorn Squash Slices appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-acorn-squash-slices/feed/ 0
How To Clean As You Go In The Kitchen https://foolproofliving.com/clean-as-you-go/ https://foolproofliving.com/clean-as-you-go/#respond Tue, 27 Sep 2022 13:31:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=60352 Growing up, on those big cooking days, my mom would collect all the dirty dishes, pots, and pans in the sink and wash them at the end. I hated it because, instead of enjoying the food we cooked right away, we would have to spend hours washing, drying, and putting them away.  I continued to follow in her footsteps for years until I learned how to “clean as you go.”...

The post How To Clean As You Go In The Kitchen appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Growing up, on those big cooking days, my mom would collect all the dirty dishes, pots, and pans in the sink and wash them at the end. I hated it because, instead of enjoying the food we cooked right away, we would have to spend hours washing, drying, and putting them away. 

I continued to follow in her footsteps for years until I learned how to “clean as you go.” It was life-changing. Not only did I save so much time, but I also didn’t have to spend hours cleaning after cooking. 

person filling up a dishwasher in the kitchen.

If you are not familiar, it is basically cooking and cleaning simultaneously in an intentional way so that by the time you are done, you are not having to spend several more hours washing the dishes.

Because having a system in place will help you work more efficiently and, more importantly, make cooking enjoyable and fun. To me, it is an essential skill to maintain a healthy kitchen because let’s face it; our kitchens are the hardest working room in the house and where the biggest messes are often made.

But how do you do that? Well, having been a food blogger for 9+ years and cooking every day, I learned a thing or two about keeping and maintaining a clean and organized kitchen. Here are my tips to help you get started as well:

person cleaning kitchen with a rag.

1. Start With An Empty Dishwasher

I get it, it requires a bit of planning, but I promise you, starting with an empty dishwasher will save you a ton of time. 

One of the main principles of cleaning as you go is to put things away as soon as you are done with them. This also applies to dirty dishes. I know some people are worried about wasting water and energy, but studies have shown that washing dishes in a dishwasher uses fewer resources than washing them by hand.

Of course, having a state-of-the-art dishwasher with the latest technology helps. I was recently gifted one of the newest dishwashers from Beko and I have to say, it’s been a game changer.

A woman is filling the dishwasher with a dirty bottle.

If you are not familiar with Beko, based in Turkiye, it is one of the largest appliance manufacturers in the world. Lucky for us, they are now in the US.

Having been using my dishwasher for over 3 months now, I am especially impressed with how every single thing I put in my dishwasher comes out so clean. This is mainly due to what they call CornerIntense(R) technology. 

Simply put, they installed spray arms at the bottom that move in a square motion to clean all four corners to make sure that everything in the dishwasher is fully cleaned. This includes even the hardest to-clean items like bottles thanks to water jets placed inside the tub. 

person programming a dishwasher.

Plus, it offers several programming options from heavy to express cycles, even giving you the option to set it up so that it can wash your dishes while you sleep.

2. Create A Soaking Station

I can almost hear you say, “What about those things that I cannot put in the dishwasher?” 

While I wish we could put everything in the dishwasher, we all know that there are things you just don’t want to put in there. But you also don’t want them to sit on the counter, take valuable counter space, and dry before you get to them.

A woman is washing dishes in the sink.

My solution to this conundrum is to be proactive and create a soaking station. Simply fill your sink (or a large bucket) with hot water and a few pumps of dishwasher soap, and soak your dirty pots and pans in there while you are cooking. 

This way, not only will they be out of the way but also be easier to clean thanks to hot water and dishwashing soap doing most of the work for you.

3. Set Up Your Work Station 

I know kitchens come in many different shapes and sizes. Some have minimal counter space, while others have a large island. Regardless of the size of your kitchen, if you set it up right, you can make it work for you.

A woman prepping food in the kitchen shown in two photos side by side.

My solution to this is to assign a workstation for myself. This is where I set up my cutting board, a bowl for trash, and a composting bucket so that I can discard things easily without having to walk to the trash bin every time I have something to throw away. 

Additionally, doing so will allow you to properly dispose of the waste in an environmentally friendly manner.

4. Have A Cleaning Rag Ready

Keeping a clean workstation is essential as you work on your mise en place. You can use a paper towel to wipe things off, but I prefer using good old soap and water.

A woman is squeezing a cleaning rag in a cup with soap and water.

Simply fill a small bucket with water and a small amount of detergent and keep a rag in there so that you can regularly and quickly wipe things off whenever you need. 

5. Only Take Out What You Need

Baking a cake (such as my Almond Flour Cake), where you will need wet and dry ingredients? 

Well, you have two options. You can take every ingredient out at the same time and leave no space on your counter or take them out in stages and put them back right after you are done with them.

person whisking dry and wet ingredients in bowls in two side by site images.

Going back to our cake example, it is likely that the recipe will tell you to whisk the dry ingredients first and then move on to the wet ones. So, why not start with the first set of (dry) ingredients, whisk them up, and put the leftovers away before you move on to the wet ingredients? 

This way, you would only keep the ingredients you immediately need and still have ample space to prep and bake. Needless to say, this is especially a good idea if your kitchen is small or you have limited counter space. 

6. Label Your Jars/Containers

It all sounds good to put things away as a part of cleaning as you go, but the way to keep an organized pantry/fridge is to assign a section for every type of ingredient. An easy way to do this is to label your jars/containers and keep them together based on the type of ingredient. 

A woman is putting a jar of nuts in the pantry.

That way, you know where to put them back as soon as you are done instead of having to find a space for every ingredient you used.

Keeping a tidy space while you work will give you a happier and healthier experience in the kitchen. If you enjoyed this article and want to learn more, be sure to check out Beko’s Healthy Kitchen Initiative.

The post How To Clean As You Go In The Kitchen appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/clean-as-you-go/feed/ 0
How To Roast Garlic Without Foil https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/#respond Thu, 08 Sep 2022 21:14:38 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=59477 If you no longer carry aluminum foil in your household for the environment, for health reasons, or simply because you ran out or want to save money, rest assured that you can roast your garlic without it! Ingredients To roast garlic without tin foil, you only need two simple ingredients: a whole head of garlic and olive oil. If desired, you may also add salt and black pepper. When selecting...

The post How To Roast Garlic Without Foil appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you no longer carry aluminum foil in your household for the environment, for health reasons, or simply because you ran out or want to save money, rest assured that you can roast your garlic without it!

A collage of images showing how to roast garlic without the use of foil.

Ingredients

To roast garlic without tin foil, you only need two simple ingredients: a whole head of garlic and olive oil. If desired, you may also add salt and black pepper.

Salt and pepper and olive oil as ingredients for roasted garlic from the top view.

When selecting garlic, I recommend using soft neck garlic, the most common type of garlic found at the grocery store. You may also use more than one head of garlic when following any of my roasting methods. Just be sure to select bulbs of garlic that are similar in size to ensure even baking. 

Remember, too, that the size, age, and type of garlic you use affects how long it will take to roast in the oven. Always watch your bulbs as they cook and check their doneness based on the instructions below.

Furthermore, ghee or avocado oil would also work if you choose not to use olive oil.

Equipment You’ll Need for Each Method

People often use aluminum foil to roast garlic because it helps trap steam against the bulb, resulting in soft garlic cloves. Therefore, when you roast garlic without foil, it’s essential to have the right equipment to produce that slow, even roast.

Photo collage of equipment needed to roast garlic without foil.
  • Muffin tins or cast iron skillets: Stacking two muffin trays or two cast iron skillets on top of one another is a great way to keep your garlic bulbs moist in the oven. Don’t worry if you don’t have two tins or skillets, though. Simply wrap the top of the first baking tin/skillet with parchment paper, then cover it with a layer of aluminum foil for extra grip. If you don’t have a muffin tin or a cast iron skillet, it is easy to roast garlic in a pan, such as a loaf pan. Just cover the loaf pan with parchment paper, followed by tin foil.
  • Parchment paper: Parchment paper may be the best way to avoid messy cleanup when roasting garlic. Simply wrap the whole head of garlic in a piece of parchment paper and tie it with kitchen twine. Or you can also use a layer of aluminum foil to hold it together.
  • Garlic roaster: Another way to make roasted garlic with no foil is to use a garlic roaster (affiliate link). If your roaster is terra cotta, let it soak in water for 15 minutes before placing it in the oven.
  • A small, oven-proof baking dish: If you want to roast garlic cloves fast, you can bake peeled, individual cloves of garlic on a small baking sheet with olive oil.

Step-by-Step Instructions for Each Method

To roast garlic with no foil, you don’t have to be a five-star chef. You can add a delectable garlic taste to your favorite recipes with any of my four foolproof methods.

Method 1: Wrapping Garlic Bulbs in Parchment Paper

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to roast garlic with parchment from the top view.
  1. Slice the garlic head: Cut off the top ¼-inch of the garlic bulb using a sharp knife. You may discard the slice or save it for making chicken stock later.
  2. Drizzle with olive oil: Place the whole head of garlic on a small piece of parchment paper. Drizzle the exposed garlic bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the bulb’s size.
  3. Wrap the garlic: Wrap the whole bulb of garlic with the parchment. If you have it, you can tie it with kitchen twine, or if not, wrap it again with a sheet of aluminum foil.
A person placing parchment and foil-wrapped garlic on a baking sheet.
  1. Roast: Transfer the wrapped garlic to a baking sheet, and place it in the oven for 40-45 minutes. Wary of hot steam, carefully remove the layers of tin foil and parchment paper to check for doneness. If the cloves are sufficiently soft, remove them from the oven. If they have not yet reached your desired level of tenderness, re-wrap the bulb and let it continue roasting. Roast the cloves until they have fully softened, checking them every 5-10 minutes.

Method 2: Using Two Muffin Tins or Two Cast Iron Skillets

  1. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Trim the head of garlic: Remove the outer papery skin of each head of garlic, making sure that the cloves are still attached. Use a sharp knife to slice the topmost ¼-inch of the garlic bulb, thereby exposing the cloves.
A person showing how to roast garlic in a cast iron skillet from the top view.
  1. Add the garlic to the muffin tin or skillet: Place the trimmed head of garlic in a muffin tin or a small cast iron skillet. Drizzle the bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the garlic head.
  2. Top with another muffin tin or skillet: Top the first baking tin/skillet with another muffin tin or cast iron skillet such that you fully cover the garlic bulbs. If you do not have two muffin tins or skillets, you can first cover it with parchment paper, followed by aluminum foil to hold it in place.
Heads of roasted garlic in a cast iron skillet from the top view.
  1. Roast the garlic: Let the muffin tin- or cast iron-roasted garlic cook in the oven for 45-60 minutes, or until the garlic cloves have softened and caramelized. During my recipe testing, I found out that it took longer to roast garlic in a cast iron skillet than to roast it in a muffin tin.

Method 3: Using a Garlic Roaster

A person showing how to roast garlic in a garlic roaster from the top view.
  1. Soak the garlic roaster: Submerge your garlic roaster (affiliate link)(both the top and bottom pieces) in water and let it soak for 15 minutes. Remove the roaster and dry off any excess water with a kitchen towel.
  2. Cut the top of the bulb: With a sharp knife, slice off the top ¼-inch of your garlic head.
  3. Drizzle the olive oil: Place the sliced bulb in the bottom half of the garlic roaster. Drizzle the cloves with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil.
  4. Bake: Set the oven to 350 degrees F and place the garlic roaster inside. (Note: You don’t have to preheat the oven for this method.) Roast the cloves for 55-60 minutes or until they are softened and lightly caramelized.

Method 4: Baking Garlic Cloves in a Baking Dish

  1. Set the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  2. Peel the cloves: Break apart the entire head of garlic. Then, individually peel each clove.
A person showing how to roast peeled garlic in a baking dish.
  1. Add the olive oil: Place the pre-peeled garlic cloves in a small, oven-safe baking dish. Drizzle them with just enough oil to submerge their lower halves.
  2. Bake: Bake the garlic cloves in the oven for 30 minutes or until they have turned soft and golden brown.
  3. Let the cloves cool: Remove the fast-roasted garlic from the oven and let it cool before using it in recipes.

How to Store and Freeze

Once you see how garlic transforms your cooking, you won’t want a single bite to go to waste. These simple storage tips will keep your roasted garlic cloves fresh for as long as you need them.

A person showing how to freeze roasted garlic from the top view.
  • Store: To store your roasted garlic, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. This method will keep your garlic fresh for up to 5 days. Alternatively, place the garlic cloves in an airtight jar, cover them with olive oil, store them in the refrigerator and use it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your garlic, mash the roasted cloves to a paste. Then, divide the garlic paste into the empty slots of an ice cube tray and freeze overnight. The following day, remove the frozen garlic from the ice tray and transfer the cubes to a freezer bag, removing as much air as possible. Freeze until ready to use.

Recipe Ideas to Use Roasted Garlic

Rich and caramelized, oven-roasted garlic is a game changer in my cooking. Not only does it have a more gentle flavor than raw garlic, but it also works in dozens of recipes.

  • Make Roasted Garlic Butter: Nothing satisfies the tastebuds like a rich, delicious spread topped on warm bread. This Roasted Garlic Butter will take your garlic bread (and other recipes!) to the next level with its sumptuous flavor.
  • Add it to salad dressing: My favorite way to add rich, mellow flavor to salad dressing is to add a few cloves of slow-roasted garlic. You won’t be able to put down your fork once you try roasted garlic with my Avocado Salad Dressing, Lemon Dijon Vinaigrette, and Creamy Poppy Seed Dressing.
  • Use it in pasta sauces and soups: If you don’t like the sharp flavor of raw garlic, try roasted garlic instead. The mellow, buttery flavor of roasted garlic makes an excellent substitute for raw garlic in all your favorite pasta sauces and soup recipes.
  • Make garlic bread: Mix it with butter and spread it on toast. I love making my garlic bread in an air fryer as it is ready in 5 minutes.
A close-up of roasted heads of garlic on parchment paper from the top view.

FAQs

How to roast garlic fast?

The fastest way to roast garlic is to roast peeled, individual garlic cloves in olive oil. Using a small, oven-proof baking dish, this quick roasted garlic only takes 30 minutes at 350 degrees F. You can also cook garlic quickly by following my recipe to roast garlic in an air fryer without foil, which takes about 25 minutes.

How do you roast garlic without burning it?

The best way to keep your garlic from burning in the oven is to cover it with parchment paper (and/or aluminum foil) before baking it for 40 minutes at 400 degrees F. The foil traps steam against the whole heads of garlic, keeping them moist. Just be sure to check your cloves after 40 to 45 minutes, and be careful when unwrapping the foil. 

Other Garlic-Related Posts You Might Like:

Garlic lovers rejoice! Because it doesn’t end here. As a self-proclaimed garlic aficionado, I have so many more garlic recipes for you. Below are a few more garlic recipes to help you put our favorite ingredient to good use:

  • Roasted Garlic in the Oven: This method for roasting garlic in the oven works for both whole heads of garlic or individual cloves. The whole process takes less than an hour and results in bold, rich roasted garlic that adds depth to a variety of recipes.
  • Air Fryer Garlic: It takes only 25 minutes to roast garlic if you have an air fryer. In the recipe post, I made sure to cover the instructions for roasting garlic with or without foil using your air fryer.
  • Roasted Garlic Compound Butter: While roasted garlic tastes wonderful by itself, mixing it with butter and fresh herbs is yet another great way to use it in your recipes.

If you find this guide on How To Roast Garlic Without Foil or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. Thank you!

Heads of roasted garlic on parchment paper from the top view.
Print

How to Roast Garlic Without Foil

Learn four different methods of roasting garlic without foil with this step-by-step guide. It's easy to achieve soft, creamy, and bold garlic without the use of aluminum foil, and you can add your roasted garlic to everything from salad dressings to pasta dishes for lots of depth and extra flavor!
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 1
Calories 40kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 whole head of garlic or more
  • 1 teaspoon Olive oil or more depending on the size of your garlic bulb
  • Salt optional

Instructions

  • Start by peeling the outer layer of the whole head of garlic but be gentle so that the bulb stays intact.

Method 1: Use parchment paper (and aluminum foil) and kitchen twine

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prep the garlic: Using a sharp knife, slice 1/4 -inch off the top of the garlic bulb. Discard the top or save it for making stock later.
  • Drizzle with oil: Drizzle garlic bulb with 1 to 2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the bulb.
  • Wrap the garlic: Wrap the garlic bulb in a small sheet of parchment paper and wrap it again with aluminum foil.
  • Roast: Place it on a baking sheet and roast it in the oven for 40 minutes. Carefully remove the layers of aluminum foil and parchment paper and check for doneness. If the cloves are softened to your liking, then they are done. Otherwise, wrap it up and let it roast until they are fully softened, checking in every 5- 10 minutes.

Method 2: Use 2 muffin tins or 2 cast iron skillets

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Prep the garlic: Using a sharp knife, slice the top of the head of garlic.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place it in a muffin tin or a small cast iron skillet and drizzle it with 1 to 2 teaspoons of olive oil, depending on the size of the bulb.
  • Cover: Cover it with another muffin tin or cast iron skillet on top, making sure that garlic bulbs are fully covered on top.
  • Roast: Roast in the oven for 40-45 minutes or until the garlic cloves are softened and caramelized.

Method 3: Use a garlic roaster

  • Prep the roaster: Soak your garlic roaster (both the bottom and the top piece) in water for 15 minutes. Remove and dry off the excess water with a kitchen towel.
  • Prep the garlic: Slice the top of the garlic bulb/s using a sharp knife.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place them on the bottom piece of the garlic roaster. Drizzle each bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil.
  • Cover: Put the top piece on top and place it in the oven.
  • Roast: Heat the oven to 350 degrees F (no need to preheat the oven for this method). Roast for 30-35 minutes or until the garlic cloves are softened and lightly caramelized.

Method 4: Roast garlic cloves in oil

  • Preheat: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Break apart the whole head of garlic and peel each clove one by one.
  • Drizzle with oil: Place them into a small ovenproof baking dish. Drizzle them with just enough olive oil to cover the bottom halves of the cloves. just enough that they are covered halfway through.
  • Roast: Bake in the preheated oven for 30 minutes or until they are softened and turned golden brown.
  • Let cool: Remove from oven and let it cool before using in recipes.

Notes

  • Store: To store your leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, you can place the garlic cloves in an airtight jar, cover them with olive oil, store them in the refrigerator and use it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your garlic, mash the roasted cloves to a paste. Then, divide the garlic paste into the empty slots of an ice cube tray and freeze overnight. The following day, remove the frozen garlic from the ice tray and transfer the cubes to a freezer bag, removing as much air as possible. Freeze until ready to use.

Nutrition

Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 0.3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post How To Roast Garlic Without Foil appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-garlic-without-foil/feed/ 0
How to Roast Garlic in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/ https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/#comments Thu, 08 Sep 2022 21:03:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7428 In this easy recipe, I use aluminum foil to wrap garlic bulbs. If you are not a fan, check out my post on Roasting Garlic without Foil. And if you are short on time, be sure to also get my foolproof recipe for Garlic in the Air Fryer. Recipe Ingredients To make this roasted garlic recipe, you will need two simple ingredients: garlic and olive oil.  You can follow the...

The post How to Roast Garlic in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
In this easy recipe, I use aluminum foil to wrap garlic bulbs. If you are not a fan, check out my post on Roasting Garlic without Foil. And if you are short on time, be sure to also get my foolproof recipe for Garlic in the Air Fryer.

A top view of foil-wrapped heads of roasted garlic.

Recipe Ingredients

To make this roasted garlic recipe, you will need two simple ingredients: garlic and olive oil. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can follow the recipe below to roast one whole garlic bulb or more. You may also add salt for additional flavor, but it is optional.

When selecting heads of garlic, look for firm, fresh bulbs that don’t have any soft spots or mold. Avoid old garlic that is dried out or has green shoots growing inside.

Best Garlic For Roasting:

This recipe will work with any type of garlic, but I think the best garlic for roasting is artichoke garlic. Artichoke garlic, or “soft neck garlic,” is the most common variety in grocery stores and has a delectably mild taste. 

For a sweeter, more full-bodied variety, you can also use rocambole garlic (also known as “hard neck garlic”). You can also use this recipe for baked elephant garlic—a much larger variety of garlic that tastes similar to an onion. However, oven-roasted elephant garlic will require more cooking time due to its size.

Though I use olive oil in this recipe, any neutral oil, such as avocado oil and ghee, would work.

Optional Add-Ins & Variations

Whether you are roasting a whole head of garlic or individual cloves, these optional add-ins are an easy way to change up the flavors of roasted garlic cloves.

  • Seasonings: Adding a pinch of salt and black pepper is the easiest way to enhance the flavors when baking garlic in olive oil. While it is optional, if you are using the roasted garlic on its own, I would recommend seasoning it before roasting.
  • Fresh herbs: Nothing balances the bold taste of oven-roasted garlic cloves better than fresh herbs. Chopped rosemary, fresh thyme, and parsley are just a few of my favorites.
  • Butter: To enhance the rich flavor of your whole roasted garlic cloves, try using butter instead of olive oil. 

How to Make Roasted Garlic

Roasting garlic in the oven is an easy yet vital tool for any chef who likes bold flavors. Below are two simple methods for making homemade roasted garlic like a pro:

Method 1: Roasting Whole Garlic Heads

Here is my hands-free method for making roasted garlic in aluminum foil. The recipe below can be made with one head of garlic or more.

A person using foil to cinch garlic for roasting in the oven.
  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
  2. Peel the garlic: Peel off the outermost layer of each garlic bulb. Be sure to keep the bulb intact so that each clove connects to the base.
  3. Trim the bulbs: Use a sharp knife to slice ¼-inch off the head of each garlic bulb. This cut should expose the tops of the cloves.
  4. Place garlic on aluminum foil: Take out several pieces of aluminum foil and place each of the whole garlic bulbs on its own sheet. Then, drizzle each bulb with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, ensuring that the oil touches the individual garlic cloves.
  5. Wrap the foil: If desired, sprinkle your garlic with a pinch of salt and pepper. Then, wrap each garlic head in its piece of foil.
  6. Roast the garlic: Place the aluminum-wrapped garlic cloves onto a baking sheet and roast them for 40 minutes in the hot oven.
  7. Check for doneness: Remove the foil-wrapped cloves from the oven. Cautiously open the foil, being careful not to burn yourself with trapped steam. Then, insert a paring knife into a garlic clove. If the clove is soft, remove it from the oven. If the clove is still hard, re-wrap it in its aluminum sheet and roast it for 5-10 more minutes.
  8. Caramelize the garlic (optional): If you want to caramelize your garlic even further, unwrap your soft garlic and roast it for 5-7 more minutes. Just be sure to keep an eye on your garlic during this step, so it doesn’t burn.
A person squeezing garlic into a container from the top view.
  1. Let the garlic cool: Rest your roasted garlic cloves on the counter and let them cool for 5-10 minutes. When ready, remove the aluminum foil carefully and let out any trapped steam.
  2. Remove the roasted garlic: To remove the garlic from their cloves, squeeze the whole head of garlic or remove each clove individually with a teaspoon or cocktail fork.

Method 2: Roasting Individual Garlic Cloves

If you’re on a time crunch, a faster way to roast garlic is to roast individual garlic cloves. Follow the steps below to cut your roasting garlic time in half.

A person showing how to cook garlic by roasting cloves in the oven.
  1. Arrange the cloves: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F and place the individual garlic cloves in a medium-size ramekin or an oven-safe container.
  2. Bake: Drizzle the cloves with olive oil, cover the ramekin with aluminum foil, and bake until the garlic cloves are tender. However, remember that individual cloves roast faster than whole garlic heads. Therefore, I recommend checking for doneness after the first 15 minutes of baking.
  3. Roast until finished: You are good to go if the cloves are soft and lightly browned. If not, return the ramekin back to the oven and check every 4-5 minutes to prevent them from burning.

How Long Does it Take to Roast Garlic?

When roasting a head of garlic, I recommend setting your oven to 400 degrees F and baking the bulbs for 40-50 minutes. However, roasting time may vary depending on your garlic’s size, variety, and age. 

You can also change what temperature you use to roast garlic. For instance, if you prefer slow-roasted garlic, you can bake your cloves at 350 degrees F for about 70-90 minutes

How to Keep it

If roasting garlic cloves (or bulbs) is a part of your weekly meal prep, follow the storage steps below to have them ready throughout the week:

A person showing how to store garlic in a container or an ice tray for freezing.
  • Store: Place leftover roasted cloves in an airtight container (or a small jar) and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. If preferred, you can drizzle the cloves with a little bit of olive oil and use the garlic-infused olive oil in homemade salad dressings. However, make sure you store it in an airtight container and consume it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: First, make a roasted garlic paste by mashing your garlic cloves. Then, divide the paste into the empty slots of an ice tray. After squeezing out the garlic, freeze the ice tray overnight, then transfer the garlic cubes to a Ziploc bag. Remove as much air from the bag as possible before placing it back in the freezer.

How to Use Roasted Garlic?

Wondering what to do with roasted garlic? This mouthwatering collection includes dozens of uses for roasted garlic, from making garlic bread to a simple baked garlic appetizer.

A bowl of peeled, roasted garlic from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Meal prep: Since a whole head of garlic wrapped in foil doesn’t take up much space in the oven, I always throw in a head or two whenever I’m roasting another dish. And because my weekly meal prep always includes roasted vegetables, it’s easy to roast garlic at the same time.
  • Eliminate bitter taste: If your roasted garlic tastes bitter, it may be because it is old. However, because garlic is also sensitive to high heat, its bitterness may also be a result of over or undercooking. Therefore, if it tastes bitter, try reducing the temperature. I recommend setting your oven to 350 degrees F. and cooking your garlic for 70-90 minutes.
  • Roast and freeze garlic in bulk: If you’re a fan of advanced meal prep, roasting and freezing garlic in bulk is a great way to reduce waste. This is especially useful if you are growing your own garlic.

FAQs

What is the head of the garlic?

The head of the garlic refers to the large bulb of papery skin that contains individual cloves.

How long is roasted garlic good for?

Roasted garlic will keep fresh for up to one week when stored in an airtight container in the fridge. 

How to roast peeled garlic?

To roast garlic cloves that are peeled, place the cloves in a ramekin and drizzle them with olive oil. Then, cover the ramekin with aluminum foil and bake at 400 degrees F. for 10-12 minutes.

How to roast minced garlic?

Preheat your oven to 325 degrees F. Then, place minced garlic on a sheet pan, drizzle it with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil, and bake for 10 minutes. Be sure to toss the garlic halfway through to ensure even cooking.

How to roast garlic quickly?

The fastest way to roast garlic is by roasting peeled cloves in the oven in a ramekin covered with aluminum foil. This process takes about 15 minutes. The other way to roast garlic quickly is to roast it in the air fryer. The air fryer roasted garlic also takes about 15 minutes from start to finish.

Other Garlic-Related Posts You Might Like:

Garlic lovers rejoice! Because it doesn’t end here. As a self-proclaimed garlic aficionado, I have so many more garlic recipes for you. Below are a few more garlic recipes to help you put our favorite ingredient to good use:

  • Roasting Garlic No Foil Method: While I think the best way to roast garlic is in the oven wrapped in tin foil, I know some people don’t like using aluminum foil in their cooking. This post shows you 4 different ways of roasting garlic without foil, including how to roast garlic in a garlic roaster and a cast iron skillet.
  • Air Fryer Garlic: It takes only 25 minutes to roast garlic if you have an air fryer. In the recipe post, I made sure to cover the instructions for roasting garlic with or without foil using your air fryer.
  • Roasted Garlic Compound Butter: While roasted garlic tastes wonderful by itself, mixing it with butter and fresh herbs is yet another great way to use it in your recipes.

If you find this guide on Roasted Garlic Recipe or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. Thank you!

roasted garlic cloves on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

How to Roast Garlic in Oven

This simple guide on How to Roast Garlic in the Oven results in creamy, soft, and bold roasted garlic that you can add to endless recipes. My foolproof method works for both whole heads of garlic or individual cloves.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 1 garlic bulb
Calories 40kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 head of garlic or more
  • 1 teaspoon Olive oil
  • Pinch of Salt optional

Instructions

Method 1: Roasting Garlic Cloves As A Whole:

  • Preheat the oven to 400 F (205 C) degrees.
  • Peel the outer layer (aka papery skin) off each garlic bulb, making sure to leave the whole bulb intact with all of the cloves still connected.
  • Slice 1/4 -inch top off the head of each garlic bulb, exposing the tops of the garlic cloves.
  • Place each garlic bulb in the middle of a piece of aluminum foil, drizzle with 1-2 teaspoons of olive oil (depending on the side of your garlic) and make sure that the oil sinks all the way down into the individual garlic cloves.
  • If preferred, sprinkle it with a pinch of salt. Wrap the whole garlic head in foil and repeat the same process with the rest of your garlic bulbs.
  • Place them onto a baking sheet and roast for 40 minutes.
  • To check doneness, remove foil packets from the oven. Carefully open the foil (being careful not to let the hot built-up steam burn your fingers) and insert a paring knife into a garlic clove. If it is soft, it should be ready. If not, wrap it up and put it back in the oven for 5-10 more minutes.
  • If you want it to get even more browned and caramelized, you can unwrap it and let it roast for another 5-7 minutes after it is fully softened. Though I would keep a close eye on them during this step as you do not want them to burn.
  • Let roasted garlic cool for 5-10 minutes on the counter. When ready, carefully let the steam out as you remove the aluminum foil.
  • To remove the now-roasted garlic from cloves, you can either squeeze the whole head of garlic or remove each clove one by one with a teaspoon or cocktail fork.

Method 2: Roasting Individual Garlic Cloves:

  • If you prefer to roast garlic cloves individually, you can place them in a large ramekin. Drizzle them with olive oil, cover the ramekin tightly with foil and bake until tender.
  • Please keep in mind that individual garlic cloves roast faster than whole garlic heads. So, be sure to check for doneness after the first 15-minute mark.
  • If they are not fully roasted, place them back in the oven and continue to bake, checking every 5 minutes to make sure they are not burning.

Notes

  • This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • The exact roasting time will depend on each garlic bulb’s variety, size, and age. During my recipe testing, I found that it is best to check the garlic bulbs after the first 40-45 minute mark. In most cases, they were done by then, but if yours are not, feel free to keep them in the oven longer but be sure to check them every 5-10 minutes.
  • To Store: Place leftover roasted garlic in an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. If preferred, you can drizzle the cloves with a little bit of olive oil and use the garlic-infused olive oil in homemade salad dressings. However, make sure you store it in an airtight container and consume it within 5 days.
  • Freeze: First, make a roasted garlic paste by mashing your garlic cloves. Then, divide the paste into the empty slots of an ice tray. After squeezing out the garlic, freeze the ice tray overnight, then transfer the garlic cubes to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Remove as much air from the bag as possible before placing it back in the freezer.

Nutrition

Calories: 40kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 0.3IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post How to Roast Garlic in Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/oven-roasted-garlic/feed/ 9
How To Massage Kale https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2022 22:01:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58823 Why Massage Kale Wondering what does massaging kale do? Well, you are not alone. This 5-minute process is effortless and does wonders for this otherwise humble vegetable. Massaging kale for salad makes the vegetable more palatable by releasing its bitter compounds and—as a result—making the kale less bitter.  This simple process breaks down the vegetable’s fibrous texture, making it more tender, easier to chew, and more digestible. Ingredients To prepare...

The post How To Massage Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Massage Kale

Wondering what does massaging kale do? Well, you are not alone. This 5-minute process is effortless and does wonders for this otherwise humble vegetable.

  • Massaging kale for salad makes the vegetable more palatable by releasing its bitter compounds and—as a result—making the kale less bitter. 
  • This simple process breaks down the vegetable’s fibrous texture, making it more tender, easier to chew, and more digestible.
A person massaging kale with oil in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

To prepare raw kale for massaging, you’ll need three simple ingredients: extra virgin olive oil, kale, and if desired, kosher salt (or sea salt). It is optional, but if you want, you can add in a squeeze of lemon juice as well.

Ingredients for massaging kale in bowls from the top view.

In terms of oil, I used olive oil to soften my kale, but this simple recipe would work with avocado or coconut oil as well. 

Best Kale Type for Massaging:

Out of all of the different types of kale, I find that the best kale for massaging to use in a salad recipe is curly kale. Not only because it is easier to find at grocery stores, but it also has more body than the other common kale types.

With that being said, Tuscan kale, also known as lacinato kale and dinosaur kale —has a gentler flavor and will also work for this recipe. The only other type of kale I do not recommend using is baby kale because it already has tender leaves, and as a result, it will not withstand the massaging process.

How to Prepare Raw Kale for Salad

Learn how to make kale soft and tender and prepare it as a base for the most delicious massaged kale salads in five easy steps:

A person showing how to prepare and massage kale from the top view.
  1. Wash the kale: Rinse the kale under cold running water to remove dirt and debris. Then, place the wet kale leaves on a clean kitchen towel, and use another towel (or paper towels) to dry them as much as possible. Alternatively, if you have one, you can use a salad spinner (affiliate link) to dry the kale.
  2. Chop the kale: You can use your hands or a sharp knife to cut kale. You can remove the leaves from their stems by running the stems through your closed fist. Or, you can slice the kale leaves away from their stems on a cutting board. Here is a beginner-friendly guide to cutting kale for using it in recipes.
  3. Add a drizzle of olive oil: Add the chopped kale to a large mixing bowl, and drizzle the leaves with olive oil. You may also add a little salt to your salad greens for added flavor.
  4. Massage the kale: Use your clean hands to massage the kale with olive oil for 2-3 minutes. Turn the small pieces frequently to make sure they soften evenly.
  5. Add to your favorite dishes: Once tenderized, your kale is ready to eat! Add your massaged raw kale to a salad or one of your other favorite recipes.

How to Soften Kale Without Oil

Did you know you can soften kale following this simple method and not use a drop of oil? Well, depending on the flavor profile of your salad recipe, you have two tasty options:

  • Use an alternative fat: If you don’t want to use olive oil, avocado works as a natural and mild substitute—an alternative I use in my Avocado Massaged Kale Salad. You may also want to try other earthy options, such as nut or seed butter, unsweetened tahini, or unsweetened peanut butter.
  • Add an acidic ingredient: Acid-based ingredients are fantastic substitutes when you want to prepare kale raw. Simply massage a tablespoon of vinegar (I suggest apple cider vinegar), fresh lemon juice, or citrus juice into your chopped kale.

How to Use Kale in Salad

It is no secret that massaged kale is the perfect base for a green superfood-packed salad. Here are a few simple kale salad recipes to try:

A collage of 4 salads with kale from the top view.
  • Brussels Sprout Kale Salad: Made with maple-roasted pecans, pomegranate arils, and a white wine vinaigrette, this easy kale salad makes a colorful and tasty addition to any dinner/holiday table. 
  • Kale Quinoa Salad: Two superfoods, quinoa and kale, in one big large salad bowl! Bright lemon, creamy avocado, and crunchy chickpeas make this easy recipe a meal-worthy weeknight meal.
  • Kale Apple Slaw: Get the most out of your farmer’s markets with this simple recipe. It only takes 15 minutes to put together the sweet, tangy, and bold flavors of this veggie side dish.
  • Zucchini Kale Recipe: Low-calorie, gluten-free, and delicious? This bright summer salad recipe has it all, complete with sweet zucchini noodles, walnuts, and vegan mayo dressing.
  • Harvest Kale Salad: Nobody can resist the full-bodied flavor of this fall massaged kale salad. Sweet dried figs, tart apples, and earthy goat cheese combine for a kale salad recipe that’s to die for.

How to Store

Got leftovers or massaging kale as a part of your meal prep? Simply place freshly massaged kale in an airtight container in the fridge. It will stay fresh for 3-4 days.

And if you are new to storing kale, be sure to check out my guide on how to store fresh kale

Expert Tips

Now that you know how to make kale tender for a salad, here are a few things to keep in mind:

  • Don’t over-massage: Avoid over-massaging the raw leaves. All you need is 2-3 minutes of massaging to reach desired softness. Any longer and your tender leaves might become mushy.
  • Make sure the kale is fully dry: Do your best to ensure that your kale is dried thoroughly before beginning the massaging process. Dry kale will absorb more olive oil since water resists mixing with fats and oils.
  • Be aware that the raw kale loses its volume as you massage it: Keep in mind that as you massage kale leaves, they will become softer and get smaller in size. When I am massaging kale for salads as a side dish, I use one bunch for 4 servings. If I am serving it as a meal by itself, then I would use 2 bunches of kale for 4 servings.
  • Make it part of meal prep: I love nothing better than adding a little bit of kale to my favorite recipes. That’s why I always prepare massaged kale in bulk and use it throughout the week. Whether I add kale to my favorite salad recipes, use it as kale garnish (like I did in this Sunchoke Soup recipe), or even mix it into a soup at the last minute, this simple process makes healthy eating a breeze.
  • Save the kale stems for vegetable or chicken stock: Looking for an easy way to eliminate waste and add delicious flavor to your next chicken or vegetable stock? Try adding your unused kale stems to the recipe!

FAQs

What is massaged kale?

Massaged kale is kale that has been tenderized or softened through exposure to fat- or acid-based ingredients. Olive oil and vinegar are two examples of ingredients that help break down kale’s tough fibers and give it a softer texture.

How long does massaged kale last?

Massaged kale will last 3-4 days when stored in a sealed container in the fridge.

Should you massage kale before cooking?

Nope! Massaging kale and cooking kale have the same effect: breaking down the vegetable’s fibrous texture and tenderizing its leaves. Therefore, you only need to choose one process or the other before consuming this cruciferous vegetable.

Do I need to cook kale for a salad?

Though cooking kale for salad is an option, you don’t need to cook it to use it in a recipe. Still, if you find the taste of kale bitter, simply give it a quick 2-3 minute massage to make it more soft, tender, and palatable to eat.

Does massaging kale make it less bitter?

Yes! Massaging kale is a fantastic way to make kale less bitter. The massaging process helps kale release its bitter compounds, eliminating some of this vegetable’s bitter flavor.

Do I need to rinse kale after massaging?

No, there’s no need to rinse your massaged kale before adding it to your favorite recipes. Simply add the tenderized leaves to a salad bowl and top them with your favorite dressing once you’ve finished massaging them.

Other Helpful Kale Related Articles:

If you find this guide on How To Massage Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post. 

A person massaging kale in a bowl from the top view.
Print

How to Massage Kale

Learn How to Massage Kale to prepare it for use in all your favorite salads! This step-by-step guide teaches you how to tenderize this leafy green with just 2 simple ingredients to make it more palatable, tender, and easily digestible.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 bunch
Calories 126kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch curly kale
  • 3 teaspoons olive oil
  • kosher salt optional

Instructions

  • Wash and dry the kale: Rinse kale under cold running water until no dirt or debris is left. Place kale leaves on a clean kitchen towel. Using another towel (or paper towels), dry kale leaves as much as you can.*
  • Chop the kale: Remove leaves from kale stems either with your hands or using a knife. Chop kale leaves into small bite size pieces. Save the kale stems for your next chicken or vegetable stock, or discard them.
  • Add oil and salt: Transfer chopped kale into a large salad bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt if using.
  • Massage the kale: Using clean hands, massage (gently rub) kale leaves for 2-3 minutes turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened.
  • Serve: Use in your favorite kale salads* or other recipes.

Notes

  • *Alternatively, you can use a salad spinner to dry the kale leaves.
  • *Want to massage kale without using any oil? Here are two other options to help you soften/tenderize kale for salads:
    • Use an alternative fat: Try adding other “healthy fats” such as a ripe avocado, nut or seed butter, unsweetened tahini, or unsweetened peanut butter. I would usually use one small ripe avocado and 2 tablespoons of nut/butter per kale bunch.
    • Add an acidic ingredient: Acid-based ingredients are fantastic substitutes when you want to prepare kale raw. Simply massage a tablespoon of vinegar (I suggest apple cider vinegar), fresh lemon juice, or citrus juice into your chopped kale.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers or are massaging kale as a part of your meal prep, simply place it in an airtight container in the fridge. It will stay fresh for 3-4 days.
  • Be aware that the raw kale leaves lose their volume as you massage them: Keep in mind that as you massage the kale leaves, they will become softer and lose their volume. When I am massaging kale for salads as a side dish, I use one bunch for 4 servings. If I am serving it as a meal by itself, then I would use 2 bunches of kale for 4 servings.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 126kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 198mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 5694IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Massage Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-massage-kale/feed/ 0
Blanched Kale https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2022 18:42:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58747 Why Should You Blanch Kale While it might sound like an additional step, blanching kale is a useful process for many reasons. Below are just a few of them: Blanching kale reduces bitter flavor by releasing harsh compounds present in fresh kale. (In other words, your taste buds will thank you!) When you blanch kale, you make it easier to chew by breaking down its tough fibers. Because blanching kale...

The post Blanched Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Should You Blanch Kale

While it might sound like an additional step, blanching kale is a useful process for many reasons. Below are just a few of them:

  • Blanching kale reduces bitter flavor by releasing harsh compounds present in fresh kale. (In other words, your taste buds will thank you!)
  • When you blanch kale, you make it easier to chew by breaking down its tough fibers. Because blanching kale tenderizes and softens the vegetable, this process is also an alternative to massaging kale.
  • Blanched kale does not have to cook for as long as raw kale, which means shorter cooking times when it is added to recipes.
  • Once kale is blanched, it can be stored for longer. I recommend blanching kale for freezing, especially if you are growing it in your garden and want to store large amounts of raw kale. This way, you not only have kale available year-round but also eliminate food waste.
A person removing blanched kale from a pot of water from the side view.

What You Will Need

For this recipe, you’ll need a bunch of kale, a strainer, a pot, water, and ice. You may also choose to add a pinch of kosher salt if desired.

Ingredients for blanching kale from the top view.

Though there are many different types of kale to choose from, my blanching method will work for the three most popular varieties available at the grocery store: dark green curly kale, red Russian kale, and dinosaur kale (also referred to as lacinato kale).

Step-by-Step Instructions

Understanding how to blanch kale is a simple skill that will transform your cooking process. In five easy steps, you’ll be able to prepare and preserve kale in the best way possible.

A person showing how to use water to blanch kale from the top view.
  1. Wash & cut the kale: Fill a large bowl with cold water, submerge your kale, and rinse each leaf under cold running water. Remove each stem from its leaves and give it a rough chop. For more detailed instructions on this step, check out my article on How to Cut Kale.
  2. Boil water: Add salt (if using) to a large pot of water and bring the mixture to a rolling boil. While the water heats, fill a large bowl with ice water and set the ice bath aside.
  3. Blanch the kale: Add your kale to the boiling water and let it cook for 1-2 minutes or until it loses most of its volume and gets softer.
  4. Place the kale in the ice bath: Remove the kale from the boiling water with tongs or a spider strainer. Transfer it into the ice bath to stop the cooking process. Let it chill for ten seconds before draining.
  5. Drain & dry the kale: Drain the kale with a strainer and add them to your recipe. Or, for later use, dry the kale thoroughly with a clean kitchen towel (or using a salad spinner) and follow the steps below to freeze for long-term storage.

How to Store & Freeze

If you are planning to use it within a few days, you can store it in the fridge. If you want to store it for a longer time, I recommend freezing it. Below you can find my detailed instructions on how to store blanched kale:

freezing kale in a plastic bag from the top view.
  • Store: Once dry, place the excess kale in an airtight container or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your kale will remain fresh for up to five days in the fridge. 
  • To freeze blanched kale:
    • Squeeze the excess water out of kale leaves as much as you can. Line a baking sheet with a kitchen towel. Spread the kale onto the sheet and pop it into the freezer for 2-3 hours to flash freeze it.
    • Remove from the freezer and place the now-frozen blanched kale in an airtight container or a freezer bag (remove as much air as possible.) Label, date, and store for up to 6 months.

What to Do with Blanched Kale

Blanched kale makes a great addition to countless flavorful recipes (my favorite being salads!). From hearty stews to crisp salads, this tasty collection of kale recipes will satisfy your cravings.

  • Serve it by itself: When you blanch kale, you don’t need a complicated recipe to make a five-star side dish. Simply flavor your veggies with kale seasoning—I recommend olive oil, salt, and black pepper—and dig in!
  • Make a blanched kale salad: You can add blanched kale to any salad that uses raw or cooked kale. Add brilliant color to your table with recipes like my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad and Apple Kale Slaw. Or, fill yourself with tasty superfoods with dishes like my Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad.
  • Add it to soups & stews: With a bright green color and dozens of health benefits, kale is a delectable addition to all your favorite soup recipes (especially in the winter months!). Simply add in blanched kale right before serving dishes like Chicken Vegetable Soup and Tuscan Kale Soup.
  • Add it in smoothies: Green smoothies are an easy way to get your daily nutrients on the go. It only takes five minutes to whip up a healthy breakfast (or snack) like my Pineapple Kale Smoothie and Turmeric Green Smoothie.
  • Make a quick & easy sautéed kale: Transform this simple green vegetable into a side dish no one can resist. For a classic flavor, sauté your kale in olive oil, garlic, and lemon juice. Or, if you want an Asian-inspired recipe, try cooking your kale in sesame oil, ginger, and a splash of soy sauce.

FAQs

Does kale have to be blanched?

No, you can eat raw kale if you want to. However, some people find raw kale to have a tough texture and bitter taste, so blanching helps make the vegetable more palatable.

How long should you blanch kale?

Though times may vary based on the type of kale you use, the appropriate kale blanching time for curly kale is 1-2 minutes.

How long would blanched kale last?

The blanching process is essential when preserving kale. Blanched kale will last five days in the fridge or six months in the freezer when stored in an airtight container.

Does blanched kale retain its nutrients?

Because some of the vitamins in kale are water soluble—in particular, vitamins C and B—kale may lose some of its nutrients during the blanching process. Alternatively, though it may take longer, you can steam the kale for a short amount of time to preserve its nutrient levels.

Should you blanch kale before sautéing?

You don’t have to blanch kale before sauteeing it, but blanching kale beforehand will help cut down on your cooking time.

More Helpful Kale Articles

Can’t get enough hearty greens? Then I have great news for you: With my collection of foolproof kale guides, even beginner chefs can become an expert in all things “kale.”

  • Types of Kale: Feel confused when you go to the store? Not sure which type of kale is for your recipe? Be sure to check out my guide to learn about the different varieties of kale.
  • How to Store Kale in the Fridge & Freezer: If you love preparing kale in bulk, then proper kale storage is just what you need. Learn how to store kale in the fridge and the freezer while keeping it as fresh as possible.
  • How To Cut Kale: Learn how to properly chop kale the right way. Plus, learn how to use stems to avoid any food waste.
  • Tenderize Kale (by massaging it): Learn how to tenderize kale’s tough leaves and eliminate bitter flavor with just three simple ingredients. Massaging kale is the perfect way to prepare your leafy green for salads, slaws, and more.

If you find this guide on How To Blanch Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post.

A person putting kale leaves in an ice bath from the top view.
Print

Blanched Kale Recipe

This step-by-step guide for making blanched kale is the perfect solution for transforming this sometimes bitter vegetable into a tender, mild-flavored addition to salads, soups, and smoothies. The blanching process also prepares kale leaves for freezing, which will allow you to enjoy this leafy green for up to 6 months.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 8 minutes
Servings 1 bunch
Calories 20kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch kale
  • 1 tablespoon of salt optional

Instructions

  • Boil the water: Fill a large pot with water and salt (if using). Bring it to a boil. Meanwhile, have a large bowl of ice water ready.
  • Prep the kale: Remove kale leaves from their stems. Give them a rough chop or tear them to small pieces by hand.
  • Blanch the kale: When the water comes to a boil, add the kale leaves into the pot and let them cook for 1 – 2 minutes or until it is softened to your liking.
  • Chill the kale: Using tongs or a spider strainer, pull the leaves out and immediately place them in the ice bath. Let leaves chill for 10 seconds or so and then drain.
  • Use or store: Use them in your recipe, or thoroughly dry and freeze them for later.

Notes

  • To blanch kale stems: If you want to blanch kale stems, I recommend blanching them separately from the kale leaves. To do so, bring a pot of water to a rolling boil before adding the stems. Then, let the stems cook for 4-5 minutes before transferring them to a bowl of ice water.
  • Store: Once dry, place the excess kale in an airtight container or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. Your kale will remain fresh for up to five days in the fridge. 
  • To freeze blanched kale:
    • Squeeze the excess water out of kale leaves as much as you can. Line a baking sheet with a kitchen towel. Spread the kale onto the sheet and pop it into the freezer for 2-3 hours to flash freeze it.
    • Remove from the freezer and place the now-frozen blanched kale in an airtight container or a freezer bag. Label, date, and store for up to 6 months.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 20kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 7007mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 5694IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 149mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Blanched Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blanched-kale/feed/ 0
How To Store Kale https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-kale/#comments Wed, 24 Aug 2022 18:33:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58743 While there are many varieties of kale to choose from, for all respective purposes, we are specifically referring to curly kale, Tuscan kale (dinosaur kale), and red kale, which are all easy to find in the supermarket or grow in your garden.  Keep It As a Bunch Once people learned that this nutrient-dense veggie packs a ton of health benefits, the popularity of this leafy green soared. Kale is a...

The post How To Store Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
While there are many varieties of kale to choose from, for all respective purposes, we are specifically referring to curly kale, Tuscan kale (dinosaur kale), and red kale, which are all easy to find in the supermarket or grow in your garden. 

A person storing kale in a plastic bag with a label from the top view.

Keep It As a Bunch

Once people learned that this nutrient-dense veggie packs a ton of health benefits, the popularity of this leafy green soared. Kale is a superfood, and because of this, we want to make sure we are keeping all those nutrients intact while also enjoying its flavor and texture.

A person wrapping fresh kale in a kitchen towel from the top view.

If you want to keep the fresh kale in a bunch, do not wash it. Simply wrap it in a kitchen towel (or a few sheets of paper towels) and place it in a plastic storage bag. Change the paper towels every few days until you are ready to use the kale.

Wash, Portion & Wrap

Proper kale storage will ensure the leaves last for at least 5-6 days, if not longer. You can store kale with stems as a whole or give it a rough chop and store it in the fridge to have it ready to use in recipes throughout the week. Here’s how I like to do it when I get home from the grocery store:

A person washing kale leaves and removing their stems from the top view.
  1. Wash the kale thoroughly in your kitchen sink. Fill your sink with enough cold water so that the kale floats about 3 inches off the bottom. Submerge the kale and swish it around so that the dirt falls to the bottom. Rinse each leaf under the tap and shake off the excess water.
  2. Remove the stem. Pull the leaves off the stem by running your hand down the length of each stem. If preferred, break large leaves by hand into smaller pieces.
A person drying kale with a paper towel and storing in the fridge in a plastic bag.
  1. Dry the leaves. A salad spinner is the most effective way to dry kale leaves. If you don’t own one, lay a clean kitchen towel or a couple of layers of paper towel out on your counter. Scatter the leaves in a single layer, top with another clean towel, and roll like a jelly roll. Press down slightly, so the towels absorb the liquid, then unroll. 
  2. Portion and wrap. Lay the kale leaves on a layer of clean paper towels, about 2-3 at a time. Roll up the paper towel and place it in a plastic storage bag. Continue this process with the rest of the leaves, using multiple plastic bags, if necessary.
  3. Store in the fridge. Label and store the plastic bag in your refrigerator, preferably in the vegetable/crisper drawer. Avoid the coldest part of the fridge (the back). Also, make sure to keep away from ethylene producing fruits and vegetables, such as apples, bananas, and avocados. This will make the kale go bad faster.

Now you have a hearty green washed and ready for a kale salad, like Kale Avocado Salad, Quinoa Kale Salad, Brussel Sprouts Kale Salad, or Harvest Salad with Kale.

Blanch & Freeze Kale

If you need to store kale for the long term, you can freeze it. The best way to store kale in the freezer is to blanch it first to get rid of its natural enzymes. Blanched Kale is ideal to use in recipes, but it is also a crucial step if you are planning to freeze it. Here’s how to do it:

A person showing how to blanch kale from the top view.
  1. Wash and destem the kale. Thoroughly rinse the kale leaves under cool running water to get rid of excess debris and dirt. Pull the leaves off the stem by running your fingers down the length of each stem. Give them a rough chop. I find that small pieces of kale are easier to blanch than large ones. And if you need a refresher on the best way to chop them, be sure to check out my guide on how to cut kale.
  2. Prepare a pot of boiling water. Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Liberally salt the water. While the water is boiling, prepare an ice bath by setting a large bowl of ice water right next to the pot of boiling water.
  3. Blanch. Drop the chopped kale leaves in the boiling water, in batches if necessary. Boil for 1-2 minutes, or until the color brightens.
  4. Drain and shock. Remove the leaves from the boiling water with a slotted spoon or strainer and place them directly in the ice bath. Leave until cool enough to handle, about 30 seconds.
A person drying kale leaves and storing them in an airtight container.
  1. Dry the leaves and freeze. Dry the leaves with a salad spinner or between a few layers of clean kitchen towels, squeezing out the water as necessary. Place in a single layer on a baking tray small enough to fit in your freezer. Freeze until solid, about 1-2 hours.
  2. Store in the freezer. Once frozen, transfer to a freezer safe airtight container (affiliate link) or freezer bag, making sure to push out all the air to prevent freezer burn. Label, date, and freeze for up to 6 months.

Thaw

You can add frozen kale to recipes without thawing. You can add it to green smoothies like kale pineapple smoothie and green turmeric smoothie, soups like Tuscan Kale Soup, chicken vegetable soup, butternut squash lentil stew, and pastas like zucchini fettuccine with kale right from frozen – no need to thaw!

But if you need to thaw, simply remove the bag of kale from the freezer and keep it in the fridge or at room temperature for 3-4 hours. Use it as soon as it is thawed. I do not recommend leaving it out too long as you will end up with soggy leaves.

Dry Kale

Dried kale is a bit different from fresh or frozen, but a great alternative if you want to puree the kale into a powder and add it to recipes. Here’s how to dry kale at home as a whole bunch or individual leaves:

How to air-dry kale in a bunch:

  1. Wash the kale leaves and stems under running water. No need to remove the stems.
  2. Drain. Allow the kale to drain and air dry in a large colander to evaporate excess water.
  3. Tie and hang. Tie the stem ends together with a rubber band. Hang upside down in a warm place that isn’t directly in front of the sun. Keep a bowl or bucket underneath to catch any falling leaves.
  4. Air dry. Leave to dry for a few days. The kale is ready when it is hard, brittle, and easily cracks in your hand.

How to air-dry kale leaves:

Fresh kale leaves drying on a towel from the top view.
  1. Wash and remove the stems. Thoroughly rinse the kale in a kitchen sink full of water and remove the stems.
  2. Spin. Dry the leaves in a salad spinner. Don’t worry if they are not completely dry.
  3. Air dry. Lay the leaves out in a single layer on a baking sheet, leaving space in between. Allow drying in a window sill under direct sunlight until crunchy and brittle. Use a layer of cheesecloth to cover the kale, if desired.

Expert Tips 

  • How to select good kale? Kale will have a longer shelf life when picked at the peak of freshness. If possible, shop for this cruciferous vegetable at your local farmers’ market or buy organic at your local grocery store.
    When buying kale, look for:
    • Tender, bright-dark green leaves with no signs of yellowing, browning, tiny holes, or black spots
    • Smaller leaves will have a more tender texture and milder flavor
    • Opt for whole kale bunches rather than pre-chopped bagged kale
  • When storing kale, less moisture is key: Extra moisture or water will deteriorate raw kale much faster than kale that is super dry. Wrapping in multiple layers of paper towels helps keep moisture at bay.
  • Cut only if necessary: Chopping kale before storing diminishes the nutritional value slightly. That being said, if you are planning to consume it rather soon, it is a great meal prep trick to get ahead.

FAQs

How to know if your kale has gone bad?

Kale has gone bad when the leaves are wilted, yellowed, or withered. Or when the leaves are mushy, slimy and have an off odor.

Does kale need to be refrigerated?

Yes, it does. If you are not planning to use it right away, you should place your kale in the fridge using one of these easy kale storage methods.

How long does kale last in fridge?

When stored properly, kale should last at least 5-6 days in the fridge.

How long does kale last in the freezer?

As long as it is stored properly, blanched kale will keep in the freezer for up to 6 months.

How long does cooked kale keep in the refrigerator?

Cooked kale will keep for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

How to store kale without plastic?

For a plastic free option, store kale in a glass container with a layer of paper towels to absorb any excess moisture.

More Helpful Kale Articles

Need to sharpen your kale preparation and cooking skills? Below are a few other helpful articles to help you incorporate more kale into your diet.

  • Types of Kale: Learn about the different varieties of kale, along with their unique appearance and how to use each one.
  • How To Cut Kale: Learn how to properly chop kale the right way. Plus, learn how to use stems to avoid any food waste.
  • Blanching kale is an easy way to extend the life of kale to not only keep it fresh longer but also freeze it for long-term use.
  • Massaged Kale: If you are having a hard time getting your family to eat kale salads, then you should know how to tenderize the tough leaves of kale. Simply follow my foolproof method to massage kale to minimize the bitter flavor and make it more palatable.

If you find this guide on How To Store Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post.

A person holding a bag of towel-wrapped kale from the top view.
Print

How to Store Kale to Make it Last Longer

Learn How to Store Kale with these simple tips and tricks for extending the life of this nutritious vegetable! These foolproof techniques for storing kale in the fridge and in the freezer will help you to preserve its texture and flavor while getting the most out of every leaf.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 5kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch kale
  • Water

Instructions

  • Wash kale thoroughly in your kitchen sink or using a large bowl with water: Fill your sink (or a large bowl) with enough cold water so that the kale floats about 3 inches off the bottom. Submerge the kale and move it around so that the dirt falls to the bottom. Rinse each leaf under the tap and shake off the excess water.
  • Remove the stem: Pull the leaves off the stem by running your hand down the length of each stem. For ease of storing, if preferred, break large leaves by hand into smaller pieces. Alternatively, you can tear each leaf by hand.

To Store Kale in the Fridge:

  • Dry as much as you can: Lay a clean kitchen towel or a couple of sheets of paper towels out on the kitchen counter. Scatter the leaves in a single layer, top with another clean towel, and roll like a jelly roll. Lightly press down so the towels absorb the liquid, then unroll.
  • Portion and wrap: Place the kale leaves on a layer of clean paper towels. Roll up the paper towel and place it in a plastic storage bag. Continue with the rest of the leaves, using multiple plastic bags, if necessary.
  • Store in the fridge: Label and store the plastic bag in your refrigerator, preferably in the crisper drawer. Avoid the coldest part of the fridge (the back). Also, make sure to keep away from ethylene-producing fruits and veggies (i.e apples, bananas, and avocados.)

To Blanch and Freeze Kale:

  • Prepare a pot of boiling water: Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Liberally salt the water. While the water is boiling, prepare an ice bath by setting a large bowl of ice water right next to the pot of boiling water.
  • Blanch: Drop the chopped kale leaves in the boiling water, in batches if necessary. Boil for 1-2 minutes, or until the color brightens.
  • Drain and shock: Remove the leaves from the boiling water with a slotted spoon or strainer and place them directly in the ice bath. Leave until cool enough to handle, about 30 seconds.
  • Dry the leaves and freeze: Dry the leaves with a salad spinner or between a few layers of clean kitchen towels, squeezing out the water as necessary. Place in a single layer on a baking tray small enough to fit in your freezer. Freeze until solid, about 1-2 hours.
  • Store in the freezer: Once frozen, transfer to an airtight container or freezer bag, making sure to push out all the air to prevent freezer burn. Label, date, and freeze for up to 6 months.

Notes

For Best Results:
  • When buying kale look for:
    • Tender, bright-dark green leaves with no signs of yellowing, browning, tiny holes, or black spots
    • Smaller leaves will have a more tender texture and milder flavor
    • Opt for whole kale bunches rather than pre-chopped bagged kale
  • When storing kale, less moisture is key: Extra moisture or water will deteriorate raw kale much faster than kale that is super dry. Wrapping in multiple layers of paper towels helps keep moisture at bay.
  • Cut only if necessary: Chopping kale before storing diminishes the nutritional value slightly. That being said, if you are planning to consume it rather soon, it is a great meal prep trick to get ahead.

Nutrition

Calories: 5kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 8mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1424IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post How To Store Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-kale/feed/ 2
How To Cut Kale https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-kale/#respond Wed, 24 Aug 2022 18:17:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58745 Though there are many types of kale, my recipe for how to chop kale will work for the most common varieties of kale: curly kale, red Russian kale, and lacinato kale (AKA “dinosaur kale”). Kale varieties like baby kale have smaller leaves and require alternate cutting methods. Wash & Dry Fresh Kale Learning how to wash kale is an easy skill that takes seconds to complete. In three simple steps,...

The post How To Cut Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Though there are many types of kale, my recipe for how to chop kale will work for the most common varieties of kale: curly kale, red Russian kale, and lacinato kale (AKA “dinosaur kale”). Kale varieties like baby kale have smaller leaves and require alternate cutting methods.

A person chopping kale on a cutting board from the top view.

Wash & Dry Fresh Kale

Learning how to wash kale is an easy skill that takes seconds to complete. In three simple steps, you can rest assured that your kale is safe to eat.

A person washing and drying kale on a kitchen towel from the top view.
  1. Submerge the kale: To clean kale greens, fill a large bowl (or your kitchen sink) with cold water. Then, add your kale to the bowl, being sure to submerge all of the leaves.
  2. Rinse the leaves: Rinse each leaf under cold water, removing as much debris as possible.
  3. Dry the kale: Line a baking sheet with a clean kitchen towel. Transfer the washed kale to the baking sheet, laying out the leaves so that each touches the towel beneath. Then, beginning at one end of the sheet, roll the towel into a cylinder with the kale inside to dry the leaves.

PRO TIP: To cut your drying time in half, the best way to clean fresh kale is to use a salad spinner (affiliate link) instead of a bowl and towel.

Remove Stems

When it comes to destemming kale, there are two main methods from which to choose:

A person showing how to remove kale stems from the top view.
  1. Hold and pull: Hold the base of a kale stem with one hand. Then, place your other hand around the stem, just above your first hand. Using your first hand, pull the stem downwards so that the leaves pass through the fist of your second hand and, in the process, detach from the stem.
  2. Fold and slice: Place a piece of kale on a cutting board. Fold its leaves in half so the stem lies at one end of the fold. Use a sharp knife to slice the leaves away from the stem in one swift movement.

How to Chop?

While cutting kale is a cinch, the correct way to slice kale depends on the recipe you want to make. In general, there are two main methods for how to cut kale:

A person cutting kale with a knife on a cutting board from the top view.
  • How to chop kale for a salad: I recommend using the chiffonade method to trim kale for salads. First, roll your kale leaf like a cigar and place it on a cutting board. Then, chop the tight cylinder into thin strips. You may also consider massaging kale before adding it to your salad.
  • How to chop kale for soup & stews: If you plan to use your kale in a soup or stew, tear the kale leaves by hand into large, rough pieces. Then, add the pieces to your dish just before serving.

What to do with Chopped Kale?

Kale preparation is a godsend for quick, nutritious eats. Once you learn how to destem and cut kale properly, you’ll be astounded by how many flavor-packed dishes you can prepare.

Additionally, not only is this cruciferous vegetable packed with superfoods, but its bright green leaves also make a tasty addition to all your favorite kale recipes. Here are a few suggestions to get you started:

  • Blanch: You don’t have to trek to the grocery store every time you prepare fresh kale for cooking. Blanch your kale after chopping it, store it in the fridge or freezer, and use it whenever you’re ready. It’s that easy! Plus, you can make meal prep a breeze with my foolproof methods for Blanched Kale and How to Store Kale
  • Make a green smoothie: Once you have your kale chopped, the options for nutritious pick-me-ups are endless. You can prepare some of my favorite kale recipes in less than five minutes, like a Pineapple Kale Smoothie and Green Turmeric Smoothie.
  • Give it a massage & turn it into a salad: Cutting kale for salad is a no-brainer in vegetarian cooking. Follow my foolproof guide for How to Massage Kale, and you can whip up a kale chop as delicious as my Avocado Massaged Kale Salad, Brussels Sprouts Kale Salad, or Lemon Kale Caesar Salad.
  • Add it to soups: Looking for an effortless way to add leafy greens to soup? Satisfy your tastebuds and get significant health benefits by adding sliced kale to a soup just before serving. Tuscan Kale Soup, Chicken Veggie Soup, and Vegetable Beef Soup are some of my favorites.
  • Make kale chips: It is no secret that kale chips are a great snack. My go-to recipe is this Garlic Kale Chips.

What to do with Leftover Stems?

Anyone can learn how to remove kale stems like a pro. Now you can put the whole plant to work by incorporating leftover stems into recipes as genius as they are tasty.

A person cutting kale stems on a cutting board from the top view.
  • Blanch: If you don’t like to waste fresh produce, I have good news. Once blanched, the stalk of kale makes a good addition to smoothies and pesto recipes.
  • Sautée or stir fry: Transform tough stems into veggie-packed side dishes by sautéeing or stir-frying them. It takes less than 15 minutes to prepare dishes as delectable as this Sweet and Spicy Kale Stems.
  • Add into stock: One of my favorite ways to make the most of a kale harvest is to use the stems in DIY stock recipes. Simply add your kale ribs to recipes like my Homemade Chicken Stock for the best flavor.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to prepping kale like a master chef. With these easy pointers, you’ll learn the best method for chopping kale—without any extra hassle!

  • Take it out of the fridge right before you are ready to use it: Fresh kale leaves will start to soften and lose their freshness as soon as you take them out of the fridge. Therefore, keep them in the fridge until you are ready to cut them and use them in your recipe.
  • Cut right before using: Similarly, because cut leaves rot faster than whole leaves, it’s a good idea to prepare fresh kale just before you use it. Chopping kale right before use will ensure your recipes turn out as fresh and crisp as possible.
  • Use a good knife: The best kitchen tools are the sharpest when chopping kale plants. Be sure to use a sharp knife (affiliate link) as you learn how to cut kale for cooking.

FAQs

This simple FAQ has everything you need to be a kale connoisseur, from how to stem kale to making kale as palatable as possible. Healthy eating has never been so convenient!

What is the easiest way to cut kale?

To me, using your hands to pull kale leaves off their stem is the easiest way to cut kale. Simply place both hands on the base of a kale stem and use one hand to pull the stem through the fist of the other. Once destemmed, roll each leaf like a cigar and give it a chop in your desired thickness.

Do you cut stems off kale?

Though removing kale stems isn’t technically necessary, I recommend it. Kale ribs are tougher and more bitter than kale leaves, and they take more time to cook.

Are kale stems toxic?

No, kale stems are perfectly safe to eat. In fact, I recommend saving leftover kale stems to use in smoothies, pesto recipes, stir-frys, and even chicken stock.

Where to cut kale when harvesting?

According to Sharon Hanna’s book, “The Book On Kale” (affiliate link), you should cut kale right before you are ready to use it in your cooking for the best flavors and most retained nutrients. To harvest kale, just cut off the leaves (or snap them off in a downward motion) for your desired recipe but leave the plant for growing.

More Helpful Kale Articles

Can’t get enough hearty greens? Then I have great news for you: With my collection of foolproof kale guides, even beginner chefs can become an expert in all things “kale.”

  • 7 Different Varieties of Kale: Feel confused when you go to the store? Not sure which type of kale is for your recipe? Be sure to check out my guide to learn about the different varieties of kale.
  • How to Store Kale: If you love preparing kale in bulk, then proper kale storage is just what you need. Learn how to store kale in the fridge and the freezer while keeping it as fresh as possible.
  • How to Blanch Kale: If you want to take the stress out of meal prep, blanching kale is a must. In five minutes, you can tenderize your kale and make it fridge- and freezer-safe.
  • How to Massage Kale: Learn how to tenderize kale’s tough leaves and eliminate bitter flavor with just three simple ingredients. Massaging kale is the perfect way to prepare your leafy green for salads, slaws, and more.

If you find this guide on How To Cut Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post.

A person cutting kale on a cutting board from the top view.
Print

How to Cut Kale

Learn How to Cut Kale for use in salads, soups, and stews with this easy step-by-step guide! This guide also helps you make the most of this nutritious leafy green by detailing how to cut kale stems and teaching you how to use the stems in various recipes.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 5kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch Kale

Instructions

  • Wash and rinse kale leaves: Place large kale leaves in a large bowl (or the kitchen sink) filled with water making sure that the kale leaves are fully submerged in water. Rinse each leaf under cold running water.
  • Dry kale leaves: Line a baking sheet with a kitchen towel and transfer the washed kale so that each leaf touches the towel underneath. Then, beginning at one end of the sheet, roll the towel into a cylinder with the kale inside to dry the leaves. Alternatively, if you have one, you can use a salad spinner to dry the kale.
  • Remove the stems: Hold the base of a kale stem with one hand and place your other hand around the stem, just above your first hand. Using your first hand, pull the stem downwards so that the leaves pass through the fist of your second hand and, in the process, detach from the stem. Or, you can place a piece of kale on a cutting board. Fold its leaves in half, so the stem lies at one end of the fold. Use a sharp pairing knife to slice the leaves away from the stem in one swift movement.
  • Chop Kale: Place a large kale leaf on a cutting board and roll it up like a cigar. Chop it into thin strips using a sharp knife. If you are using it for salads, cut it into thin strips. For soups and stews, chop it in large chunks.*
  • If necessary, rotate and chop in the other direction to make even more slices. Repeat the same process with the rest of the kale leaves.

Notes

  • *Alternatively, you can tear the large leaves by hand into small pieces.
  • Take kale out of the fridge and cut right before you are ready to use it in your recipe: Kale leaves start to soften as soon as you take them out of the fridge, so I recommend keeping it in the fridge until you are ready to use it in your recipes.

Nutrition

Calories: 5kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 8mg | Potassium: 50mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1424IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The post How To Cut Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-kale/feed/ 0
Types of Kale https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-kale/ https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-kale/#comments Mon, 22 Aug 2022 22:16:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58749 Kale has been a staple in my kitchen for as long as I can remember. From Kale Pineapple Smoothie to Kale Apple Slaw to Tuscan Kale Soup, you can do just about anything with one of the best green vegetables. While many of my recipes feature curly kale, this ultimate guide covers the delicious – and sometimes unheard-of – different varieties of kale to put to good use in the...

The post Types of Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Kale has been a staple in my kitchen for as long as I can remember. From Kale Pineapple Smoothie to Kale Apple Slaw to Tuscan Kale Soup, you can do just about anything with one of the best green vegetables.

While many of my recipes feature curly kale, this ultimate guide covers the delicious – and sometimes unheard-of – different varieties of kale to put to good use in the kitchen.

A person holding a large bunch of kale leaves from the top view.

What is Kale?

Kale is a type of vegetable that is a member of cruciferous vegetables, including broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, Brussels sprouts, Asian greens and more.

The botanical name for kale is Brassica oleracea acephala, which literally means “cabbage without a head.”

It is a cold-weather vegetable that thrives in cold temperatures, which is why many kale recipes pop up in the fall and winter. From dark green leaves to purple leaves, pebbly flat leaves to smooth leaves, kale plants are a thing of beauty.

Most Common Kale Varieties

There are so many types and varieties of kale, sometimes it’s hard to keep track. The following are the ones that are easy to spot in the grocery store, farmers’ market, or specialty food stores, among those not sold commercially:

Curly Kale

A person holding a bunch of curly kale from the top view.

Undoubtedly the most common type of kale, curly kale has tight, curly edges and a bitter, peppery flavor. The color can range from light-dark green to blue-green leaves to purple colored kale. It is also super versatile, as it can be blanched, boiled, roasted, steamed, or eaten raw.

Lacinato Kale

A person holding a bunch of Lacinato kale from the top view.

Lacinato kale, also known as Tuscan, dinosaur kale (or dino kale), Italian kale, black palm, palm, and black kale, has a deep green color, pebbly skin, and soft, flat, elongated leaves. It is native to Italy (with darker varieties called “cavolo nero”), with a much sweeter and milder flavor. The stems are also softer and thinner and can be enjoyed right along with the leaves. 

This flat leaf kale variety stands up to longer cooking times and is the one I use in my Tuscan Kale Soup recipe.

Chinese Kale

A person holding some Chinese kale leaves from the top view.

Chinese kale, commonly referred to as Chinese broccoli or gai lan, has large, glossy, crisp leaves and a thick stalk. Both the leaves and stalk are completely edible, along with small yellow flowers that are sometimes attached, but the stalks will take longer to cook than the leaves. 

This type of kale is best enjoyed stir-fried with matching Asian flavors and is easy to find in Asian supermarkets. This Chinese Broccoli Stir Fry is my go-to recipe for this type of kale.

Red Russian

A person holding a bunch of Red Russian Kale from the top view.

Red Russian, sometimes labeled Canadian broccoli, is a purple-stemmed kale with flat, wide leaves and craggly edges. The purple stems are somewhat fibrous, so it’s best to remove them. That being said, the leaves have a mild, sweet, earthy flavor, which makes them a good choice to toss into salads.

Since the leaves of Red Russian Kale are on the tougher side, I give them a quick massage before using it in salads.  If you are new to this process, be sure to check out my guide on How To Massage Kale.

Redbor Kale

Redbor is unique in that it is not green but more like a deep purple akin to blueberries. The color is thanks to anthocyanins, antioxidants found in many blue and purple foods. Its flavor is similar to that of cabbage and can be eaten raw and cooked. 

It’s important to note, however, that while the color will fade with cooking, the mild, sweet flavors will shine through.

Baby Kale

A bowl of baby kale leaves from the top view.

Baby kale is younger leaves that have been harvested before maturity. They are small, tender, light green leaves with a mild, peppery bite similar to baby arugula. Because it has such a sweet flavor compared to mature plants, baby kale is a great way to introduce kale into your diet. Baby kale is best consumed in raw salads, such as this Baby Kale Salad, or whizzed into a pesto.

Ornamental

Ornamental kale is a gardener’s dream and those frilly, colorful, tightly woven bunches you see in many people’s backyards as an ornamental plant. It can range in colors from white, pink, purple, red, and green. 

While it is edible, the flavor is incredibly bitter and nowhere as complex as other varieties. Therefore, it is mostly planted by gardeners to add some color to their fall and winter landscape.

Different Types of Kale Versus Curly Kale

It is no secret that amongst all types of kale varieties, the easiest one to find is green curly kale, so I thought it would be great to give you a quick comparison between curly kale and the other types of kale mentioned in this article.

  • Lacinato Kale vs Kale: Lacinato kale is deep green-blue with flat, soft, pebbly leaves similar to that of a dinosaur (and partly how it got its name). Compared to curly kale, the leaves are smooth and dark green. 
  • Chinese Kale vs Kale: Large, glossy leaves with a very thick stem. It has a totally different look compared to curly kale with larger and smoother leaves.
  • Red Kale vs Kale: Purple to red leaves, with the stem ranging from vibrant purple to deep red. It looks similar to curly kale, but has a darker color and a heartier texture.
  • Baby Kale vs Kale: Small, tender, soft baby leaves, similar in size to baby spinach. 
A salad with kale, avocado, and nuts in a bowl from the top view.

Types of Kale Chart

Here is a breakdown of the unique types of kale greens in an easy-to-understand chart:

Variety of KaleLooks LikeTastes LikeBest Used For
CurlyLight green, curly-edged leaves with fibrous stemPeppery and BitterSalads, Slaws, Soup, Sauteed, Roasted, Blanched, Steamed
Lacinato (Tuscan, Dinosaur, Black Kale, Cavolo Nero)Deep green, flat, elongated, pebbled leaves, soft stemsSweet and MildSoups, Stews, Pasta
ChineseLight green, large, glossy leaves with thick stalkBroccoli, BitterStir Fry
Red RussianFlat, wide leaves with craggy edges, vibrant purple stemMild, Sweet, and EarthySalads
RedborTight curly leaves, deep blue-purple colorCabbage, Mild, SweetSalads, Sauteed, Roasted, Blanched, Steamed
Baby KaleLight green with hints of purple, small, tender leavesMild and SweetSalads, Smoothies, Soups, Pasta, Pesto
OrnamentalRange of colors with frilly leaves, tightly woven bunchBitterEdible, but not ideal for cooking

How to Use Kale

Now that you know all different kinds of kale, here are some ideas to put them to good use in your daily cooking and which variety to use based on the dish you are making:

A bowl of soup with vegetables and kale with a spoon on the side from the top view.
  • Best Kale for Soup: Tuscan kale is a great choice for soup since it has the ability to stand up to longer cooking times. I love it in Tuscan Soup with Kale and Chicken Vegetable Soup. With that being said, the most common curly kale would also be a great one to use in soups.
  • Best Tasting Kale: This is more about personal preference, but I love the taste of both Tuscan kale and curly kale. I also think that they offer a mild flavor without taking over the whole dish when mixed in with other vegetables (and fruits). My Kale Apple Slaw and Brussels Sprout Kale Salad are good examples.
  • Best Kale for Juicing: Curly kale, baby kale, or Red Russian kale are best for juicing as they are mild in flavor.
  • Best Kale for Smoothies: This could be red kale or baby kale, both are just as mild and sweet. I always reach for one of these kale varieties when making Kale Pineapple Smoothie recipe.
  • Best Kale for Salads: You can use curly, Redbor, Red Russian or baby kale in salads such as Kale Avocado Salad, Kale Quinoa Salad or Harvest Kale Salad. Just make sure to massage the leaves with some lemon or citrus juice beforehand, baby kale being the exception.
  • Best Kale for Roasting: Curly kale is the go-to and makes seriously addicting Garlic Kale Chips in no time.
  • Best Kale for Versatility: Whether you want to roast, saute, steam, blanch or boil, the universal kale is curly kale. I love it steamed in this Zucchini Fettuccine with Kale, among so many other preparations.

Health Benefits of Kale

Kale is a nutrient powerhouse, and it is considered as one of the most nutrient-dense foods in the world. The list of the health benefits of kale is long, but here are the most noteworthy ones according to Healthline:

  • Extremely nutrient dense: Kale is very high in vitamins A, C and K and very low in calories, deeming it a superfood.
  • High in antioxidants: Kale packs in plenty of plant-powered flavonoids like beta-carotene, quercetin and kaempferol, which are heart-healthy and have been shown to help lower blood pressure.
  • Good for cholesterol: Steamed kale binds more bile acid and can improve the ratio of HDL vs LDL cholesterol in your body.
  • Mineral rich: Kale is high in essential minerals and electrolytes, including calcium, magnesium and potassium.
  • Fiber rich: Kale is incredibly high in fiber and water, which can help you stay full longer.

FAQs

What does kale look like?

Kale comes in all different shapes, sizes and colors. It is mostly associated with curly leaves and tough stems in green, red and purple hues.

How many types of kale are there?

While it is undetermined the exact number of different types of kale, the most common types include a list of 10-15 varieties.

What is the sweetest kale?

The sweetest kale is red kale, or Red Russian. This makes it great for raw preparations, like tossing into salads.

Is baby kale the same as kale?

Baby kale is simply young kale leaves that have been picked at an early stage. They are smaller, sweeter and milder than mature kale.

How to identify kale?

Kale is best identified as a cruciferous vegetable with light green to red to deep green-blue leaves that are either flat or curly, with a thick, fibrous stem.

Is baby kale as nutritious as regular kale?

According to this article on nutritional information on curly kale and this article on baby kale, baby kale packs in a similar amount of nutritional value as regular kale. The bonus of using baby kale is that it cooks faster, and there is no need to remove the stems.

More Helpful Kale Articles

Can’t get enough of this superfood? If so, you are in the right place. Below you can find my other kale-related articles to help you master your cooking with this healthy vegetable.

  • How to Store Kale: Learn how to store kale in the fridge for short term storage or in the freezer for long term storage with this foolproof guide to storing kale.
  • How to Cut Kale: Learn how to wash, dry, and chop kale for cooking with these easy steps.
  • Blanched Kale: Blanching kale is an easy way to tame the bitter flavors and soften the texture of kale. Plus, if you are planning to freeze kale for long term storage, it is ideal to blanch it beforehand.
  • Massaged Kale: Massaging kale with just a few simple ingredients ( i.e. olive oil, lemon juice, and salt) is an easy way to make it softer and palatable, especially when using it in salads.

If you find this guide on Types of Kale or any one of our other How-To Guides on Foolproof Living helpful, please take a minute to leave a rating and a review. Doing so helps others who are planning to follow the processes outlined in this post.

The post Types of Kale appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/types-of-kale/feed/ 2
Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/ https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/#comments Fri, 12 Aug 2022 01:04:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57692 Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings. Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us...

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings.

Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us and love the classic combo of yogurt and fruit, you’ll love this Frozen Yogurt Bark & my go-to Yogurt Dip for Fruit

vanilla yogurt in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the top view

Recipe Ingredients

This ultra quick and easy homemade vanilla yogurt recipe requires only 3 staple ingredients that you probably already have on hand or can quickly grab from the grocery store. You’ll need plain whole milk Greek yogurt, vanilla extract, and honey. 

ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view

Substitutions

The beauty of this easy recipe is that it’s totally customizable based on your preferences. Once you make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt, that’s just a jumping-off point! Feel free to substitute or make additions to suit your sweet tooth or dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions:

  • Yogurt: While I personally love that creamy greek yogurt taste and texture, you can use whatever type of yogurt you prefer for this recipe! Regular yogurt, whole milk yogurt, or skim milk yogurt would all beautifully pair with vanilla and honey. You can even use plant-based yogurt if you’re vegan!
  • Other sweeteners: To make sweetened Greek yogurt, feel free to play around with added sugar based on your preference. Here at FPL headquarters, we prefer flavoring plain yogurt with natural sweeteners, like maple syrup and raw honey, but you can use confectioners’ sugar (aka powdered sugar) in its place for extra sweetness. To make a keto version of this recipe, sub in low-carb sweeteners, like monk fruit sugar or erythritol. We also recommend that you be careful when adding artificial sweeteners, like aspartame, sucralose, xylitol, etc., to unsweetened yogurt, as it can highly impact the flavor. 
  • Vanilla: Adding a dash of pure vanilla extract to plain yogurt is usually what I prefer, but you’re also free to use vanilla bean paste for a 1:1 substitute (meaning you can substitute one for equal amounts of the other). You can also use imitation vanilla extract, which tends to be more affordable. Or, if you’d rather, you can use half of a vanilla bean (vanilla beans have a potent flavor, so half of a bean is all you need). 
  • Honey syrup: As another sweetener option for this recipe, you can use my Honey Syrup recipe (a combination of honey and water) for honey vanilla greek yogurt. If you choose to use honey syrup, use double the amount of honey that the recipe calls for.   
  • Ground cinnamon: This is an optional addition, but adding a sprinkle of ground cinnamon to your plain vanilla yogurt really complements the flavors. 

How to Turn Plain Yogurt into Vanilla Yogurt

You can whip up this delicious recipe in no time! Simply:

person showing how to make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt in a photo collage
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the yogurt, honey, and vanilla extract to a bowl. Whisk until smooth and well combined. 
  2. Taste and adjust: Give it a taste and add more vanilla extract or honey, if desired. 

How to Store

If you have leftovers of this honey and Greek yogurt recipe, you can store them in the fridge or freezer to enjoy later. Here are some tips:

  • Storage: You can store your homemade honey vanilla yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze your vanilla-flavored yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: To serve the vanilla honey greek yogurt from frozen, first thaw your container of yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The yogurt may appear separated once thawed, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products. To revive the thawed yogurt, give it a stir to incorporate the ingredients or add in a small amount of yogurt if it’s watery. If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed! 

How to Use Vanilla Yogurt in Recipes?

Not only can you enjoy this flavorful vanilla greek yogurt recipe by itself as a breakfast or snack, but you can also use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt! Here are some vanilla yogurt recipe ideas:

  • Make yogurt parfaits: Name a better combo than creamy vanilla yogurt, fresh fruit, and crunchy granola. For one of my favorite vanilla yogurt recipes, try making my Yogurt Parfait recipe!
  • Try it in a smoothie: Vanilla yogurt is the perfect addition to any smoothie because it gives it that coveted thick, creamy texture and adds in just the right amount of sweetness. Try adding it to my Strawberry Banana Yogurt Smoothie or Cantaloupe Shake recipe for an ultra-tasty and refreshing smoothie. 
  • Pair it with fruit: Whether you’re making a fruit salad for a brunch crowd, bringing a fruit platter to your next gathering, or setting out a big fruit bowl for dessert, this easy recipe pairs perfectly with all your favorite seasonal fruit. 
  • Top it off with granola: Something about the crunchy texture and salty-sweet flavor of granola goes so well with yogurt. Simply top a bowl of yogurt with my Chunky Granola and call it breakfast!
  • Turn it into ice cream: Want to know how to make plain yogurt taste better? For a healthier yet delicious version of our favorite summer treat, try using this recipe to make Vanilla Frozen Yogurt!
plain vanilla yogurt with honey in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the side view

FAQs

Can you add vanilla extract to yogurt?

Yes, you can! Adding a dash of vanilla extract in plain yogurt really complements the tanginess of the yogurt and gives it a subtly sweet taste and flavor. Make it even better by adding a tablespoon of honey!

How much vanilla to add to plain yogurt?

When making plain yogurt vanilla-flavored, add half a teaspoon of vanilla extract for every cup of plain yogurt. Feel free to add more or less, depending on your personal preference.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

If you have an abundance of yogurt in your fridge that you’re dying to use, or if you’re just a yogurt fanatic like me, here are some other yogurt recipes you’ll love! 

If you try your hand at making this recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

vanilla yogurt recipe in a bowl with strawberries on the side from top view
Print

Vanilla Yogurt Recipe

Learn how to turn plain yogurt into vanilla yogurt with this simple Vanilla Yogurt recipe! This refreshing, subtly sweet yogurt requires only 3 ingredients and takes 2 minutes to prepare. Enjoy it as a yummy breakfast with granola and berries or as a bedtime snack, or use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 283kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain whole milk yogurt regular or Greek yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons hone
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, honey and vanilla extract in a bowl. Whisk until well combined.
  • Give it a taste and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Storage: Store yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: Thaw frozen yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). If the yogurt has separated while thawing, stir to reincorporate the ingredients. Add a few more tablespoons of yogurt if it’s too watery, or blend for a few seconds in a food processor. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed.

Nutrition

Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 115mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 243IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 299mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/feed/ 6
Mexican Pickled Onions https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/#comments Tue, 09 Aug 2022 15:02:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7571 This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe.  Love red onions as a...

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe. 

Love red onions as a condiment? Also, check out our Roasted Red Onions recipe!

Mexican pickled red onions in a jar with a fork from the top view

Ingredients

For this Mexican pickled onion recipe, you’ll need one large red onion, boiling hot water, fresh lime juice, apple cider vinegar, and kosher salt.

ingredients for the recipe

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

When it comes to add-ins, these red pickled onions make Mexican cuisine an adventure. Choose a few of your favorite ingredients from this tasty list for a flavor experience perfectly suited to your taste buds.

optional add-in ingredients for pickled purple onions
  • Add some spice: Turn up the heat at your Mexican potluck by making a batch of quick pickled red onions with jalapenos. Just be sure to slice your jalapeno peppers thinly before adding them to the pickling jar. Or, add a pinch of red pepper flakes to the mix for another spicy solution. 
  • Make it sweeter: Mexican pickled onions are known for their sharp, tangy flavor. Now you can balance this robust condiment with a touch of sweetness by adding just a teaspoon of honey, maple syrup, or granulated sugar. 
  • Add seasoning: Want to make this Mexican pickled red onion recipe even more flavorful? Then, additional seasoning is just what you need! Thinly sliced garlic clove and allspice berries will give your onions a potent edge, while cumin seeds and whole black peppercorns are perfect for a rich and earthy taste. You can even add bay leaves or dried oregano (or Mexican oregano, if you can get your hands on it) for bold herby notes.
  • White onions: Not a fan of red onions? No problem! Though I love red onions for their brilliant color and sweet taste, white or yellow onions will also work in this easy recipe.
  • Vinegar: Though I use apple cider vinegar in my Mexican red onions, red wine vinegar or distilled white vinegar will also work.
  • Lemon juice: If you don’t want to make your Mexican pickled red onions with lime juice, fresh lemon juice works as a tart and tasty substitute.

How to Make Pickled Red Onions for Tacos

Mexican-style pickled red onions are a cinch to make and even better to eat. One small batch of this pickled red onion recipe, and you’ll want it for all your Mexican meals.

person making Spanish pickled onions
  1. Prep the onions: Place the sliced red onion in a colander, set the colander in a bowl, and set aside. Pour two cups of boiling water atop the sliced onions and gently press with a spoon. 
  2. Soak: Be sure to submerge all of the onion slices in the water. Let them soak for 45 seconds and drain.
  3. Add ingredients to the jar: Transfer the onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Then, pour the fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions, and add the salt. Using a fork, make sure to push them down so that they are submerged in the liquid as much as possible.
  4. Add additional ingredients: If you’re using any optional add-ins, put them into the jar.
person shaking a jar of marinated red onions for tacos
  1. Shake the ingredients: Close the lid over the jar and give it a good shake.
  2. Refrigerate the jar: Place the closed jar in the fridge and let it sit for a minimum of two hours.
  3. Serve: Serve the pickled Mexican onions as a condiment or garnish with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes.

How to Store

To store leftover Mexican pickled red onions, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. However, keep in mind that the more things you add in, the higher the potential of spoilage.

How to Use These Lime Pickled Onions

These authentic Mexican pickled red onions (aka Escabeche Onions)  are a godsend when it comes to garnishing any of your meat or vegetable dishes. And guess what? They are not just for Mexican cooking! They can also be served with dishes from Cuban, Dominican, and even Spanish cuisine.

Needless to say, you can use this versatile condiment anywhere you use red onions, from tasty tacos to garden-fresh salads. Below are a few dishes from the archives to get you started:

Your Favorite Tacos & Quesadillas

These red pickled onions are mostly served for street tacos in Mexico, so it is a no-brainer to serve them with your favorite tacos in your home as well. 

For a savory, protein-filled meal, add your onions to Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos (hello, meat-lovers!). Use it as a topping for your Salmon Avocado Toast. You can also serve vegetarian or pescatarian dishes by adding your pickled purple onion to a Spinach Quesadilla, fish tacos, or Black Bean Quinoa Tacos.

Chilis & Grain Bowls 

Who can resist a bold and hearty bowl of authentic Mexican chili? Not me! You can add authentic Mexican pickled onions to rich and savory recipes, like Quinoa Chili, Chocolate Chili, and my fan-favorite Mexican Quinoa Bowl. Pink onions are also a great condiment in vegan recipes and surely a perfect match for my Vegan Chili and Burrito Bowl.

Salads

This quick recipe makes a delicious addition to dozens of your favorite Mexican dishes, from spicy Mexican Corn Salad to fresh Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even add this simple recipe to dishes beyond Mexican food, like my creamy, crowd-pleasing Potato Salad with Capers.

a jar of Qdoba pickled red onions recipe from the side view

Expert Tips

You don’t have to live south of the border to learn how to make pickled onions Mexican style. These tasty tips will have you preparing these delicious marinated onions any day of the week.

  • Use the freshest onions you can get your hands on: When making this lime pickled red onions recipe, make sure your onions are super fresh. Not only will they taste fresher, but they will also have a brighter color and more intense flavor.
  • Slice your onions thinly: Even thin onion slices make the best pickled onions. For best results, use a sharp chef’s knife, or a mandoline (affiliate link), if you have one.
  • Do not skip the 45-second soaking: I learned this trick from Rick Bayless’ cookbook, Mexican Kitchen (affiliate link). While it might seem like an extra step, soaking raw onions for a short amount of time helps with softening their flavor and pungent taste. 
  • Pickled purple onions lose volume as they sit: Don’t be worried if your onion slices seem to overflow in their jar, especially at the beginning. They lose volume as they marinate in the acid, so feel free to push them down until they fit. If your onions still don’t fit, feel free to split them into two jars instead.
  • Use a glass container with a tight-fitting lid: Glass containers with tight lids—such as a pint-sized jar such as a mason jar (affiliate link) with a wide mouth or a large jar such as this Weck Canning Jar (affiliate link) —are your best options.
  • Use the pickle juice in salad dressings: Don’t throw away the pickle brine, as the leftover tangy juice makes for a great addition to any of your salad dressings.

FAQs

How long do pickled red onions last?

Mexican pickled red onion will last 2 weeks when stored in an airtight container in the fridge.

How to make pickled onions very quickly?

 To make quick pickled onions for tacos, use lime juice—also referred to as “Mexican vinegar”—as your pickling base. When you make pickled onion in lime, the citrus juice will break down your onions in less time than other pickling ingredients.

Other Recipes You Can Make with Red Onions:

Wondering what else you can do with red onions? Here are a few of my favorite recipes to help you use them:

If you try this Mexican Pickled Onions recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

red onions pickled in lime juice in a jar with fork pulling out some
Print

Mexican Pickled Onions Recipe

These easy Mexican Pickled Onions add a punch of tangy flavor and a burst of bold color to all your favorite Mexican recipes. This 4-ingredient recipe is super quick to make and adds the perfect finishing touch to tacos, salads, chilis, and more!
Course Garnish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion sliced thinly (approximately 1 ½ cup sliced onion)
  • 2 cups boiling hot water
  • ¾ cup fresh lime juice*
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 garlic clove sliced thinly (⅛ inch thick slices)
  • ½ small jalapeno slice thinly – remove seeds if you like
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ¼ whole black peppercorns
  • 1 teaspoon honey maple syrup or granulated sugar
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¼ teaspoon oregano Mexican oregano if you can get your hands on
  • ½ teaspoon all spice berries
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Place red onion slices in a colander set in a bowl. Pour 2 cups of boiling water over the onion. Gently press with a spoon to make sure that the onions are fully submerged in water. Let it sit for 45 seconds.
  • Transfer the now-drained onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Pour fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions. Add in the salt.
  • If you are using any of the optional add-ins, go ahead and add them in.
  • Put the lid on and shake until everything is fully combined.
  • Place it in the fridge and let it sit for at least 2 hours.
  • Serve with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes as garnish.

Video

Notes

  • Lime juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice here, but in a pinch, you can also use store-bought lime juice.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. 
  • They lose volume as they sit in lime juice and vinegar mixture: When you are first placing them in the jar it might feel like you have a lot, but keep in mind that as they sit in the acidic brine juice, they lose some of their volume.
  • Weck Jars or Pint Size Mason Jars are ideal: I use Weck jars for pickling (as you see in the photos), but pint-sized Mason Jars are also ideal. Just make sure that they have a large mouth and a tight-fitting lid.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 2359mg | Potassium: 395mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Mexican Pickled Onions appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/feed/ 14
Homemade Corn Tortillas https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-corn-tortillas/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-corn-tortillas/#comments Sat, 30 Apr 2022 17:09:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4909 It is no secret that I am a huge Mexican food. And what is more Mexican than corn flour tortillas? I first learned how to make homemade corn tortillas when on my very first visit to Mexico. The hotel we were staying at had a wonderful restaurant with young ladies making fresh corn tortillas outside. Watching them make hundreds of fresh corn tortillas was almost therapeutic. On our way back...

The post Homemade Corn Tortillas appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that I am a huge Mexican food. And what is more Mexican than corn flour tortillas?

I first learned how to make homemade corn tortillas when on my very first visit to Mexico. The hotel we were staying at had a wonderful restaurant with young ladies making fresh corn tortillas outside. Watching them make hundreds of fresh corn tortillas was almost therapeutic.

A man is serving corn tortillas placed on top of each other with text on the image

On our way back we stopped by the local market and bought a wooden tortilla press (like this one – affiliate link) similar to the one that they use in the hotel. Ever since that visit, I have been making my own corn tortillas.

If you have never tried your hand at making your own tortillas, consider this your how-to guide. Made with two simple ingredients, making corn tortillas from scratch is easier than you think. Below you will find a detailed explanation for everything you need to know including ingredients, equipment, technique, and storage to make the best corn tortilla recipe at home.

A woman is making corn tortillas in Mexico - Learn how to make authentic corn tortillas and get the recipe for Homemade Corn Tortillas

Recipe Ingredients

To make homemade corn tortillas, you can use either fresh masa (which is why some people call these corn masa tortillas) or masa harina and water. Some people prefer to use a little bit of salt as well.

masa harina mixed with water in a bowl

You can find fresh masa at your local Latin grocery store (or Mexican markets) in their refrigerated section. While most people say that using fresh masa is the best, if you are not living in an area where you can get your hands on it, you can make your own tortillas using masa harina and water. I like Maseca brand (this White Maseca Corn Flour, in particular) and buy it from our local grocery store in their international food aisle.

If you are living in the United States, Bob’s Red Mills sells masa harina as well. I have tried this recipe with that brand and it worked very well.

Do I Need A Tortilla Press?

The answer is yes and no.

While I was reading through different sources, I saw that some people press out the dough in between two flat surfaces like dinner plates or large and heavy books. Some even feel comfortable patting out tortillas in between their two hands. Though from what I understand, getting a thin corn tortilla by using your hands requires quite a bit of experience.

I personally think that it is much easier to use a tortilla press. If you do not have access to wood and heavy one like the one we have (or a similar one like this one – affiliate link), most kitchen equipment stores and various online sources sell aluminum or cast-iron corn tortilla press (like this Tortilla Press) for less than $20. Therefore, if you are serious about making corn tortillas at home, I think it is a good investment.

How To Make Corn Tortillas

Make The Dough

To make the masa dough, mix masa harina with warm water (tap water is fine)in a large bowl using a wooden spoon. Or, you can knead the dough by hand as well. Cover it with a damp towel, and let it rest for 20-30 minutes on the kitchen counter.

person making the dough for corn taco shells

When ready, add in some cool water, one tablespoon at a time, until it has a soft texture without being sticky. Here, keep in mind that the dough for corn tortilla is a very forgiving one. If it gets too dry, you can add a little more water. And if it gets too wet, you can add a little more masa. The “right consistency” should feel similar to Play-doh.

Before pressing and cooking the tortillas, make sure to cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel to prevent them from drying.

How To Use a Tortilla Press

Next, we press the dough balls into and make tortilla.

First, you will need a medium-heavy plastic bag to fit over the plates of the press. I used a large (gallon-size) Ziploc bag. I trimmed the zipper top so that it is a large rectangular piece. With that being said, you can use two pieces of plastic as well.

person showing how to make masa tortilla recipe

Second, you lay the plastic bag on the tortilla press, making sure that it covers both the upper and bottom parts of the press.

Third, divide the dough into smaller 14 to 15 equal pieces. You can eyeball it or use a small cookie scoop to make it easier on yourself.

Roll each piece into small dough balls (each piece should be similar to a golf ball). Working one piece at a time, place one dough ball on the bottom part of the press, cover it with the top of the Ziploc bag, close the press, and push it down (while applying gentle pressure).

Then, gently peel back the tortilla from the plastic and transfer it to your hand.

How Do You Cook Corn Tortillas

To cook corn tortillas, you can either use a griddle or a cast iron skillet.

The important thing here is to make sure that the skillet is very hot before starting the cooking process. I usually let it heat up over medium high-heat for 5 minutes or so.

Once fully warm, place the first tortilla on the pan. It will first stick and that is normal. But then in 15 seconds or so it will release itself and that is when it is time to flip it. After that, it should take around 30 to 45 seconds for it to fully cook. You will know that it is good to go when you start seeing brown spots on top.

Keep an eye on it as it is cooking and adjust the temperature as necessary to prevent it from drying.

According to Rick Bayless, a perfect tortilla is one that balloons up like pita bread after the second flip.

Here, one thing most resources suggest is to use your fingers to flip instead of a spatula, because the edges will curl up as the heat cooks the tortillas. At first, I didn’t feel comfortable flipping it with my hands, but towards the end, with a little practice, I was more comfortable with it. Still, if you don’t feel comfortable, a spatula works just fine.

How Do You Get Soft Tortillas

One thing that is so important to note here is that the cast iron skillet (or griddle) only cooks the outside of the tortilla. In order for it to cook thoroughly, you need to cover them with a clean kitchen towel and place it in a bowl with a lid. As it sits, the heat from the growing sack will continue the cooking process resulting in softer and completely cooked corn tortillas.

So, as you can imagine, the softest one is the one at the very bottom. Therefore, when you are ready to serve, it is best to start from the very bottom of the stack.

Corn tortilla bread in a bowl with a lid

Storage Instructions

I think these DIY corn tortillas are best on the day that they are made. That is why, I usually make just the amount that I plan to serve.

However, to find out the best way to store tortillas, we made two batches of this recipe. You have two options when it comes to storing corn flour tortillas. They both work with a caveat:

  • At room temperature: Keep them wrapped with a clean kitchen towel and let them sit on the kitchen counter. It will be fresh for up to two days but if you leave it longer it will start developing mold.
  • In the fridge: Bring them to room temperature, wrap them tightly with a kitchen towel, and store them in the fridge. They should keep fresh for up to 4 days. However, as they sit in the fridge they get hard so I recommend a quick warm-up on the skillet before serving.

Once you get a hang of the process, you can make the most delicious corn tortilla bread in your very own kitchen in less than 20 minutes. And after that, I can almost guarantee you that you will never want to go back to buying them from the supermarket.

How To Serve

You can use these corn tortilla shells in so many ways. Here are a few ways to get you started:

  • Make a taco: Try my Quinoa Black Bean Tacos or Brisket Tacos Recipe
  • Enchiladas: Soak these corn tortilla wraps in your favorite enchilada sauce, roll them up with your favorite filling, and bake them in a casserole with more sauce on top.
  • Homemade tortilla chips: Cut them into small triangles and fry them in oil. Sprinkle with salt and serve with guacamole on the side. This combo makes the best Mexican Party Food.

FAQs

What is Masa Harina and Where Can I Find It?

Masa harina is dried corn dough. It is used to make corn tortillas by mixing it with water. Nowadays, most supermarkets sell Maseca brand masa harina. You can also find it online. This White Maseca Corn Flour is what I usually use.

How to make yellow or blue corn tortillas?

For yellow tortillas, use Maseca Instant Yellow Corn Masa Flour and for blue tortillas use Maseca Blue Corn Instant Masa Flour.

When to use corn tortillas versus flour tortillas?

It is a personal choice so you can use them interchangeably in most recipes. Since flour tortillas are sturdier, they work well when making burritos, enchiladas, and quesadillas. Corn tortillas, on the other hand, work well with Mexican Tacos and when making huevos rancheros.

Other Mexican Inspired Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Homemade Corn Tortillas recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

corn tortillas placed on top of each other being held by a man
Print

Corn Tortillas Recipe

Making Corn Tortillas at home is much easier than you think! Here is a comprehensive guide to help you learn how to make Homemade Corn Tortillas with step-by-step photos along with all the information you need including technique, ingredients, and equipment.
Course Bread
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 15 corn tortillas
Calories 49kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 3/4 cups masa harina for tortillas, (I used the Maseca brand) (9.5 ounces)
  • 1 cup hot tap water plus 2 tablespoons
  • 2 tablespoons water at room temperature

Instructions

  • Using a wooden spoon, mix masa harina and 1 cup plus 2 tablespoons hot tap water in a large mixing bowl. Cover it with stretch film and let it sit for 30 minutes.
  • Begin working the masa harina and water mixture with your hands. Add 2 more tablespoons of cool water (one at a time) for the dough to reach an ideal texture, where it is still soft without being sticky (similar to Play-Doh). If, for some reason, it is dry (looks like it is cracked), add a little more water. Or if it is too wet (or sticky), let it sit on the kitchen counter uncovered for it to dry out for a little bit or add more masa.
  • Divide the dough into 15 equal pieces (for this recipe, it was 1.4 ounces each) for 6-inch corn tortillas. Cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel.
  • Cut each sides of a Ziploc bag to make it a large rectangular piece. Lay it on the tortilla press, making sure it covers both the upper and bottom parts of the press. (See the pictures in the blog post)
  • Roll each piece by placing on the bottom part of the press lined with the Ziploc bag. Cover it with the top of the Ziploc bag, close the press and push it down. Gently peel back the top layer of the bag, and transfer it to your hand. Place it on a baking sheet and cover it with a kitchen towel. Continue with pressing the rest.
  • In the mean time, heat a cast iron skillet in medium heat for 10 minutes. You want to make sure it gets really hot.
  • When you are ready to bake, place a tortilla on the skillet and let it cook for 15 seconds. At first it will stick, but then, if your temperature is right (read the blog post for more information on the temperature), it will come off easily for you to flip it. Let it cook for another 30-45 seconds or until it is lightly browned.
  • As tortillas are cooked, transfer them in a basket cloth lined with a kitchen towel. Allow them to continue cooking with the steam (from their own heat) inside the basket for at least 10 more minutes before serving.

Notes

  • It is optional, but if you want you can swap some of the water with chicken/vegetable stock and add salt into your dough.
  • How to get soft tortillas: One thing that is so important to note here is that the cast iron skillet (or griddle) only cooks the outside of the tortilla. In order for it to cook thoroughly, you need to cover them with a clean kitchen towel and place it in a bowl with a lid. As it sits, the heat from the growing sack will continue the cooking process resulting in softer and completely cooked corn tortillas. So, as you can imagine, the softest one is the one at the very bottom. Therefore, when you are ready to serve, it is best to start from the very bottom of the stack.
  • How to Store: I think these DIY corn tortillas are best on the day that they are made. That is why I usually make just the amount that I plan to serve. However, to find out the best way to store tortillas, we made two batches of this recipe. You have two options when it comes to storing corn flour tortillas. They both work with a caveat:
    • At room temperature: Keep them wrapped with a clean kitchen towel and let them sit on the kitchen counter. It will be fresh for up to two days but if you leave it longer it will start developing mold.
    • In the fridge: Bring them to room temperature, wrap them tightly with a kitchen towel, and store them in the fridge. They should keep fresh for up to 4 days. However, as they sit in the fridge they get hard so I recommend a quick warm-up on the skillet before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 49kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 35mg | Fiber: 1g | Vitamin A: 28IU | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Homemade Corn Tortillas appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-corn-tortillas/feed/ 69
How To Salt Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/#comments Wed, 27 Apr 2022 21:02:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=50910 Why Salt Eggplant If you’re new to preparing eggplant for cooking, you might be wondering, “Is salting eggplant necessary?” The short answer is no. Because thanks to the advancements made in eggplant farming, most of the time, salting eggplant is not necessary. For most recipes, I simply slice up the veggie and get cooking! However, if we go back in time and look back at when people first began to...

The post How To Salt Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Why Salt Eggplant

If you’re new to preparing eggplant for cooking, you might be wondering, “Is salting eggplant necessary?” The short answer is no. Because thanks to the advancements made in eggplant farming, most of the time, salting eggplant is not necessary. For most recipes, I simply slice up the veggie and get cooking!

However, if we go back in time and look back at when people first began to cook eggplants, the vegetable had a bitter taste. They came up with this salting process to help get the bitterness out of the eggplant before cooking it, thereby making it more palatable.

person salting eggplant slices on a sheet pan

Since then, however, farmers have bred out much of eggplants’ signature bitterness. As Deborah Madison says in her cookbook New Vegetarian Cooking for Everyone (affiliate link):

“Eggplant that’s freshly picked, harvested before it’s full of seeds, and eaten within a few days is naturally sweet and doesn’t need salting.” 

Deborah Madison

In other words, fresh, young eggplants bought at the grocery store or farmer’s market likely don’t need to be salted. Even so, there are other times when salting eggplant may still be a good idea:

  • Salting eliminates bitter flavors that come from storing your eggplants too long or using older eggplants. Today’s eggplants may be sweeter, but they still have some bitter liquid inside, especially if they are not fresh.
  • Fried eggplant is crispier and more savory when it’s been pre-salted. When preparing eggplant for frying, the salting process ensures the vegetable absorbs less oil. As a result, taking the time to salt eggplant prior to frying yields perfectly seasoned fried eggplant with a silkier texture.
  • Salted eggplants are seasoned from the inside out. Translation: Their interiors will have the same savory, rich flavor as their exteriors. It is an easy way to make eggplant taste good.

In short: Do you need to salt eggplant before cooking? Not always. But it can’t hurt! 

Ingredients

To purge eggplant, you will need globe eggplants and salt.

Though I am using a globe eggplant—the thicker, more spherical kind of eggplant most often found in the U.S.—you can use this technique to salt other types of eggplant (such as Japanese eggplant).

How to Purge Eggplants

Preparing aubergine is a cinch when you have these two methods on hand. Whether you prefer sweating eggplant or prefer brining it, you’ll find all you need right here.

Method 1: Sweating Eggplants

The first method of salting eggplant—“sweating”—requires zero added liquid. Instead, a generous layer of salt does all the work. Now you can learn how to sweat eggplant in just five easy steps.

person washing, drying and slicing brinjal
  1. Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water and dry it with a kitchen towel. Then, slice off the stem and cut the eggplant as desired (both cubes and slices will work).
person showing how to tenderize aubergine by purging in a collage of images
  1. Sprinkle eggplant with salt: Generously sprinkle your slices with salt, being sure to cover both sides of the eggplant. I recommend using 1 to 2 teaspoons of kosher salt per eggplant depending on the size.

PRO TIP: The key to putting salt on eggplant is to coat the entire surface of the eggplant with a generous amount of salt. A minimum of one teaspoon of kosher salt is necessary for every medium-sized eggplant to draw out bitterness and add sufficient flavor. Furthermore, adding a good amount of salt will help tenderize the eggplant and keep its shape.

  1. Let the eggplant sit: Place the seasoned eggplant over a colander for 30 minutes to an hour. Once beads of moisture start to appear, rinse your eggplant slices under cold water and remove excess salt.
  2. Dry the eggplant: Layer a baking sheet with a couple of sheets of paper towels and arrange the drained eggplant slices on top. Then, take another sheet of paper towel and gently press each piece, removing as much excess moisture as possible. Repeat these steps with all remaining slices of eggplant.

Method 2: Brining Eggplants

Soaking eggplant in salt water—also known as “brining”—is another easy way to prepare eggplant. Make a bowl of salt water, add your eggplant slices, and let time work its magic in this simple process.

person showing how to salt eggplant using brining method in several photos
  1. Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water. Then, dry it with a kitchen towel and slice off its stem. Next, cut the eggplant as needed (either cubes or slices will work). 
  2. Make the saltwater bath: Fill a large bowl with cool water and stir in a tablespoon of kosher salt.
  3. Soak the eggplant: Place the vegetable pieces in the brine, submerging each slice of eggplant in the water. If necessary, you may place a small plate on top to ensure no pieces float to the surface. Let the eggplant soak in the salt water for 30 minutes to an hour.
  4. Drain the brine: Drain the eggplants and rinse them with cold water.
  5. Dry the salted eggplant: Line a baking sheet with paper towels, and place your drained slices on top in a single layer. Then, use a clean kitchen towel or paper towels to press down on the pieces, drying out the eggplant with gentle pressure.

How to Store

If you’re looking for easy meal prep, these expert storage tips are for you! Not a single bite of your brined eggplant will go to waste when you have this neat guide at your disposal.

  • Storage: Once you have prepared eggplant in brine or sweated your slices, store them in an airtight container. Your eggplant will remain fresh for 1-2 days.
  • To freeze: To freeze your prepared eggplant, place it in a plastic bag and squeeze out as much air as possible before sealing. The eggplant can remain in the freezer for up to a month. Let the eggplant thaw in the refrigerator for 24-48 hours before using.

FAQs

Want to know more about preparing eggplant for baking? Whether you’re curious about how to press eggplant or how to remove bitterness from eggplant, here are my answers to some of the most frequently asked questions.

How long should eggplant sweat?

Eggplants should sweat between 30 minutes and an hour. To check the doneness of your eggplant, look for little droplets of moisture on the vegetable’s surface.

How to remove water from eggplant?

To dry eggplant, all you need to do is blot your slices with paper towels (or a clean kitchen cloth). You may also line a cookie sheet with paper towels and arrange your eggplant pieces on top to remove excess water.

Do you rinse eggplant after salting?

Most people prefer to rinse their eggplant after salting it, but you’ll be fine without this extra step. Instead, you can simply blot excess salt with a paper towel or bypass this step entirely for a super well-seasoned eggplant.

Should you peel eggplant before cooking?

Whether you peel eggplant before cooking is a personal choice. The skin of an eggplant is edible and nutrient-rich. So, if removing the skin is not your thing that is totally fine.

Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

Now that you know how to salt and prepare eggplant for cooking, here are a few recipes you can use eggplant along with a few different ways of cooking it:

If you try any of these methods for salting eggplant, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment about your experience below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person salting eggplant from front view
Print

How To Salt Eggplant Recipe

Learn how to salt eggplant to remove its bitterness using two simple methods. Purging eggplant might be the easiest way to make it taste better. So, next time you are cooking an eggplant dish follow these steps to prepare your eggplant for a perfectly seasoned and bitter free recipe.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 1 eggplant
Calories 115kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 eggplant*
  • Kosher Salt

Instructions

Method 1: Sweating Eggplants

  • Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water and dry it with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Then, slice off the stem and cut the eggplant as desired.
  • Sprinkle eggplant with salt: Generously sprinkle eggplant slices* with one to two teaspoons of salt, being sure to cover season them on both sides.
  • All the eggplant slices sweat: Place the seasoned eggplant in a colander for 30 minutes to an hour. Once little droplets of moisture start to appear, rinse your eggplant slices under cold water to remove excess salt.
  • Pat-Dry the eggplant: Layer a baking sheet with a couple of sheets of paper towels and arrange the drained eggplant slices on top. Using another sheet of paper towel, gently press each piece to remove as much excess moisture as possible. Repeat these steps with all remaining slices of eggplant.

Method 2: Brining Eggplants (aka Soaking Eggplant in a Salt Water Bath)

  • Wash and slice the eggplant: Wash the eggplant under cold water. Then, dry it with a kitchen towel and slice off its stem. Next, slice the eggplant as needed (either cubes or steaks/slices will work).
  • Make the salt water bath: Fill a large bowl with cold tap water and stir in a tablespoon of kosher salt.
  • Soak the eggplant: Place the eggplant slice in the brine, submerging each slice of eggplant in the water. If needed, place a small plate on top to ensure no pieces float to the surface. Let them soak for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Drain and rinse them with cold water.
  • Dry brined eggplant slices: Line a sheet pan with a few sheets of paper towels, and place your drained slices on top in a single layer. Then, use a few paper towels to press down on the pieces, drying out the eggplant with gentle pressure.

Notes

  • I use widely available globe eggplants. However, you can salt other types of eggplants using this method.
  • *As you are salting the eggplant, make sure to coat the whole surface with salt. I use a teaspoon of kosher salt for a medium-sized globe eggplant. However, you can use more or less depending on the size of your eggplant.

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Salt Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-salt-eggplant/feed/ 8
Homemade Ricotta Cheese (Ina Garten’s Version) https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-ricotta-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-ricotta-cheese/#comments Sun, 03 Apr 2022 11:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2166 Ricotta is a classic Italian cheese that is so easy to make at home. Although you can buy an authentic artisanal variety at the closest old-school Italian market, you can make ricotta cheese at home from scratch with a little bit of time and patience. The best part – this easy homemade ricotta cheese recipe can be used in savory recipes like eggplant involtini, ricotta lemon pasta or strawberry ricotta...

The post Homemade Ricotta Cheese (Ina Garten’s Version) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Ricotta is a classic Italian cheese that is so easy to make at home. Although you can buy an authentic artisanal variety at the closest old-school Italian market, you can make ricotta cheese at home from scratch with a little bit of time and patience.

The best part – this easy homemade ricotta cheese recipe can be used in savory recipes like eggplant involtini, ricotta lemon pasta or strawberry ricotta bruschetta or sweet recipes like almond flour ricotta cake or lemon ricotta pancakes. Just as the Barefoot Contessa says, “how easy is that?”

Homemade ricotta cheese in a bowl

Ingredients

The ricotta cheese ingredients are short and sweet – all you need is:

  • Whole cow milk
  • Heavy cream
  • Kosher salt
  • White wine vinegar
ingredients for Ina's ricotta cheese from the top view

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Milk and Cream: If you can get your hands on them, look for milk and cream at the grocery store that is pasteurized. While ultra-pasteurized milk and heavy cream work in this easy ricotta recipe, I find that the pasteurized variety yields creamier results.
  • Vinegar: Feel free to use distilled white vinegar or lemon juice instead.

How to Make Ricotta Cheese At Home

DIY ricotta is as easy as it comes and will always outrank the regular grocery store variety. Here’s how to make ricotta cheese from scratch in your very own kitchen. Follow these simple steps for perfect results:

person placing cheesecloth in large sieve over a bowl
  1. Prep equipment: Place a fine-mesh large sieve over a deep bowl (deeper and larger than the sieve) and line it with 2 layers of cheesecloth. Set aside.
person showing how to prepare ricotta cheese
  1. Boil milk and cream: Pour the milk, cream, and salt into a large nonreactive saucepan like a Dutch oven (or any other heavy-bottomed saucepan). Stirring occasionally, heat the mixture over medium heat until it comes to a full boil (about 15 to 20 minutes) or the whey is heated to 185 degrees.
  2. Add vinegar: Turn off the heat and slowly add the vinegar. Gently stir it once and let it sit undisturbed for 3 minutes. It will instantly start to curdle.
person showing how make ricotta cheese with step by step photos
  1. Separate the curds from the whey: Pour the mixture into a cheesecloth-lined sieve and let the mixture drain into the bowl for at least 1 hour (or up to 2 hours). Do not discard the leftover whey (more on that below). The longer you let the mixture drain the thicker it will get. I like mine after an hour. However, you can let it drain in the fridge overnight as well, especially if you like your fresh ricotta cheese on the thicker side.
person showing the thickness of ricotta cheese after it is fully drained
  1. Use and store: Transfer ricotta to a bowl. Use immediately or transfer to an airtight container and refrigerate. The ricotta cheese will last for 4-5 days in the fridge.

How to Serve

Ricotta can be reheated without melting, making it a great option for filled pasta recipes like ravioli, manicotti, or lasagna and baked goods like cannoli and cheesecake. Here are a few ideas and fresh ricotta cheese recipes to inspire you. Serve it as:

How to Store

This delicious homemade ricotta cheese will keep in an airtight container or covered with plastic wrap in the fridge for up to 5 days.

I do not recommend freezing the ricotta.

Expert Tips:

  • Use half as much cream as milk. Too much heavy cream will weigh down your ricotta, making it less fluffy.
  • Use an enameled pot. I like to use my Le Creuset (or Staub) Dutch oven.
  • Use an instant-read thermometer if you can. You can add the vinegar as soon as the milk and cream mixture comes to a boil. However, for perfect results, use an instant-read thermometer to ensure that it reaches 185 degrees F. (85 C.)
  • Drain the ricotta well. The longer and more thoroughly you drain your ricotta, the thicker it will be. It tastes best when it is at room temperature.
  • Don’t overmake. Homemade fresh ricotta goes bad quickly, so it is best to make only the amount you will use in the next few days. If you need to scale up the recipe, one gallon (16 cups) of a combo of milk and cream will yield approximately one pound of cheese.
  • Resist the urge to stir it too much. It is best to let it do its thing. 
  • Don’t throw away the remaining whey (milky parts). It’s full of nutrients and good bacteria. You can add a little to the soaking liquid for grains, make pizza dough, use it in smoothies, or pour a touch in when marinating meats.

FAQs

Here are a few FAQs and troubleshooting to help you as you make fresh ricotta at home.

What is Ricotta Cheese?

Ricotta cheese is an Italian cheese made from whole milk, heavy cream, vinegar and salt. The word ricotta means “recooked” in Italian. However, ricotta is considered a “whey cheese.”

How do you make ricotta cheese taste better?

When making ricotta, use the freshest milk and cream you can find and avoid ultra-pasteurized, if you can.

How long does fresh ricotta last in the fridge?

This fresh ricotta recipe is highly perishable. Store it in an airtight container for up to 4-5 days in the fridge.

Why is my ricotta not creamy?

Heating the milk too quickly will create a less smooth, creamy texture. Keep it over medium heat and be patient – the milk will eventually come to a boil.

Why is my ricotta rubbery?

If the ricotta is stirred too much while the curds are forming (i.e. after you add the vinegar), it will cause the curds to seize up and become rubbery.

Can I use ricotta instead of yogurt?

It depends on your recipe. However, since they are both reduced milk products in most recipes yogurt could be a good substitute for ricotta cheese.

Is ricotta cheese the same as cottage cheese?

While they are very similar in the ingredients used to make them, ricotta is different than cottage cheese, mainly in texture. They are both spreadable cheeses. Ricotta cheese tends to be smooth with a grainy texture, while cottage cheese has a lumpier texture.

Is ricotta cheese healthy?

Yes, long as it is consumed in moderation. Ricotta cheese is a good source of calcium and protein and contains all nine essential amino acids, according to this Ricotta Cheese article.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

This homemade ricotta recipe delivers a luscious and creamy cheese that you can use in many recipes. But that is not the only reason why it is worth your time. Here are a few more reasons:

  • All it takes is 4 ingredients: Milk and cream are the stars of the show, so make sure to buy the freshest ingredients you can find.
  • You can adjust the consistency to your liking: Keep it moist or really thicken it; the choice is up to you. This fresh cheese is supposed to have a creamy consistency, but if you prefer it to be thicker, you can easily adjust the draining time and get the results you are after.
  • Serving is super versatile: Its light flavor pairs well with both sweet and savory dishes, and its fluffy texture makes your baked goods that much more enjoyable.

More Barefoot Contessa Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Homemade Ricotta Cheese recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps other readers who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Ina Garten's Homemade ricotta cheese in a bowl from the top view
Print

Ricotta Cheese Recipe

A foolproof recipe for Homemade Ricotta Cheese by none other than Ina Garten (aka Barefoot Contessa). Making ricotta at home is easier than you think. Ready in 3 hours (with cooling time) and made with only a few ingredients.
Course Cheese
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Draining time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 374kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 cups whole milk Pasteurized not Ultra pasteurized
  • 2 cups heavy cream
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar or distilled vinegar

Instructions

  • Place a colander over a large pot (deeper and larger than the colander) and line it with 2 layers of cheesecloth. Set aside.
  • Pour the milk, cream, and salt in a large nonreactive saucepan like a Dutch oven. Stirring occasionally, heat the mixture in medium heat until it fully boils or it reaches to 185 degrees.
  • Turn off the heat and slowly add the vinegar. Gently stir it once and let it sit undisturbed for 3 minutes.
  • You will see it getting curdled.
  • Pour the mixture into the colander lined with cheesecloth and let it drain for at least an hour (or more like 2 hours). The longer you strain the thicker it will get. I like mine after an hour.
  • You can either use immediately or transfer it in an airtight container and refrigerate.

Notes

  • This recipe makes about 2 cups of ricotta cheese. The amount may change depending on how long you let it drain. The longer it drains, the thicker it will become.
  • Don’t throw away the remaining whey (milky parts). It’s full of nutrients and good bacteria. You can add a little to the soaking liquid for grains, making pizza dough, use it in smoothies, or pour a touch in when marinating meats.
  • Storage: Homemade ricotta cheese has a rather short shelflife but as long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, it should be fresh for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 374kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 488mg | Potassium: 274mg | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1430IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 235mg | Iron: 1mg

Adapted from Ina Gartens’  “Barefoot Contessa, How Easy Is That?” cookbook, Homemade Ricotta Cheese (page-74) and Herbed Ricotta Bruschettas (page-73).

The post Homemade Ricotta Cheese (Ina Garten’s Version) appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-ricotta-cheese/feed/ 9
How To Clean Portobello Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-portobello-mushrooms/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-portobello-mushrooms/#comments Wed, 16 Mar 2022 22:43:26 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49128 Portobello mushrooms make a delectable addition to countless dishes. However—whether you plan to grill, sautee, or bake portobello mushrooms in the oven—you have to clean them first. Cleaning portobello mushrooms is an easy process that takes a few minutes, but there are a few things to keep in mind during the process. So, if you’ve ever wondered, “How do you clean portobello mushrooms?” read on! You’ll learn everything you need...

The post How To Clean Portobello Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Portobello mushrooms make a delectable addition to countless dishes. However—whether you plan to grill, sautee, or bake portobello mushrooms in the oven—you have to clean them first. Cleaning portobello mushrooms is an easy process that takes a few minutes, but there are a few things to keep in mind during the process.

So, if you’ve ever wondered, “How do you clean portobello mushrooms?” read on! You’ll learn everything you need to know using my beginner-friendly tips.

portobello mushrooms caps from the top view with text on the image

Wipe Clean Mushrooms or Give Them a Quick Wash:

I’m sure you’ve heard many sources say that washing mushrooms isn’t a good idea. However, folks over at Cooks Illustrated tested this myth. They concluded that it’s entirely safe to wash mushrooms under two conditions:

  1. If they’re whole mushrooms, meaning that they’re not cut or sliced
  2. You can wash them right before cooking

In short, washing portobello mushrooms under cold running water for 10-20 seconds is okay. In fact, it’s one of the great ways to clean them!

Quickly rinsing your mushrooms under cold water is the best way to clean them if you have many small, round mushrooms to prepare (i.e., smaller mushrooms, like portobellos’ close cousin, cremini mushrooms, or button mushrooms). However, if you’re using the large mushroom caps as I do here, you can also use a moist sponge to clean them one by one. 

person washing mushrooms with a mushroom sponge

To hand-wash your mushrooms, fill a cup with water, soak a clean sponge in the liquid, and squeeze out as much water as you can. Then, gently wipe the mushroom caps. Be sure to get the underside of the caps and the stems until no dirt or debris remains.

Since I’m always buying mushrooms at our grocery store (seriously, there are so many delicious mushroom recipes to try!), I have a cheap sponge that I use just for cleaning different kinds of mushrooms. However, if you don’t have a sponge on hand, you can also use a damp paper towel, mushroom cleaning brush (affiliate link), or a damp cloth to clean portobello mushrooms.

Remove Gills

Next, turn the portobello mushroom over. Holding the mushroom in the palm of your hand, use a paring knife to slice off the inner edges while slowly rotating the mushroom. This paring will expose the gills located on the underside of the mushroom.

Then, using a dessert spoon, gently scrape the gills away. Be careful not to go too deep into the mushroom’s flesh during this step. Continue working around the mushroom until you remove all of the gills.

person showing the steps to remove the gills of a portobello mushroom

While the gills of a portobello mushroom are edible, most people prefer removing them. This preference might be because the mushrooms’ dark brown gills often transfer their muddy color to your dish and give it an unappetizing look.

Others also claim that dark gills have a bitter taste. However, during my recipe testing, I didn’t experience any changes in taste when I cooked portobello mushrooms with or without the gills. 

I choose to remove the gills to eliminate any dirt or debris hidden underneath them. However, as long as you thoroughly clean the underside of the mushrooms, you can skip removing their gills.

Some sources also recommend peeling the top skin of the portobello mushrooms to expose the white flesh. Still, I think this is an unnecessary step. Wiping off the surface of the mushroom cleans them sufficiently.

Remove or Trim the Stems:

I recommend removing the portobello mushroom stems, as they have a tough texture and a woody flavor. 

person removing the stem of a large mushroom cap by hand and with a knife

To remove the stem, use your fingers to grip it from the bottom of the mushroom, twist it, and pop it right out. Alternatively, you can also trim the stem using a sharp knife.
You may choose to discard the stems or do what I do: save and use portobello stems to make my weekly vegetable or chicken stock.

Slice or Use as a Whole

Depending on your recipe, you can prepare portobello mushrooms using the whole cap or slice them into long thin strips. 

If you are using these great-tasting mushrooms in a recipe, I suggest placing the mushroom cap on a cutting board and slicing it into ¼ inch-thick slices.

photos showing cleaned whole and sliced portobello mushrooms

According to this Mushrooms 101 article on Cook’s Illustrated, the best way to store portobello mushrooms is to place them in a partially open plastic bag, such as a Ziploc bag. It’s essential to leave the bag partly open to maximize air circulation and allow the ethylene gas emitted from the mushrooms to release. 

Additionally, you can also store fresh mushrooms in their original packaging. Those containers are designed to breathe, which helps release ethylene gas and balance the amount of moisture in the mushrooms.

If you’ve heard that storing portobello mushrooms in a brown paper bag is a good option, I don’t recommend it. According to the abovementioned Cook’s Illustrated article, paper bags “turn the fungi spongy and wrinkly.”

Roasted portobello mushrooms on a plate garnished with rosemary

FAQs

Should I peel portobello mushrooms?

Some people like to peel the top skin of the portobello mushroom to expose the white flesh underneath. However, you don’t need to peel portobello mushrooms unless you’re trying to remove a part of the skin that’s either damaged or bruised.

Can you eat the stems of portobello mushrooms?

The stems of portobello mushrooms are technically edible. However, they have a tough texture and a woody, bland flavor, so it’s best to remove them. You can discard these small pieces or, better yet, use them to make vegetable broth or chicken stock.

Can you eat portobello gills?

Yes, the dark gills of portobello mushrooms are edible. However, most chefs remove them as they darken the color of the dish they are using them in.

Why remove gills from portobello mushrooms?

Most people remove the mushroom gills during the cleaning process because dirt or sand may hide in the gill structure. It’s also possible that those dark gills may give your dish a dark color and unappetizing look once cooked.

How to wash sliced mushrooms?

When buying mushrooms, it’s best to buy them whole and wash and slice them yourself. However, if sliced mushrooms are your only option, then you can place them in a salad spinner, rinse them under cold water for 10-20 seconds, and then spin to dry.

Do you wash packaged sliced mushrooms?

Nowadays, most packaged sliced mushrooms at grocery stores are prewashed. However, you can put them in a colander and rinse them under cool water if you want.

You Might Also Like:

If you try this method, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person wiping portobello mushrooms with a sponge
Print

How To Clean Portobello Mushrooms

Learn how to clean portobello mushrooms to prepare them for cooking in recipes. Whether you roast, grill, or sautee them, these steps will help you make the most delicious portobello mushroom recipes.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 portions
Calories 18kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 portobello mushroom caps or more

Instructions

Wipe Clean Mushrooms or Give Them a Quick Wash:

  • When it comes to cleaning mushrooms you can do one of two things. First, place them in a colander, rinse under cold water for 30 seconds, and pat dry them with paper towels.
  • Second, fill a small bowl with water, soak a clean sponge (or a kitchen towel), and squeeze out as much water as you can. Then, gently wipe the mushroom caps. Be sure to get the underside of the caps and the stems until no dirt or debris remains.

Remove gills:

  • Turn the portobello mushroom over. Holding the mushroom in the palm of your hand, use a paring knife to slice off the inner edges while slowly rotating the mushroom. This paring will expose the gills located on the underside of the mushroom.
  • Then, using a dessert spoon, gently scrape the gills away. Be careful not to go too deep into the mushroom’s flesh during this step. Continue working around the mushroom until you remove all of the gills.

Remove or Trim the Stems:

  • To remove the stem, use your fingers to grip it from the bottom of the mushroom, twist it, and pop it right out. Alternatively, you can also trim the stem using a sharp knife.

Slice or Use as A Whole

  • Depending on your recipe, you can prepare portobello mushrooms using the whole cap or slice them into long thin strips.

Video

Notes

The best way to store portobello mushrooms is to place them in a partially open plastic bag, such as a Ziploc bag. It’s essential to leave the bag partly open to maximize air circulation and allow the ethylene gas emitted from the mushrooms to release. 
Additionally, you can also store fresh mushrooms in their original packaging. Those containers are designed to breathe, which helps release ethylene gas and balance the amount of moisture in the mushrooms.
If you’ve heard that storing portobello mushrooms in a brown paper bag is a good option, I don’t recommend it. According to Cook’s Illustrated, paper bags “turn the fungi spongy and wrinkly.”

Nutrition

Calories: 18kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Sodium: 8mg | Potassium: 306mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Clean Portobello Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-portobello-mushrooms/feed/ 2
How to Clean Shiitake Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-shiitake-mushrooms/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-shiitake-mushrooms/#comments Wed, 16 Mar 2022 08:29:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49135 The best chefs know that shiitake mushrooms are magic in the kitchen. Rich in umami flavor, this type of mushroom is a great addition to Asian cuisines. Plus, it can transform any bland recipe into a rave-worthy masterpiece. Shiitakes are also a sought-after ingredient in both vegetarian and non-vegetarian cooking, thanks to their meaty texture. I’m a huge fan of roasting shiitake mushrooms and adding them to soups (like this...

The post How to Clean Shiitake Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

The best chefs know that shiitake mushrooms are magic in the kitchen. Rich in umami flavor, this type of mushroom is a great addition to Asian cuisines. Plus, it can transform any bland recipe into a rave-worthy masterpiece. Shiitakes are also a sought-after ingredient in both vegetarian and non-vegetarian cooking, thanks to their meaty texture.

I’m a huge fan of roasting shiitake mushrooms and adding them to soups (like this Shiitake Mushroom Soup recipe) and salads as a topping, but there are tons of ways to use them. Whenever I develop a recipe for a vegetarian meal, I think of mushrooms as key ingredients. If you feel the same way, I know you’ll find today’s subject—cleaning shiitake mushrooms—helpful.

Fresh Shiitake mushrooms with text on the image

How To Wash?

I’ve always thought that washing shiitake mushrooms (or any kind of mushroom, for that matter) isn’t a good idea. In the past, I’ve heard many say that, when washed, mushrooms absorb additional moisture that leads to loss of flavor and longer cooking time.

However, I recently found out from this article on Cook’s Illustrated that rinsing mushrooms is actually okay. These pro chefs tested the myth by rinsing a batch of mushrooms and weighing them before and after. In the end, the weight difference was so minuscule that the chefs concluded that it’s okay to give mushrooms a quick rinse before use.

Now that we know it’s okay to wash mushrooms, let’s talk about how.

Person showing how to clean shiitake mushrooms by hand and by using a salad spinner

Wash One By One By Hand

While I think this method takes the longest, you can wipe each shiitake mushroom one by one using a damp paper towel.

To do so, wet a sheet of paper towel (a clean kitchen sponge or mushroom brush would also work) and gently wipe each mushroom cap. Make sure you turn it around and clean the back, too. While wiping, remove any visible dirt or debris hiding under or around the gills.

Furthermore, there’s no reason to clean the stems.

Using A Salad Spinner or A Colander

Because you can wash and dry many mushrooms simultaneously, using a salad spinner is the best way to clean mushrooms. Plus, it only takes minutes!

For this method, place your shiitake mushrooms in the salad spinner insert and rinse them under cold water for 30-45 seconds. While rinsing, gently move the mushrooms around with your hands to help remove any dirt or debris. Spin dry immediately to eliminate as much liquid as possible.

If you don’t have a salad spinner, you can use a colander. Simply give your shiitake mushrooms a quick rinse, wipe each one with a sheet of dry paper towel, and let them air dry.

Trim the Stems and Slice

It’s a popular myth that shiitake mushroom stems are poisonous and, as a result, inedible. However, this isn’t the case. In actuality, the stems of shiitake mushrooms are technically edible and are not poisonous. Still, most people choose not to use the stems because they have an unpleasant woodsy flavor and are too fibrous and chewy to eat.

person showing how to remove the stem of a shiitake mushroom

To trim the stems, you can do one of the following:

  1. Turn the shiitake mushroom over, exposing both the gills and the stem. Then, gently pull the stem right where it meets the cap. It should snip right off.
  2. Use a paring knife and cut the stem off from the bottom of the gill.

Pro Tip: Don’t throw away the shiitake stems. Instead, save them to use later when making vegetable or chicken stock. These small pieces will enhance the flavor of broth-based soups by providing an umami-rich flavor.

How to cut shiitake mushrooms?

You can cook or roast shiitake mushroom caps as a whole or slice them thinly to use in your recipes. If you prefer to cut them, you can do one of the following:

person showing how to slice shiitake mushrooms
  • Slice them one by one: Place the cap on a cutting board with the mushroom gills facing down. Then, cut it into thin slices.
  • Stack them up: Place three to four mushroom caps on top of one another and slice them simultaneously.

How to Store Shiitake Mushrooms?

In this Complete Guide To Fresh Mushrooms article, the folks over Cook’s Illustrated say that “Maximizing the shelf life of mushrooms is all about balancing air circulation with moisture retention.” In other words, regardless of how you store them, fresh shiitake mushrooms must have a bit of breathing room. 

  • If you buy loose shiitake mushrooms: Place the mushrooms in a plastic bag, but don’t seal it tightly. Instead, leave the bag slightly open so that air can circulate.
  • If you buy packaged shiitakes: Store the mushrooms in their original containers, as those are specifically designed to balance moisture retention and ethylene gas release. If you end up not using every mushroom, rewrap the container but poke a few holes to help air circulation. Source

Contrary to popular belief, storing mushrooms in a paper bag or wrapping them up with a damp paper towel is not a good idea. These methods will speed up your mushrooms’ deterioration.

How to Cook?

There are several ways of cooking shiitake mushrooms, but a few of my favorites methods are:

roasted shiitake mushroom recipe as an example for shiitake mushroom recipes
  • Roasting them as a whole in the oven: Simply arrange fresh shiitakes on a baking sheet in a single layer, drizzle them with olive oil, and top them with salt and pepper. Then, bake the caps for a perfectly crisp and easy side dish. If you need an exact recipe, be sure to check out my guide for How To Roast Shiitake Mushrooms.
  • Sauteed Shiitake Mushrooms: Pan-frying shiitake mushrooms with a bit of vegetable oil is also an excellent way to cook them. You can easily enhance their meaty flavor by incorporating other ingredients, too. For an extra Asian flair, saute them with a little bit of sesame oil and soy sauce. Or, for a Mediterranean vibe, saute them in butter and use them to make Shiitake Mushroom pizza.

FAQs

What are shiitake mushrooms?

Also known as the Chinese black mushroom, Golden Oak Mushroom, and Lentinus edodes (its scientific name), shiitake mushrooms originate from the mountainous regions of East Asia, where it grows on fallen logs. It has been cultivated for over 1200 years and used for both medicinal and culinary purposes. Today, it’s commercially grown in China, Japan, the United States, and Brazil, with China leading production.

What do shiitake mushrooms taste like?

Unlike some of their fresh counterparts, like white button mushrooms and oyster mushrooms, shiitake mushrooms offer a nuttier, buttery taste and a chewier texture.

What do shiitake mushrooms look like?

Shiitakes have large caps, measuring 2-4 inches wide. They also vary in color, ranging from light to dark brown, and have long, skinny, woody stems.

Do you need to wash shiitake mushrooms?

I recommend rinsing them under cold water for 30-45 seconds in a colander. You can also wipe them with a damp, clean cloth.

Is shiitake mushroom stems edible?

Yes, shiitake stems are technically edible. However, they have a fibrous and woody texture, making them less than ideal for recipes. Instead, I recommend using them while making meat-based or vegetable stock.

If you enjoyed or try my method of cleaning shiitake mushrooms, please take a minute to rate the below recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person showing how to clean shiitake mushrooms
Print

How To Clean Shiitake Mushrooms

Learn how to clean shiitake mushrooms to use them in recipes. Once you know how to prepare them for cooking, it is a breeze to put this umami-rich fungi to use.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 lb
Calories 154kcal

Equipment

  • 1 kitchen sponge or paper towels
  • 1 salad spinner or colander

Ingredients

  • 1 lb shiitake mushrooms or more or less depending on your recipe

Instructions

To wash shiitake mushrooms you can follow one of the two following methods:

  • Wash one by one: To do so, wet a sheet of paper towel (a clean kitchen sponge) and gently wipe each mushroom cap. Make sure you turn it around and clean the back, too. While wiping, remove any visible dirt or debris hiding under or around the gills.
  • Using A Salad Spinner or A Colander (The easier & quicker method): For this method, place your shiitake mushrooms in the salad spinner* insert and rinse them under cold water for 30-45 seconds. While rinsing, gently move the mushrooms around with your hands to help remove any dirt or debris. Spin dry immediately to eliminate as much liquid as possible.
  • To trim the stems: Turn the shiitake mushroom over, exposing both the gills and the stem. Then, gently pull the stem right where it meets the cap. It should snip right off. Or, Use a paring knife and cut the stem* off from the bottom of the gill.
  • To slice them, you can place the cap on a cutting board with the mushroom gills facing down. Then, cut it into thin slices. Or, you can stack them up and slice them simultaneously.

Notes

  • If you don’t have a salad spinner, you can use a colander. Simply give your shiitake mushrooms a quick rinse, wipe each one with a sheet of dry paper towel, and let them air dry.
  • Don’t throw away the shiitake stems. Instead, save them to use later when making vegetable or chicken stock. These small pieces will enhance the flavor of broth-based soups by providing an umami-rich flavor.
  • To store: If you buy packaged shiitakes, store the mushrooms in their original containers, as those are specifically designed to balance moisture retention and ethylene gas release. If you end up not using every mushroom, rewrap the container but poke a few holes to help air circulation.
    If you bought loose shiitakes (not-packaged), place the mushrooms in a plastic bag, but don’t seal it tightly. Instead, leave the bag slightly open so that air can circulate.

Nutrition

Calories: 154kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 2g | Sodium: 41mg | Potassium: 1379mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 11g | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How to Clean Shiitake Mushrooms appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-clean-shiitake-mushrooms/feed/ 5
How To Store Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-asparagus/#comments Fri, 25 Feb 2022 14:06:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48730 It is no secret that we love asparagus around here. Over the years of blogging, I shared many asparagus recipes, some of which became reader favorites as well. As soon as the asparagus season starts in early April, my Asparagus Salad, Puff Pastry Asparagus Tart, and Mushroom and Asparagus recipes get a lot of love from people around the world. In today’s post, we are going back to basics. I...

The post How To Store Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

It is no secret that we love asparagus around here. Over the years of blogging, I shared many asparagus recipes, some of which became reader favorites as well. As soon as the asparagus season starts in early April, my Asparagus Salad, Puff Pastry Asparagus Tart, and Mushroom and Asparagus recipes get a lot of love from people around the world.

In today’s post, we are going back to basics. I am showing you how to keep asparagus fresh in the fridge so that you can get the most out of this delicious vegetable.

two jars filled with water and asparagus with text saying how to store and keep asparagus fresh

How to shop for asparagus?

During asparagus season, most grocery stores sell asparagus spears in a bin with a bit of water at the bottom, wrapped with a rubber band around the bunch. 

Fresh asparagus has a shelf life of 3-5 days so it is best to take a minute to examine each to find the freshest bunch before you grab yours from the lineup. Make sure:

  • The spears are straight and plump with a firm stem and vibrant green color.
  • The decorative tips, aka asparagus crowns, are sharp and snappy.
  • There are no signs of wilting or black spots.
  • The ends of the asparagus are moist and tender (not dry and split).
  • The bottom of the stalks are crisp and fresh.

How to store fresh asparagus?

Method 1: Short Term Storage – 1-2 days

If you are planning to use it right away, the best way to keep asparagus fresh is by wrapping the bunch with a few sheets of damp paper towel and placing it in a breathable plastic bag. Store it in the vegetable or crisper drawer of your fridge as soon as you come back from the grocery store.

asparagus wrapped in wet paper towel and stored in a plastic bag

Feel free to keep the rubber band around it so the spears stay intact.

Method 2: Long-Term Storage of Asparagus – upto 5 days

If you want to keep them fresh for longer, keep the spears in a glass with some water. To do so follow the below step by step guide:

Photos showing how to store asparagus to keep it fresh in the fridge
  1. With the rubber band still holding the bunch together, trim an inch off the ends of the asparagus stalks using a sharp knife.
  2. Place an inch of water in the bottom of a deep mason jar or a drinking glass. Remove the rubber band and place the asparagus spears upright (with cut ends at the bottom) in the glass.
  3. Tent it with a clean plastic bag and use the rubber band to loosely secure it, making sure that the spears have enough room for air circulation.
  4. Place it in the refrigerator for up to 5 days, making sure to change out the water if it starts to look cloudy.

Expert Storage Tips:

  • Avoid the top shelf in the fridge: When storing fresh asparagus in the refrigerator, avoid placing it on the top shelf as some (older) fridges may freeze water. This may freeze the vegetable as well.
  • Keep an eye on the water after 3 days: If it looks cloudy, be sure to change it. While doing so, examine the spears to make sure they are still in good condition and the asparagus does not have an acrid smell.
  • Do your best not to overcrowd the glass jar: If you have a big bunch of asparagus (or multiple bunches), store them in separate jars/glasses.
  • These storage tips work for all types of asparagus: This includes white asparagus, purple asparagus, thin and thicker spears.
person holding two bunches of asparagus in her hand

How To Store Cooked Asparagus?

We’ve talked quite a bit about storing uncooked raw asparagus, but what about storing cooked asparagus?

Depending on the way you cook asparagus, you can store cooked asparagus in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.

If you need a refresher on cooking asparagus and some recipe inspiration, below are a few of my favorite ways:

FAQs

Does asparagus need to be refrigerated?

Yes, it does. Otherwise, it will get moldy and lose its freshness quickly.

How long does asparagus last in the fridge?

Asparagus will keep fresh for up to 5 days if you store fresh trimmed asparagus in a jar filled with an inch of cold water loosely covered with plastic.

Do I need to wash asparagus before storing in the refrigerator?

No, it is best to wash it right before using it in your recipe.

Can you store asparagus in the freezer?

Yes, but it is best to blanch asparagus first rather than freezing it while it is still fresh.

Fresh asparagus placed in glasses filled with water
Print

How To Store Fresh Asparagus

Learn how to store asparagus in the fridge to keep it fresh longer with my foolproof tips.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 bunch
Calories 91kcal

Equipment

  • Glass Jars
  • Plastic bags
  • Rubber Band optional

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch fresh asparagus
  • cold water

Instructions

For short-term (1-2 days) storage:

  • Wrapping the bunch with a few sheets of damp paper towel and place in a plastic bag. Leave it open so that air can circulate through it.
  • Store it in the vegetable or crisper drawer of your fridge as soon as you come back from the grocery store.
  • Feel free to keep the rubber band around it so the spears stay intact.

For long term (up to 5 days) storage:

  • With the rubber band still holding the bunch together, trim an inch off the ends of the asparagus stalks using a sharp knife.
  • Place an inch of water at the bottom of a deep mason jar or a drinking glass. Remove the rubber band and place the asparagus spears upright (with cut ends at the bottom) in the glass.
  • Tent it with a clean plastic bag and use the rubber band to loosely secure it, making sure that the spears have enough room for air circulation.
  • Place it in the refrigerator for up to 5 days, making sure to change out the water if it starts to look cloudy.

Notes

  • These storage tips work for all types of asparagus: This includes white asparagus, purple asparagus, thin and thicker spears.
  • Avoid the top shelf in the fridge: When storing fresh asparagus in the refrigerator, avoid placing it on the top shelf as some (older) fridges may freeze water. This may freeze the vegetable as well.

Nutrition

Calories: 91kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 916mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 3429IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 109mg | Iron: 10mg

The post How To Store Asparagus appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-store-asparagus/feed/ 4
How To Cook Turkey Bacon In The Oven https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-turkey-bacon-in-the-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-turkey-bacon-in-the-oven/#comments Fri, 18 Feb 2022 22:47:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48600 Why is this the Best Technique? This turkey bacon oven recipe is a godsend for home chefs searching for simple meal solutions. Who wouldn’t want to learn how to bake turkey bacon in the oven like a pro? Get crispy, evenly cooked turkey bacon in less than 15 minutes with this super simple, mess-free recipe. Say goodbye to bacon grease splatters and waiting by the stove with this effortless method....

The post How To Cook Turkey Bacon In The Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Why is this the Best Technique?

This turkey bacon oven recipe is a godsend for home chefs searching for simple meal solutions. Who wouldn’t want to learn how to bake turkey bacon in the oven like a pro?

  • Get crispy, evenly cooked turkey bacon in less than 15 minutes with this super simple, mess-free recipe.
  • Say goodbye to bacon grease splatters and waiting by the stove with this effortless method. Hands-off and easy to clean, this oven-baked turkey bacon recipe is a cinch to prepare compared to stove-top bacon.
Person serving crispy turkey bacon in a plate

Ingredients – The Best Turkey for Baking in the Oven

When making oven-baked turkey bacon, you’ll need one package (12 oz.) of—you guessed it!—turkey bacon. I prefer uncured bacon because it uses natural ingredients instead of harsh chemical compounds as preservatives. When cooking uncured turkey bacon, my go-to brands are Trader Joe’s, Applegate Naturals, and Wellshire (made with turkey thighs).

three different supermarket turkey bacon placed on the kitchen counter

Though I use uncured meat, this baked turkey bacon recipe will also work with cured and smoked turkey bacon. Different brands of turkey bacon, like Turkey Rashers, Oscar Meyer Turkey Bacon, and Butterball Turkey Bacon, can also be used.

How To Make it?

We can all agree that the best way to cook turkey bacon is easy and delicious. Out of all the ways to cook turkey bacon, my method will get you mess-free, crispy strips every time. 

turkey bacon oven directions shown in four photos with how to text on the image
  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  2. Prepare the baking sheet: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and place a wire rack on top of the prepared baking sheet.
  3. Position the turkey bacon: Line the raw turkey bacon on the wire rack in a single layer. Make sure no strips overlap one another. 
  4. Bake: Place strips of turkey bacon in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. After 10 minutes, flip the bacon strips over one by one, and bake them for another 5 minutes.

What if I Don’t Own a Wire Rack?

If you don’t have a baking rack, bake your turkey bacon on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Then, cook the strips according to the above-listed turkey bacon oven directions: 10 minutes of baking followed by a quick flip and an additional 5 minutes in the oven.

To bake turkey bacon crispy without a wire rack, flip the strips one more time after their first 15 minutes in the oven and bake them for 2 additional minutes. 

How to Make Turkey Bacon Crispy in the Oven?

Every chef dreams of making the perfect bacon in the oven. With these simple tips, now you can! Never settle for chewy turkey bacon strips with these ingenious tips.

  • Dry the turkey bacon strips: When you first remove the turkey bacon from its packaging it might be a little wet. Pat dry it on both sides using a sheet of paper towel to remove extra moisture before putting it in the oven.
  • Use a wire rack: Cooking your turkey bacon on a wire rack allows your oven’s hot air to circulate both sides of the strips throughout the baking process. Not only does this circulation help cook your turkey bacon evenly, but it also helps remove any liquid released during the baking process.
  • Flip your turkey bacon: Remember to flip your turkey bacon slices at least once during the cooking process. This movement will help evaporate any extra juices released by the strips.
  • Watch for visual cues: Not every oven is the same, so it’s essential to keep an eye on your turkey bacon to achieve the right ​​level of crispiness. Bubbles and dripping liquid are a good sign because they indicate that the turkey bacon is getting rid of excess liquid and crisping up.
  • Broil your turkey bacon: If you choose to broil turkey bacon at the end of the baking process, cook it for no longer than 1 minute and be sure to keep an eye on it. Though broiling is an easy way to make your bacon extra-crisp, too much may lead to burning.
baked crispy turkey bacon on a wire rack

How to Store

Warm, crispy, and irresistible, the perfect turkey bacon is best on the day it’s baked. However, leftover bacon will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Just let it reach room temperature before storing.

Expert Tips

Cooking turkey bacon in the oven doesn’t need to be a hassle. With these simple methods, you’ll be baking turkey bacon like a pro, whether you’re a beginner chef or just a bacon-lover.

  • Don’t overlap: Make sure your turkey bacon strips don’t overlap when you line them on your wire rack. Layered turkey bacon won’t get crispy. Therefore, if you want to make more than one package’s worth of strips, I recommend cooking them in batches.
  • Add extra flavor: A great way to add bold, spiced flavor is to sprinkle your cooked bacon strips with freshly ground black pepper. (If you’re a pepper freak, this tip is for you!)
  • Cook in a toaster oven: If you want to make turkey bacon in a toaster oven, make sure you don’t overcrowd your strips. Baking your turkey bacon in batches will help clear space for proper cooking.
  • Line your baking sheet: Line your sheet pan with aluminum foil or parchment paper before cooking your turkey bacon for super easy cleanup. Even if you use a wire rack, I recommend lining the sheet pan underneath.

Recipes You Can Use Oven-Baked Turkey Bacon

Turkey bacon recipes are versatile, flavorful, and positively mouthwatering. Top your favorite meals with turkey bacon or eat it by itself. However you serve them, these great recipes are sure to please!

  • As a topping for soups: Nothing adds more scrumptious, savory depth to a bowl of soup than crisp turkey bacon. Just chop up your oven baked turkey bacon into bite-sized crumbles and add them to your bowl.
  • As a topping for salads: Want to add a delectable crunch to your five-star salad? Turkey bacon is the way to go! Add delicious turkey bacon crumbles to any salad recipe—like my Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad—and you’ll want to lick your bowl clean.
  • With eggs for breakfast: No breakfast is complete without a few slices of turkey bacon. Start your day off right with this rich, protein-packed addition.

FAQs

Whether you want to know whether you can cook turkey bacon in the oven or how to cook turkey bacon healthy, this collection of most-asked questions is just for you!

Is turkey bacon healthy?

Though it’s delicious, turkey bacon is processed meat that often contains chemical preservatives and lots of sodium. Similar to traditional bacon turkey bacon isn’t the most nutritious food option. Still, it has a lower fat content and fewer calories than regular pork bacon, making it a healthier option.

How long to cook turkey bacon in the oven?

Depending on the temperature, your turkey bacon cook time will vary. Generally, turkey bacon will need 15-17 minutes in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit and about 20 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

What temperature to cook turkey bacon in the oven?

I suggest cooking your turkey bacon at 400 degrees F to ensure maximum crispiness. However, you can also cook it at 350 degrees Fahrenheit if you prefer a lower temperature.

How long to bake turkey bacon at 400?

Prefer to cook your turkey bacon at high heat? Your turkey bacon will need to cook for 15-17 minutes in a 400-degree oven. You’ll also need to flip your strips after the first 10 minutes of baking.

How long to bake turkey at 350?

Want to bake your turkey bacon at a lower temperature? No problem! You’ll need to cook your bacon for about 20 minutes at 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Remember to flip your strips after the first 15 minutes.

How to know when turkey bacon is done?

To know if turkey bacon is cooked, check its color. Though cooking times may vary, cooked turkey bacon should be a crispy, rich brown. When you remove your turkey bacon from the oven, you should not see any pink or translucent meat.

If you try this Baked Turkey Bacon recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cooked turkey bacon on a plate
Print

How To Cook Turkey Bacon In The Oven Recipe

Learn how to bake turkey bacon in the oven with these easy steps. To me, this is the best way of cooking turkey bacon and it produces the crispiest turkey bacon in the end.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 17 minutes
Servings 8 Bacon Strips
Calories 53kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 package Uncured Turkey Bacon (8 ounces)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Line turkey bacon slices on the wire rack making sure not to overlap.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Remove from oven, flip them and bake for another 5 minutes.

Notes

  • What if I don’t have a wire rack? If you do not have a wire rack, cook them on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper following the same procedure: Bake for 10 minutes and then flip and bake for another 5 minutes. At the end of the second 5 minutes, flip the bacon one more time and bake for 2 more minutes. Flipping them twice delivers the crispiest turkey bacon.
  • The calorie information listed is for one strip of turkey bacon.
  • It is best to serve baked turkey bacon on the day that it is cooked. However, it can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 53kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 320mg | Potassium: 55mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Cook Turkey Bacon In The Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-turkey-bacon-in-the-oven/feed/ 2
Roasted Chestnuts On An Open Fire https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/#respond Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:31:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47225 If you have the classic Christmas song of Nat King Cole in your mind as you read these words, you are not alone. For us, it is a family tradition and a favorite pastime to roast chestnuts on an open fire during the holidays. I think between the delicious smell of roasting chestnuts, the sound of the crackling fire, and the time of year, there is something so magical about...

The post Roasted Chestnuts On An Open Fire appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

If you have the classic Christmas song of Nat King Cole in your mind as you read these words, you are not alone. For us, it is a family tradition and a favorite pastime to roast chestnuts on an open fire during the holidays. I think between the delicious smell of roasting chestnuts, the sound of the crackling fire, and the time of year, there is something so magical about it.

During the colder months, as soon as chestnuts hit the stores, I buy some. If I am short on time, I roast them in the oven or if I am planning to use them in recipes, I boil them in water. But, if I want to have fun with my family and friends, we roast them on an open fire, grill, or fireplace, especially during the holiday season.

cooking chestnuts on an open fire in a cast iron skillet

If you are new to cooking chestnuts, be sure to check out my recipes on Oven Roasted Chestnuts and Boiled Chestnuts as well.

Tools You Will Need

You can roast chestnuts on a grill, a hot bed of coal, or in the fireplace. I find that the easiest way to roast chestnuts is to use a charcoal grill (secured with a grill grate) or a gas grill using a chestnut roasting pan (affiliate link) or a cast-iron skillet. 

If you are roasting them in the fireplace, you might want to invest in a chestnut roaster (affiliate link) to make it safer and easier to roast.

I use a cast iron skillet as I already have one but if you are serious about it, it is a good idea to invest in these tools.

While a paring knife or a sharp serrated knife works, you can also invest in a chestnut knife to make the scoring easier and safer.

Ingredients

In terms of ingredients, you will need chestnuts and water. Water is pretty straightforward but there are a few things to pay attention to when buying chestnuts for roasting bbq style.

You can find fresh chestnuts in grocery stores and farmers’ markets during the late fall and winter months.

  • What type of chestnuts should I buy? If you can get your hands on them, buy American chestnuts or Italian chestnuts. I find peeling these to be easier than Chinese chestnuts.
  • What should I pay attention to when buying chestnuts? If you can, pick chestnuts one by one, making sure that they are free of blemishes and roughly the same size (to ensure even roasting). They should be moist but not wet. Examine them to make sure there is no mold.

How To Prepare Them For Roasting?

Chestnuts being scored and soaked in water
  1. Score an X: This is a crucial step and should not be skipped. To do so, place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. Secure it in between your index finger and thumb. Score the round side of the chestnut horizontally creating a ½ to 1-inch cut (depending on its size), making sure to cut through the skin and the fuzzy inner skin without going too deep into the chestnut meat. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another slit creating an X.
  2. Soak: Similar to my oven roasted chestnuts method, I think soaking them for an hour or so helps with peeling after they are roasted. However, if you are short on time you can skip soaking and directly start roasting. When ready, drain and set them aside. No need to dry.

Step By Step Instructions:

Now that they are scored and soaked, it is time to light the fire and get roasting. To do so:

Fire roasted chestnuts close up
  1. Light the fire: Prepare a charcoal grill or an open fire pit. When the briquettes are ready, distribute them evenly to create a flat bed that the cast iron skillet can rest on. If you have a grill grate, place it on top. Carefully place the cast iron skillet on the hot coals (or grate) and let it warm for 5-10 minutes.
  2. Place chestnuts flat side down in the now-hot cast iron skillet in a single layer: Depending on the type of chestnuts, they should start opening up as soon as they hit the pan. Be patient as the chestnuts roast and wait for them to fully burst open. Make sure to watch closely, as chestnuts can burn easily.
  3. It takes about 10-12 minutes for them to roast BUT: This is a big but because the time for cooking chestnuts on a fire depends on their age, size, and type. Some may take shorter while others may take longer. It is a good idea to (carefully) move them around during the roasting process.
  4. Additionally, if you are using a chestnut roasting pan, the roasting time might be shorter. Follow the tips below to check on doneness to prevent burning.

How To Tell If My Chestnuts Are Fully Cooked?

To check doneness, you can do two things: 

roasted chestnut being held by a person
  1. Make sure they burst open, ideally showing the yellow flesh.
  2. Test one (being careful to not burn your fingers) by peeling the outer shell. If it is soft and buttery with a nice chewy bite, you are good to go. If it is still hard, put it back in the skillet and continue to roast for a few extra minutes.

How To Peel?

This is the million-dollar question, isn’t it? Ideally, each chestnut will nicely open up and be super easy to peel. If that is the case, simply pull back on the scored X and peel away the papery outer skin and the inner fuzzy skin and enjoy right away. 

However, if they are not fully opened and peeling is hard, let them steam for a few minutes. To do so:

person holding roasted nuts in a kitchen towel in his hands
  1. Steam: When they are fully roasted, carefully remove the cast iron skillet from the grill and transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a tea towel. Collect the edges of the towel in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5-10 minutes. Brown paper bags can also be used instead of a kitchen towel.
  2. Cool & Peel: Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter (or onto a baking sheet) and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts while they are still hot by gently peeling on the scored “X”, removing the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside.
    If you are unable to remove the inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
  3. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.

Finally, be patient when peeling chestnuts. It is normal that some will break and some will be hard to peel. It is all a part of having a good time by the fire and enjoying the process.

How To Serve Fire Roasted Chestnuts? Seasoning Ideas:

  1. Serve them on their own: This is probably the most popular way of enjoying chestnuts. 
  2. Butter, Cinnamon and Sugar Drizzle: Heat 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter in the cast iron skillet until melted. Off the heat, mix in ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon and a tablespoon coconut sugar (or brown sugar or maple syrup) into the melted butter. Either dip or drizzle roasted chestnuts with the mixture.
  3. Rosemary & Butter: If you’d rather go the savory route, you can heat some butter in the cast iron skillet, add in a teaspoon of chopped fresh rosemary and season it well with sea salt and black pepper. Cook just until butter is melted and everything is mixed. Serve it on the side or place roasted peeled chestnuts on a plate and drizzle them all over with the mixture.
  4. Use them in a recipe: Make popular recipes like Creamy Chestnut Soup or Chestnut Stuffing.

Expert Tips:

  • Safety: It goes without saying, be careful around fire, especially if there are kids around. Cooking chestnuts on an open fire requires close supervision, so do not leave the site as they are roasting.
  • Do not skip on scoring: While it is a pain to have to score every single chestnut, if you skip doing so, you may end up with a scary explosion in your backyard. Unscored raw chestnuts might explode as they are roasting, so take the time to properly score each chestnut.
  • Be careful not to burn your fingers: It is expected that you will burn a little bit as a part of the roasted chestnut experience. I think we can all agree that it is a part of the fun, but be safe. Let it cool for a few minutes, especially when you are peeling chestnuts with your kids.
  • Single layer is the way to go: Do not crowd the pan. Each chesnut should touch the surface of the pan as it roasts. If need be, use tongs to turn them to ensure even roasting.
  • Can I do this on a fireplace? Yes, you can. However, I recommend investing in a chestnut roaster for fireplace roasting for safety and ease. Most roasters that are sold in the market can also be used for making popcorn so you can get a dual use out of your investment.
  • Buy more chestnuts than you need: If you need a pound of peeled chestnuts, I recommend buying a pound and a half. After you remove the shell peels and the bad ones, you will probably end up with a pound.
person holding a fire roasted chestnut in his hand

FAQs

How to store roasted chestnuts?

After they are fully cooled, store chestnuts in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

What is a chestnut roasting pan?

A chestnut pan is usually made of stainless steel. It has a number of holes in the bottom (similar to a grill basket) to allow for greater direct exposure over the fire. It also helps with even cooking.

How long does it take to roast chestnuts in an open fire?

The time of roasting depends on the size, age, and type of chestnuts. However, it usually takes about 10-12 minutes when roasted in an open fire in a cast-iron skillet.

You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe on roasting chestnuts on an open fire or any other chestnut recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

chestnuts roasted on an open fire over a hot bed of coals
Print

Chestnuts Roasting On An Open Fire Recipe

Learn how to roast chestnuts on an open fire and get all my tips on easy peeling. This is a perfect holiday activity to enjoy with family and friends.
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Soaking time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lbs chestnuts*

Instructions

  • Start by scoring chestnuts: Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. The rounded side, (aka the belly side) should be facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
  • Place scored chestnuts in a bowl, cover them with cold tap water and let them soak for an hour.
  • Prepare the charcoal grill or open fire pit. When the briquettes are ready, distribute them evenly to create a flat bed that the cast iron skillet can rest on. If you have a grill grate, place it on top. Carefully place the cast iron skillet on the hot coals (or grate) and let it warm for 5-10 minutes.
  • Add scored chestnuts to the cast iron skillet in a single later. If they don’t fit in one layer, you may have to do this in two batches.
  • Depending on the type of chestnuts you are using, they should open up as soon as they hit the pan.
  • Let them cook, stirring occasionally, for about 10-12 minutes*. There might be some smoke coming out and that is normal. You will know that they are cooked once the outer skin is fully opened up exposing the inner yellow nut. However, the best way to check doneness is to peel one and give it a taste. If it is soft and creamy it should be done.
  • If it is not fully roasted at the end 10-12 minutes, you can put a lid on it for a few minutes to trap the air inside. However, I highly recommend keeping a close eye on it and checking every few minutes.
  • When they are fully roasted and opened up nicely, let them cool for a few minutes and peel them right away.
  • If they are difficult to peel then let them steam for a few minutes. To do so, carefully remove the cast iron skillet from the grill and transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a tea towel. Collect the edges of the towel in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5-10 minutes. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.
  • Enjoy roasted chestnuts on their own or use it with your favorite herbs or seasoning.

Notes

  • I find that American and Italian chestnuts are better for roasting on an open fire. They are also easier compared to Chinese chestnuts. When shopping for chestnuts, do your best to pick ones that are similar in size for even roasting. 
  • The cooking time might change based on the age, size, and type of chestnuts. During my recipe testing with various different type of chestnuts, I learned that 10-12 minutes of roasting delivered perfectly roasted chestnuts, but for foolproof results follow my tips on how to check doneness.
  • How to roast chestnuts on a gas grill? If you are using a gas grill, preheat the grill at 450 degrees F. Follow the recipe as written by scoring and soaking chestnuts. Preheat the cast iron skillet as instructed as well. When cooking, you can put the lid on the gas grill but do not leave it unattended. Keep a very close eye on it and check it every 1-2 minutes.
  • As I mentioned in the recipe, I used a cast iron skillet. If you are using a chestnut roasting pan, the roasting time might be shorter. Follow my tips to check on doneness to prevent burning.
  • An important note on safety: It goes without saying, be careful around fire, especially if there are kids around. Cooking chestnuts on an open fire requires close supervision, so do not leave the site as they are roasting.
  • Do not skip on scoring: While it is a pain to have to score every single chestnut if you skip doing so, you may end up with a scary explosion in your backyard. Unscored raw chestnuts might explode as they are roasting, so take the time to properly score each chestnut.
  • Single layer is the way to go: Do not crowd the pan. Each chesnut should touch the surface of the pan as it roasts. If need be, use tongs to turn them to ensure even roasting.
  • Can I do this on a fireplace? Yes, you can. However, I recommend investing in a chestnut roaster for fireplace roasting for safety and ease. Most roasters that are sold in the market can also be used for making popcorn so you can get a dual-use out of your investment.
  • Storage: Leftover fire-roasted chestnuts can be stored in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Roasted Chestnuts On An Open Fire appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/feed/ 0
How to Roast Chestnuts in The Oven https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/#comments Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:28:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47197 It is no secret that roasted chestnuts are synonymous with the holiday season. But for me, growing up in Turkey,  starting from early October all the way through late December, roasting chestnuts in the oven and peeling and snacking on them in front of the TV was a favorite pastime. Today, we are going back to basics and discovering how to make roasted chestnuts in the oven using my mom’s...

The post How to Roast Chestnuts in The Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

It is no secret that roasted chestnuts are synonymous with the holiday season. But for me, growing up in Turkey,  starting from early October all the way through late December, roasting chestnuts in the oven and peeling and snacking on them in front of the TV was a favorite pastime.

Today, we are going back to basics and discovering how to make roasted chestnuts in the oven using my mom’s method. I think this is the easiest way to cook chestnuts.

Roasted chestnuts in a bowl from top view

However, this post is a sequel to my two other favorite methods – Boiled Chestnuts and Roasting Chestnuts in An Open Fire. So, if you want to branch out and try different methods to cook your own chestnuts, be sure to check them out as well.

Where to buy and what type of chestnuts are used for roasting?

You can find fresh chestnuts during the fall and winter months in your local grocery store and even in farmer’s markets.

Most US grocery stores carry either American chestnuts (most likely grown in Michigan), Chinese chestnuts, or European chestnuts (mainly from Italy). While they are not sold at markets, I think it is important to mention that horse chestnuts are not edible as they are toxic. (Source)

As I was working on this recipe, I was able to get my hands on Chinese and Italian chestnuts. I found that Italian chestnuts were easier to work with especially when it comes to peeling them after they were roasted. It was almost impossible to peel Chinese chestnuts and I had such a hard time getting them to open up even after the cooking time was completed.

Unfortunately, where I live (Atlanta, Georgia), American chestnuts are not widely available. But if you can get your hands on them, they will work just as well.

What to Look For When Buying Chestnuts

As it is with any 1-ingredient recipe, the quality of the ingredient determines the fate of the end product. It is imperative to know how to pick out good chestnuts for the most delicious and evenly roasted chestnuts. Below is what you should look for:

  1. If you can, I recommend hand picking chestnuts to ensure that they are equal in size. Since we are roasting them in the oven, chestnuts of even size will roast at the same rate.
  2. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and blemish and mold free. Feel it in between your fingers to make sure the skin is not dry.

How To Prepare Chestnuts for Roasting

Preparing chestnuts for cooking takes a bit of advance planning but I promise it is worth it. Simply:

person rinsing chestnuts in a colander
  1. Rinse: Wash chestnuts under cold water to get rid of any debris. 
Person scoring chestnuts on a cutting board from the top view
  1. Score: Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board with the rounded side (aka the belly side) facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have one. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X”. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
Chestnuts soaking in water
  1. Soak: Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover with cold tap water and let them sit for an hour. Do not skip the soaking as it plays a crucial role in easy peeling later on.

How to roast?

  1. Preheat the oven: My preferred temperature to roast chestnuts in the oven is 425 degrees F. So go ahead and preheat the oven. 
roasted chestnuts before and after on a sheet pan
  1. Roast chestnuts: Drain chestnuts and place them on a baking sheet pan in a single layer. Roast for 25-30 minutes keeping a close eye on them and turning a few times, if necessary. They should be fully roasted when the skins have pulled back/opened and the flesh inside has softened.

While I listed the roasting time as 25-30 minutes, I recommend that you keep an eye on the chestnuts after the 20-minute mark. In my experiments, some chestnuts were fully opened while the others were not, even after the full 30 minutes of roasting. So, it is a good idea to remove the ones that are fully opened and let the rest bake for a little longer, if necessary.

How To Peel Roasted Chestnuts?

Person placing chestnuts in a kitchen towel and letting them cool before peeling
  1. Let them steam: Remove from the oven and place the now-roasted chestnuts in a clean kitchen towel or cloth. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 10-15 minutes.
    Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it steam for 15 minutes.
  2. Gently crack: Being careful not to burn yourself, gently squeeze chestnuts using the kitchen cloth or the paper bag as a shield to help remove the skins. You should hear the crackling sound of the roasted skins as you do so. 
person peeling oven roasted chestnuts
  1. Peel: Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside. 

A Word on Easy Peeling

If you do a quick Google search on how to easily peel chestnuts, you will see a lot of headlines claiming to share the easiest method that will get you perfectly and easily peeled chestnuts.

During the course of three weeks, in preparation for this post, I have tried several of those “easy” peeling methods. I learned one thing and it is that the ease of peeling depends on the type of chestnut you use. Yes, the method of cooking is important and you want to make sure they are fully cooked, but be aware that not every chestnut is created equal. 

During my recipe testing, I found that Chinese chestnuts were very hard to peel, especially when it came to the inner skin (the fuzzy part), whereas Italian chestnuts were easier. However, even with the Italian chestnuts, there were some that broke as I was peeling.

It is also important to mention that the size and age of the chestnut play an important role when it comes to peeling. Based on all this, I think the rule of thumb when it comes to peeling is to be patient and keep a paring knife nearby if it gets hard to peel by hand.

How To Store?

What I love about roasted chestnuts is that you can easily bake a big batch, eat some right away, and store or freeze the rest for later. However, regardless of what you are planning to do with them, be sure to peel them while they are still warm as it will be very difficult to remove them from their shells after they are cooled to room temperature. 

  • Store: Place roasted chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, get the air out as much as you can, tightly seal, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.
Whole roasted chestnuts in a bowl

Seasoning Ideas:

While roasted chestnuts are perfect for snacking as they are, you can take them to the next level, especially during the holiday season. Here are a few ways to jazz up one pound of peeled chestnuts:

  • My version of “Christmas Chestnuts”: Mix 4 tablespoons of melted butter with 1 tablespoons of sugar (or maple syrup) and ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon. Drizzle over the nuts or serve on the side for dipping. *This is my favorite way to serve on Christmas morning.*
  • Apple pie spice flavored: Mix together 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter with 1 teaspoon apple pie spice and a pinch of ground nutmeg and drizzle over the baked chestnuts.
  • Savory flavors: If you prefer more of a savory seasoning for roasted chestnuts, try mixing melted butter with your favorite herbs (such as chopped fresh rosemary or sage), sea salt, and black pepper.

How to Serve – What To Do With Chestnuts?

Use the below recipe to enjoy it by itself or use it in popular chestnut recipes such as:

  • Chestnut puree
  • Mont Blanc – A popular chestnut dessert
  • Roasted Chestnut Soup
  • Thanksgiving Chestnut Stuffing
  • Candied Chestnuts

Expert Tips

While roasting chestnuts is a pretty straightforward process that doesn’t require much, there are a few things to know. Below are a few tips to help you succeed:

  • Do not skip the scoring: I get it is not fun to have to go over every single chestnut and score them one by one. However, if you skip this part, it will likely explode in the oven. It happened to me and it was scary.
  • Peel them while they are still hot: As soon as they are cool enough to handle, start peeling them or otherwise it will be very hard to remove them from their shells after they cooled down.
  • Get more than you need: If you need a pound of shelled roasted chestnuts, I recommend you purchase a pound and a half. You will likely end up with a pound after you have removed the shells and tossed the ones that have gone bad. 
  • Toaster Oven: I tested this recipe both in my regular oven and toaster oven. If your toaster oven can go up to 425 degrees Fahrenheit, you can place them in a shallow roasting pan and follow the recipe as written.
  • Soaking Time: Some people let the chestnuts soak overnight. During my testing, I tried both ways and found no difference in the end product. I also tried the method where you soak it in a bowl of hot water. But again, the end product was no different.

FAQs

What does a roasted chestnut look like?

When roasted, the outer shell of the chestnut will burst open and reveal the golden-brown flesh on the inside.

Do you have to boil chestnuts before roasting?

It is not necessary to boil chestnuts before roasting. However, I do recommend soaking them for an hour.

How do you score chestnuts?

Place chestnut flat on a cutting board with the round side facing up. Hold it firmly in between your fingers and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife, a sharp serrated knife, or a chestnut knife, if you have one.

How long do you roast chestnuts and at what temperature?

I recommend roasting chestnuts for about 25-35 minutes at 425 degrees F. You can tell that they are done when the outer shells burst open revealing the golden flesh on the inside.

How long will cooked chestnuts keep?

As long as they are stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, roasted chestnuts will keep fresh for up to 4 days.

Can you eat a raw chestnut?

Yes, you can. However, according to this article on WebMD, they contain tannic acid which may result in stomach irritation, nausea, or liver damage in some people.

What do roasted chestnuts taste like?

Roasted chestnuts have a slightly sweet, earthy, and nutty flavor with a buttery soft texture. Some people even find the flavor similar to a cooked sweet potato.

Where can I buy chestnuts?

Store raw chestnuts, still in their shells, in a cool and dry place for about a week. If you want to store them longer, place them in a plastic bag and keep them in the fridge for up to a month.

How To Eat Roasted Chestnuts?

You can eat a roasted chestnut by itself or use it in recipes like chestnut soup, chestnut puree, or even stuffing.

Other Snacks Recipes You Might Also Like:

Before I share a few more snack recipes, please know that I also have a detailed article on How to Boil Chestnuts and Roasting Chestnuts on an Open Fire. If you want to learn other ways of cooking chestnuts be sure to check those out.

If you found this post on How To Roast Chestnuts in Oven helpful and roasted chestnuts in your own kitchen, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

oven roasted chestnuts in a bowl
Print

How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven – Oven Roasted Chestnuts Recipe

Learn how to roast chestnuts in the oven and get my tips on peeling chestnuts. Once you learn my quick and easy method, roasting chesnuts in the oven will be a breeze.
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lbs Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European) or chestnuts from Michigan
  • Water

Instructions

  • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
  • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. The rounded side, (aka the belly side) should be facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for an hour.
  • Preheat it to 425 degrees. Drain chestnuts (no need to dry) and place them on a baking sheet pan in a single layer. Roast for 25-30 minutes*1 keeping a close eye on it and turning a few times if necessary. They should be fully roasted when the skins have pulled back/opened and the flesh inside has softened.
  • Remove from the oven and place the now-roasted chestnuts in a kitchen cloth. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 10-15 minutes. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it steam for 10-15 minutes.
  • Being careful not to burn yourself, gently squeeze chestnuts using the kitchen cloth or the paper bag as a shield to help remove the skins. You should hear the crackling sound of the roasted skins as you do so.
  • To peel, transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.*2 Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.
  • Enjoy roasted chestnuts on their own or use it with your favorite herbs or seasoning.

Notes

  • Roasting time *1: While I listed the roasting time as 25-30 minutes, I recommend that you keep an eye on the chestnuts after the 20-minute mark. In my experiments, some chestnuts were fully opened while the others were not, even after the full 30 minutes of roasting. So, it is a good idea to remove the ones that are fully opened and let the rest bake for a little longer, if necessary.
  • A word on peeling *2: During the course of three weeks, in preparation for this post, I have tried several of the “easy” peeling methods I found in various websites and books. I learned one thing and it is that the ease of peeling depends on the type of chestnut you use. Yes, the method of cooking is important and you want to make sure they are fully cooked, but be aware that not every chestnut is created equal.
    During my recipe testing, I found that Chinese chestnuts were very hard to peel, especially when it came to the inner skin (the fuzzy part), whereas Italian chestnuts were easier. However, even with the Italian chestnuts, there were some that broke as I was peeling.
    It is also important to mention that the size and age of the chestnut play an important role when it comes to peeling. Based on all this, I think the rule of thumb when it comes to peeling is to be patient and keep a paring knife nearby if it gets hard to peel by hand.
  • Store: Place roasted chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, get the air out as much as you can, tightly seal, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How to Roast Chestnuts in The Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/feed/ 10
Boiled Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:27:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47175 New to cooking chestnuts? Be sure to check out our post on How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven and Roasting Chestnuts in an Open Fire. What You Will Need? For boiled chestnuts, all you need is raw chestnuts, water, and optional seasonings. However, it is important to note that not all chestnuts are created equal. Preparing Chestnuts for Boiling: Start by scoring the chestnuts. This is a crucial step for...

The post Boiled Chestnuts appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

New to cooking chestnuts? Be sure to check out our post on How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven and Roasting Chestnuts in an Open Fire.

Boiled chestnuts are being scooped out by a person from boiling water.

What You Will Need?

For boiled chestnuts, all you need is raw chestnuts, water, and optional seasonings. However, it is important to note that not all chestnuts are created equal.

  • Chestnuts: You can find fresh chestnuts at your local grocery store and farmers markets during the fall and winter months. I tested this steamed chestnuts recipe using Chinese and European chestnuts (primarily from Italy), which are both widely available. Italian chestnuts were easier to peel compared to Chinese ones so I would recommend buying those if you can get your hands on them.
    Also, if you can find American chestnuts, they would work as well.
  • Seasonings: While they are optional, you can flavor the boiling water with bay leaves, orange peel, or cinnamon sticks.
  • Water: I used tap water.

Preparing Chestnuts for Boiling:

Start by scoring the chestnuts. This is a crucial step for easy peeling later on. 

Person showing how to score chestnuts

To do so:

  1. Place a chestnut on a cutting board, flat side down, securing it firmly in between your index finger and thumb.
  2. Using a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife, make a small incision (approximately ½ inch lengthwise) horizontally over the rounded side of the chestnut. You do want to cut through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.

How To Boil?

Boiling chestnuts on the stovetop is an easy process and require no special equipment. Simply:

Two images showing how to boil chestnuts
  1. Boil water in a saucepan: Fill a saucepan with cold water. You should have enough water to cover the chestnuts fully. Bring it to a boil. Place chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for approximately 15-20 minutes, or until the scored section opens up revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside.
  2. Check for doneness: Carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked.
    If so, use a slotted spoon to remove the chestnuts into a bowl. Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel and let it cool for 10 minutes. If it is not fully cooked, cook it for another 3-4 minutes, checking doneness during the boiling process once or twice.

How To Peel?

When they are still hot, but somewhat cool enough to handle, peel chestnuts one by one. Start with the outer shell and then remove the inner skin. If you have a hard time removing the fuzzy skin, place it back in the water for a few more minutes or use a paring knife to remove it as much as you can. Peeling chestnuts this way requires patience and you may end up with broken pieces along the way. 

Person showing how to peel boiled chestnuts

Alternatively, you can cut it down the middle and scoop out the nuts using a small spoon and collect the boiled and steamed chestnuts in a bowl. You will end up with broken pieces but it will still be delicious.

I find that this is the easiest way to shell chestnuts, especially if you are using them in a recipe such as chestnut puree, chestnut stuffing, or chestnut soup.

Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside as you peel them.

Expert Tips

  • It is easier to peel them while they are still warm: During my testing, I learned that boiled chestnuts were easier to peel when they were still warm, especially the fuzzy skin underneath the shell. It was harder to remove the shell after it was cooled down to room temperature. If your chestnuts cool down too much, pop them back in the pot of hot water for 3-4 minutes to rewarm, then drain and continue with peeling.
  • Should I add a splash of oil for easy removal?: As I was doing my research for this post, I found a few sources recommending adding a splash of olive oil claiming that it would help with peeling. I did not find this to be helpful at all so I wouldn’t recommend it.
  • Be patient: Peeling boiled chestnuts requires patience. It is also important to mention that age and size matter when it comes to cooking time and peeling. If your chestnuts are not equal in size then it might take shorter/longer to cook. As always, check for doneness along the way.
  • Use the proper size saucepot: The size of the saucepot and the amount of water you use depends on the amount of chestnuts you are boiling. If you are cooking a lot, then use a large pot and more water.
Peeled chestnuts are on a plate from the top view

How To Store, Freeze & Thaw?

  • Storage: Place boiled and peeled chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, push out as much air as possible, seal, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.

FAQs

How Long to Cook Chestnuts in Water?

The time it takes for chestnuts to fully cook largely depends on the age and size of the chestnuts. Start by boiling for 15 minutes and check for doneness. If not fully cooked, check for doneness every 5-6 minutes thereafter.

How to Tell if the Chestnuts are Fully Cooked?

If the outer skin is open revealing the fuzzy skin, you can fish them out. However, it is possible that some of them might not fully open. Because of this, the best way to test doneness is to check one. It is cooked when the inside is soft, with a buttery texture.

How To Cook Frozen Peeled Chestnuts?

Defrost frozen chestnuts in the fridge overnight. Bring to room temperature. Boil them in water for 10-15 minutes or roast them in a preheated 400 degrees F oven for 15-20 minutes. Since cooking time depends on the size and age of the chestnut, be sure to test one before completing the cooking process.

What’s the easiest way to peel chestnuts?

Scoring chestnuts before boiling or roasting helps with removing them from their shells. Once fully cooked, peel the outer layer using the scored shell and then peel away the inner skin. If it is not peeling easily, you can use a sharp paring knife to help you along the way.

Other Snacks You Might Like:

Before I share more snack recipes you might also like please know that I also shared my methods on Roasting Chestnuts in the Oven and Cooking Chestnuts in an open fire so feel free to check those out as well.

If you try this Boiled Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Boiled chestnuts being removed from the pot
Print

Boiled Chestnuts Recipe

Learn how to boil chestnuts using my foolproof method. Plus, get all my tips on peeling chestnuts to use in recipes such as soups, purees and cakes or to serve it as a healthy snack.
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lbs chestnuts* preferably Italian or American chestnuts
  • Water

Instructions

  • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
  • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board with the rounded side facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and using a sharp knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one) cut it horizontally across the rounded side to make a small incision (about ½ to 1 inch). Turn it 90 degrees and score once again, making an X. As you are cutting, make sure you are cutting through the inner skin without going too much into the yellow flesh. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
  • Fill a saucepan with water and bring it to a rolling boil. Place the scored chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes or until the scored section opens up and the inside of the chestnut is exposed.
  • To check doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow nut inside is fully cooked. If it is not fully cooked, cook it for another 3-4 minutes, checking doneness during the boiling process once or twice.
  • Do not discard the hot water.
  • Using a slotted spoon, transfer boiled chestnuts into a bowl and let them cool for 10 minutes. When still hot, but somewhat cool enough to handle, peel chestnuts one by one first starting with the outer shell and then removing the inner skin. If you have a hard time removing the fuzzy skin, put them back in the hot water for a few more minutes or use a paring knife to remove it as much as you can.
  • Alternatively, if it is hard to peel, you can cut it in the middle and remove the flesh using a small spoon and collect the boiled chestnuts in a bowl. You will end up with broken pieces but it will still be delicious.

Notes

  • The boiling time and the ease of peeling largely depends on the size, age, and type of your chestnut. This recipe was tested with Italian chestnuts that I hand-picked one by one while making sure that each piece was somewhat equal in size. If your chestnuts are in different sizes, the time of cooking might change. Please check doneness (following my tips) after the first 15 minutes of boiling and cook them longer if need be.
  • Boiled chestnuts were easier to peel when they were still warm, especially the fuzzy skin underneath the shell. It was harder to remove the shell after it was cooled down to room temperature. If your chestnuts cool down too much, pop them back in the pot of hot water for 3-4 minutes to rewarm, then drain and continue with peeling.
  • Seasonings: While they are optional, you can flavor the boiling water with bay leaves, orange peel, or cinnamon sticks.

Nutrition

Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Boiled Chestnuts appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/feed/ 2
How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-butternut-squash-cubes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-butternut-squash-cubes/#comments Wed, 17 Nov 2021 03:05:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=46403 This post is a sequel to the series I am writing on basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my detailed instructions on How to Cut Butternut Squash, How to Roast Whole Butternut Squash, and How to Cook Butternut Squash Cubes in the Air Fryer. I think we can all agree a plate of roasted butternut squash cubes is one of...

The post How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

This post is a sequel to the series I am writing on basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my detailed instructions on How to Cut Butternut Squash, How to Roast Whole Butternut Squash, and How to Cook Butternut Squash Cubes in the Air Fryer.

I think we can all agree a plate of roasted butternut squash cubes is one of the easiest side dishes you can serve during the fall. Plus, cooking butternut squash doesn’t require a lot of time and effort, making it an ideal candidate for easy recipes.

roasted butternut squash cubes in a bowl with text on the image

Whether you are looking for a nutritious side dish for your Thanksgiving menu, to embrace this seasonal vegetable, or to meal prep a healthy, hearty lunch using oven-roasted butternut squash, this straightforward recipe is a good one to add to your collection of fall recipes.

Ingredients

This easy roasted butternut squash recipe only requires four simple ingredients! All you need is one medium (approximately 3 pounds) fresh butternut squash, a little olive oil (or any other vegetable oil like avocado oil), kosher salt (or sea salt), and black pepper. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view

What Spices To Add To Butternut Squash

These spice rack staples will come in handy if you need ideas for seasoning for diced butternut squash. Below are some of my favorite spices I use when I am roasting butternut squash cubes. Feel free to mix and match to make it work for your recipe:

  • Ground Cumin
  • Ground Coriander
  • Pinch of Cayenne Pepper
  • Chili Powder
  • Curry Powder
  • Italian Seasoning

How To Bake Butternut Squash Cubes

These simple steps will teach you how to roast butternut squash cubes in the oven. To do so simply:

Person cutting butternut squash into cubes
  1. Cut up the butternut squash: Following my easy method, peel and cut butternut squash into cubes. I recommend cutting them in a uniform size as much as possible to ensure even roasting. I like mine to be 1-inch cubes but you can make them slightly larger or smaller to make it work for your recipe.
  2. Preheat the oven: Adjust your oven rack to the middle position. Preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. 
Person showing how to roast butternut squash cubes in four images
  1. Add Seasoning: Add the butternut squash cubes to the sheet pan and spread them out in a single layer. Lightly drizzle the cubed butternut squash with olive oil and sprinkle evenly with kosher (or sea salt) and ground black pepper.
  2. Toss the Squash: Using your hands, a spoon, or a spatula, toss the butternut squash around the baking sheet until it is thoroughly coated with olive oil, salt, and pepper.
  3. Bake: Bake for 30-35 minutes, stirring halfway through, until the edges of the squash cubes are lightly browned or until a knife can easily be inserted. 
  4. Serve: Transfer to a serving dish and/or use it in your recipe.

What Temperature And How Long To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes?

The amount of time to roast butternut squash is determined by the size of your butternut squash cubes, as well as the preferred temperature setting.

The good news is that you can roast butternut squash cubes at various temperatures. I usually prefer a high temperature, 425 degrees F., oven and bake them for 30-35 minutes. However, you can bake them in lower temperatures as well. Below, I am sharing how long to roast butternut squash cubes at 375 degrees and 400 degrees as well

However, regardless of the temperature, you are using, I highly recommend checking them after 30 minutes to ensure even roasting.

  • 375 Degrees F / 40-45 minutes
  • 400 Degrees F / 35-40 minutes
  • 425 Degrees F / 30-35 minutes (preferred method)

How To Roast Frozen Butternut Squash?

Purchasing frozen butternut squash cubes is a great alternative to fresh butternut squash. It will save you time on preparing and cutting, especially if you think cutting a whole butternut squash is a daunting task.

Here are the steps to make roasted frozen butternut squash:

  • Break up the frozen butternut squash chunks: It is essential to take a moment and break up the frozen butternut squash chunks with your hands. This way, you can easily spread them on the baking sheet and, as a result, get evenly roasted butternut squash cubes in the end.
  • Preheat Sheet Pan: While it may come as an extra step, preheating the sheet pan in the oven before adding the frozen butternut squash cubes helps jump-start the roasting process. Because as soon as you place them in a hot baking sheet, the ice on the squash starts to melt, leading to crispier and perfectly roasted diced butternut squash faster.
  • Seasoning and Baking: When ready to roast, place the frozen butternut squash cubes in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle it with kosher salt and ground black pepper. Give them a toss and carefully spread them onto the hot sheet pan in an even layer. Bake at 450 Degrees F for 20-30 minutes or until they turn light golden brown on the edges.
roasted butternut squash cubes on a sheet pan

Seasoning For Butternut Squash

People often ask, what is the best seasoning for butternut squash. And truthfully, there are so many delicious ways to season this versatile vegetable, and you can’t go wrong with any of them. Below, you will find some of my favorite way to season butternut squash:

  • Cinnamon Roasted Butternut Squash with Maple Syrup or Brown Sugar: If you are looking to serve the perfect side dish at your Thanksgiving feast this year, consider flavoring it with ground cinnamon and maple syrup (or butternut squash). The natural sweetness of the butternut squash pairs nicely with the earthy flavors of cinnamon and gets even more caramelized thanks to the addition of maple syrup.
  • Roasted Butternut Squash with Rosemary: If you wonder what to put on butternut squash for a fall-inspired side dish, try Roasted Butternut Squash with Rosemary. You can use both fresh or dried rosemary for a subtle hint with every bite. 
  • Herb Roasted Butternut Squash With Garlic: Garlic and herbs are a classic duo that tastes delicious when combined with butternut squash’s creamy, slightly nutty flavor. You can pair a couple of garlic cloves (minced) with any of your favorite fresh herbs, like fresh thyme, parsley, and any savory seasonings that you have on hand. The addition of garlic and fresh herbs makes for a hearty side dish that you can serve with any meal.
  • Nuts and Seeds: For a bit of crunch with every bite, consider adding nuts and seeds of your choice on top of your prepared butternut squash. Sprinkling with pumpkin seeds, chopped walnuts, or pecans is a great way to get extra nutrients while elevating the texture of your dish. 

How To Serve Butternut Squash Cubes? Baked Butternut Squash Recipes You Should Try:

Now that we covered how to roast butternut squash cubes, it is time to decide what to do with them. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve and a few healthy butternut squash recipes from the archives:

Butternut squash salad on a plate
  • As A Side Dish By Itself: Because butternut squash carries so much flavor, it’s one of my favorite side dishes to serve. Serve next to any of your favorite chicken or meat recipes for a well-balanced, hearty meal.
  • Butternut Squash Soup: Roasted butternut squash creates a great base for an elevated Butternut Squash Soup. It is the ultimate heartwarming comfort food to serve on a chilly evening.
  • Mash It Up: Butternut squash is an excellent alternative to sweet potatoes or even regular potatoes. Substitute butternut squash in for a sweet, slightly nutty mash that is great to serve as a side dish.
  • Add to Salads: Butternut squash can be a hearty, filling addition to your favorite salads or great for meal prepping. Some of my favorite healthy butternut squash recipes are this Barefoot Contessa’s Roasted Butternut Squash Salad, this Roasted Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad, and this Ottolenghi’s Butternut Squash Salad. They are all easy to make, packed with fall flavors, and festive enough to add to your holiday menu.
  • Add to Basic Whole Grain Dishes: Basic whole grains dishes like wild rice, bulgur pilaf, quinoa or even black rice compliment roasted butternut squash cubes very well! Fill up a bowl with your whole grain of choice, your butternut squash cubes, and your favorite toppings for a filling and nutritious dish, great for a weeknight dinner or weekly meal prep!
  • Incorporate into your favorite Pasta, Curry, Pizza, Taco recipes: Butternut squash is a great addition to any of your favorite taco, pizza, pasta, or curry recipes (like this Thai Butternut Squash Curry recipe.) I even have a recipe for Goat Cheese and Butternut Squash Bruschetta that you can make with leftover roasted squash cubes.

What Meat Pairs Well With Butternut Squash

  • Whole Roasted Chicken: Delicious enough to serve at your next dinner party and casual enough for a weekday dinner, this Whole Roasted Chicken is one of my go-to dishes to serve with roasted butternut squash.
  • Roasted Turkey: Baked butternut squash cubes as a side dish pair nicely with turkey for your Thanksgiving menu.
  • Roasted Bone In Chicken: Butternut squash is the perfect creamy compliment to serve alongside a juice, tender Baked Bone-In Chicken Breasts.
  • Ham or Pork: Butternut squash is sure to be a fan favorite Christmas side dish to serve alongside your traditional ham recipe. Or if you are serving on a Tuesday night, try it with Baked Pork Chops.
  • Prime Rib: If you are serving prime rib at a special gathering or holiday dinner this year, butternut squash is a great go-to simple side dish to serve alongside your prime rib!

How To Make Ahead and Store

  • Make-Ahead: You can cut your butternut squash into cubes up to four days in advance and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. I don’t suggest leaving for more than four days as the squash will begin to lose its nutrients. 
  • Making it on Thanksgiving Day? If you are serving this simple roasted butternut squash as a side dish this Thanksgiving, you can make it ahead and warm it up right before the serving. To do so:
    1. Prepare and roast butternut squash cubes a day before as directed in the recipe. Bring them to room temperature and place them carefully in an airtight container. If you have it, place them in an ovenproof casserole dish with a tight lid so that you can reheat it the next day in the same dish (fewer dishes to clean). Store it in the fridge.
    2. Thirty minutes before you are ready to reheat, take them out of the fridge and let them sit on the counter. I usually time it so that I have them ready to go in the oven as soon as I take my turkey out of the oven to rest.
    3. Adjust the oven temperature to 300 degrees F. Place the ovenproof dish in the oven and bake until warmed thoroughly 10-15 minutes. Alternatively, you can place them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet in a single layer and reheat it that way.
  • Storage: You can store roasted butternut squash in an airtight container for up to three days in the refrigerator. Allow the butternut squash to come to room temperature before transferring to the refrigerator. 
  • Freezing: To freeze butternut squash cubes, arrange the butternut squash on a parchment lined sheet pan in a single layer. Do not let the cubes overlap. Freeze for 2-3 hours or until completely frozen. You can then transfer the cubes into an airtight container or freezer bag and freeze them for up to three months.
a bowl of roasted butternut squash cubes from the top

Expert tips for perfect results

  • The roasting time might differ depending on the size of the butternut squash cubes: The times that are listed in the recipe below are for 1-inch cubes. If yours are larger or smaller, be aware that the bake time might be a bit longer or shorter. 
  • Keep an eye on it after the first 30 minutes: Whether you bake cubed butternut squash at 375, 400, or 425 degrees F, I recommend giving a toss at least once and checking it for doneness after the first 30 minutes.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan: If your squash is large and you have a lot of squash, break it into two sheet pans. You can roast them simultaneously but be sure to rotate and flip them halfway through the baking process to ensure even baking.
  • Should I use parchement paper? After reading this article on Food52, I decided to no longer use parchement paper when roasting vegetables. It is definetly a personal prefence, but as a big fan of the roasted caramelized flavors, I am okay with having to deal with cleaning the sheet pan later on.

FAQs:

What is butternut squash?

Butternut squash is a type of winter squash that is harvested on a vine. It is grown during the summer months and harvested in the fall. It has a sweet earthy and nutty taste with high levels of fiber, vitamin A and vitamin C, magnesium, and potassium.

Do I need to peel butternut squash before baking?

Although you can bake butternut squash cubes without peeling, the peel gives a very bitter taste so I would not recommend it.

How do you know when butternut squash is fully cooked?

Your butternut squash is fully cooked when you can insert a knife into the squash and it comes out easily.

If you enjoyed this article on How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes and tried the recipe below, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

roasted butternut squash cubes on a sheet pan
Print

How to Roast Butternut Squash Cubes Recipe

Learn how to roast butternut squash cubes with my foolproof steps. This basic baked butternut squash recipe is easy to make and can be used in soups, salads, grain dishes, tacos and more.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 5 cups

Ingredients

  • 1 medium butternut squash about 3 pounds, cut into cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Possible seasonings

Instructions

  • Adjust oven rack to middle position and preheat the oven to 425 degrees.
  • Place diced butternut squash on the prepared pan. Drizzle with olive oil, salt, and black pepper. Give it a toss to ensure that all of the cubes are coated with the oil and the seasoning.
  • Arrange the squash cubes on an even layer on a large baking sheet.
  • Roast, turning them halfway through, for 30-35 minutes until they are lightly golden brown on the edges or until a knife inserted in one of the cubes comes in and out easily.
  • Carefully transfer onto a plate and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • A 3-pound butternut squash yields somewhere between 5-6 cups of roasted 1-inch butternut squash cubes.
  • Can I bake butternut squash in different temperatures? When it comes to baking butternut squash cubes, I usually prefer a high temperature, 425 degrees F., oven, and bake them for 30-35 minutes. However, you can bake them in lower temperatures as well. Below, I am sharing how long to roast butternut squash cubes at 375 degrees and 400 degrees as well
    • 375 Degrees F / 40-45 minutes
    • 400 Degrees F / 35-40 minutes
    • 425 Degrees F / 30-35 minutes (preferred method)
    The timing might change depending on the size of the butternut squash cubes. Also, regardless of the temperature you are roasting them in, I highly recommend checking them after 30 minutes.

The post How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-butternut-squash-cubes/feed/ 6
How To Cut Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-butternut-squash/#respond Wed, 17 Nov 2021 03:00:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=46363 This How To Cut and Peel Butternut Squash tutorial is a sequel to basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my posts on How to Bake Butternut Squash Cubes, How To Air Fryer Butternut Squash, and How To Roast Halved Butternut Squash. Things to Look For When Buying Butternut Squash A cold-weather staple, butternut squash comes in all shapes and sizes...

The post How To Cut Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This How To Cut and Peel Butternut Squash tutorial is a sequel to basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my posts on How to Bake Butternut Squash Cubes, How To Air Fryer Butternut Squash, and How To Roast Halved Butternut Squash.

butternut squash cubes in a bowl with text on the image

Things to Look For When Buying Butternut Squash

A cold-weather staple, butternut squash comes in all shapes and sizes but if you know what to look for you will go home with the freshest squash to use in your fall cooking. Here, you might ask, “How can you tell if butternut squash is ripe when shopping at the grocery store?” Below you will find exactly what you need to look for:

  • The Stem should be intact: Make sure that the stem is intact. This is important as the stem helps keep it fresh for longer. If it isn’t intact, the squash may have passed its prime.
  • It should have a dark beige/tan color: A perfectly ripened butternut squash should be dark beige with no green soft spots or streaks. 
  • The skin should be matte: The skin should be matte versus shiny (or waxy). It should also have thick skin or a hard exterior. To test, gently prick the surface with your fingernail. It should have tough skin. If it goes through easily, it may be too old.
  • It should feel heavy for its size: Take one in your hand and make sure it is heavy for its size.
  • Do the sound test: Tap outside the squash. If it sounds hollow, it is good to go.

Tools You Will Need

When it comes to cutting butternut squash safety comes first. It is important to be patient and use the right tools. A dull knife or an unstable cutting surface may result in accidents.

the tools you need to cut butternut squash

Below are the tools you will need along with brands I use and recommend. The links included below are affiliate links. If you make a purchase using these links, I will earn a small commission at no cost to you.

  • A Sharp Chef’s Knife: You should use the sharpest knife you can get your hands on for easy and precise cutting. My favorite brand for Chef’s knives is Nakano Knife (affiliate link) with a carbon steel blade.
  • Large Cutting Board: It is imperative to work on a sturdy and flat surface to safely cut butternut squash. I use and recommend this wooden cutting board (affiliate link). It is quite heavy and doesn’t move around as you are cutting heavy winter squash.
  • Sharp Vegetable Peeler: Butternut squash is known to be difficult to peel because of its thick skin. I use this Kitchenaid peeler in the photos but I recently invested in this y peeler and actually think that it is the best peeler I have ever used.
  • A large spoon or An Ice Cream Scoop: You can use a large dinner spoon or if you have one an ice cream scoop or a melon baller to scoop out the seeds easily. 

Preparing It For Cutting

You picked the freshest and ripest butternut squash and got your tools ready, now it is time to prepare it for cutting. Below is a step-by-step guide to help you prepare butternut squash for cutting. Here you will learn how to clean, soften, and the best way to peel butternut squash safely:

  1. Clean Butternut Squash: Nowadays, most grocery stores put a large (usually sticky) label on butternut squash. If yours has it, gently remove it. Wash the squash under cold running water and dry it with a clean kitchen towel.
  2. Optional Step – Microwave Butternut Squash Before Peeling: While it is optional, some people find it easier to pop it in the microwave to soften the skin to make it easier to peel. I personally do not think that this is a necessary step, especially if you are working with a good vegetable peeler and a sharp knife.
    However, if you want to give this a try, prick 6-8 holes on the squash using a fork. Pop it in the microwave for 2 minutes. Continue with the next steps but be careful as it will be hot when it is done.
Person showing the easy way to prepare and peel butternut squash in four photos
  1. Trim the ends: Place the squash on its side while holding it firmly with your non-dominant hand to stabilize it on the chopping board. Trim the top and bottom of the squash by cutting about  ½-inch off each end, removing both the stem and the root.
  2. Cut it in the middle & Peel: You can peel the whole butternut squash but I find that it is easier to manage and peel it when it is smaller in size. To do so, cut it from the middle (as it is shown in the pictures) while it is laying on its curvy side. Hold the cut butternut squash firmly in one hand and peel it away from yourself while turning it as you peel to ensure that it is evenly peeled.
    If the skin of your butternut squash is too hard, you may have to go around it twice or until you reach the bright orange flesh.

    Your butternut squash is trimmed and peeled, now it is time to cut it. Below you will find a step-by-step tutorial on (1) how to dice a butternut squash and (2) how to halve a butternut squash.

How To Cut Up Butternut Squash into Cubes?

If you are preparing butternut squash for soup (i.e. when making Butternut Squash Soup) or roasting it for a salad (i.e. (when making Ina Garten’s Butternut Squash Salad), you will need to cut it into small cubes to cook or roast it. Below are the steps for cutting butternut squash in cubes:

Cut The Belly First:

The bottom part of the butternut squash is referred to as the belly. To cut it:

person showing how to cube butternut squash in photos
  1. Place it vertically with the larger bottom flat side down. Since we already trimmed the bottom part, it should be stable (and not wobbly.) 
  2. Cut it vertically down the middle with a sharp chef’s knife.
  3. Using a dinner spoon or an ice cream scoop, remove the seeds. Save the seeds to roast them later if you prefer.
  4. Slice each half into 1-inch half-moon slices and then cut each slice into one-inch cubes.

Cut the neck into cubes:

The top section of the butternut squash is usually referred to as the neck. To cut it:

person showing how to cut butternut squash
  1. Place the neck of the squash upright on your cutting board. Cut it vertically down the middle using a sharp knife. 
  2. Cut each half into 1-inch half-moon slices and then dice each slice into one-inch cubes. As you are dicing it, do your best to cut it in a way that the squash cubes are equal in size for even cooking, air frying, or roasting.

Expert tip: When cutting butternut squash for roasting, the important thing is to make sure that the small cubes are equal in size. This way, each piece will roast at the same time and will yield evenly roasted and caramelized butternut squash.

How To Halve It?

While butternut squash cubes are ideal for cooking and roasting, you can also roast butternut squash halves in the oven to use in recipes. Below are the steps showing you how to cut butternut squash in half:

Person showing how to cut butternut squash in half
  1. Trim the stem: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off. When I am cutting it in half, I skip trimming the bottom part. However, it is a personal preference; if you want, you can trim the bottom part as well.
  2. Halve it: While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. I recommend cutting one side first and then turning it around and cutting the other side next. As you are cutting you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it. This is the part where you do not want to rush and be slow and steady.
  3. Remove the seeds: If preferred, remove the seeds with a spoon or ice cream scoop before using the butternut squash halves in your recipe.

How To Store Cut Butternut Squash?

Now that your butternut squash is cut or halved, you might be wondering the best way to store it. Below you will find how to store butternut squash before and after it is cut:

  • Fresh Whole Butternut Squash: Store butternut squash in a cool and dark place to prevent it from ripening too fast. If stored properly, it should last two for up to three months.
  • Uncooked cubed butternut squash: Store cut butternut squash in an airtight container or a Ziploc bag (air removed and sealed tightly) in the fridge. It should be fresh for up to 5 days.

Can I Freeze Cut Butternut Squash?

You sure can! To do so:

  1. Arrange raw/uncooked butternut squash cubes in an even layer on a parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer and freeze for at least 4 hours or until frozen.
  2. Remove the now-frozen butternut squash from the freezer and transfer to a freezer bag or an airtight container. Remove the air out as much as you can and seal tightly.
  3. Freeze it for up to 3 months.

To thaw, remove the frozen uncooked butternut squash from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. If it is not fully thawed by the time you are ready to use it in your recipe, let it sit on the counter for a few hours until it is fully thawed.

How to Cook Butternut Squash?

It is no secret that butternut squash could be cooked in so many different ways. 

Below are some of my favorite methods of cooking butternut squash. Below, you will find a summary of each method of cooking:

Roasted Butternut Squash Cubes:

For more information, be sure to check out my post on Roasted Butternut Squash. In short, to roast butternut squash cubes:

Person showing how to roast butternut squash cubes
  1. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. 
  2. Place diced butternut squash on a sheet pan. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt and black pepper. The important thing here is to make sure that they are evenly distributed throughout the pan.
  3. Roast for 30-35 minutes, stirring halfway through, until the squash cubes are light brown, or until a knife inserted in one of the cubes comes in and out easily.

Roasted Butternut Squash Halves:

If your recipe calls for using a whole squash, you can halve it and roast it in two pieces. For more tips, be sure to check out my post on Oven Roasted Butternut Squash Halves and Air Fried Butternut Squash Halves.

Photos showing how to roast butternut squash halves

To roast halved butternut squash:

  1. Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. 
  2. Place each half on a baking sheet cut side up. Lightly brush with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. 
  3. Roast for 50-55 minutes or until it turns golden brown. You can test doneness by inserting a knife into the belly. If it comes in and out easily it should be fully roasted.

Healthy Butternut Squash Recipes:

Whether you are using it to make a colorful side dish, a simple soup, or a main course, our favorite hearty root vegetable could be used in endless ways. Here are a few of my favorite butternut squash recipes to try:

FAQs

What does butternut squash look like?

One of the most sought-after winter squashes, butternut squash has a light tan-color exterior with a long neck and a large round bottom.

How to soften butternut squash?

To easily soften butternut squash before cutting, prick 6-8 holes on the squash using a knife or a fork. Place it in the microwave and let it run on high for 2 minutes. At the end of 2 minutes if it is still not soft enough, place it back in the microwave and run it in 1-minute intervals until it reaches the desired softness.

​​Do you need to peel butternut squash before cooking?

I recommend peeling butternut squash if you are planning to roast it in cubes. However, if you plan to roast it in halves you do not need to peel it.

Can you peel butternut squash ahead of time?

Yes, you can. However, to ensure freshness be sure to store it in an airtight container for up to 5 days after peeling and cutting.

What does butternut squash taste like?

When eaten raw, butternut squash has a slightly sweet earthy, and nutty flavor. When roasted, some of the sugars caramelize during the cooking process and turn this otherwise humble winter squash into a delectable fall treat.

Is butternut squash good for you? Any health benefits?

According to Healthline, butternut squash is rich in nutrients (including vitamin A, vitamin C, and potassium) and low in calories. It is also a great source of antioxidants. As a result, consuming butternut squash may reduce the risk of several chronic diseases.

If you enjoyed this How to Cut Butternut Squash tutorial, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person cutting butternut squash into cubes
Print

How To Cut Butternut Squash

Learn how to prepare, peel and cut butternut squash easily and safely with step-by-step instructions. Below you will find instructions on how to cube butternut squash and how to halve butternut squash.
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 1 butternut squash
Calories 338kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 Butternut Squash

Instructions

  • Give it a quick wash: If there is a sticker/label on your squash remove it. Give it a quick wash under cold running water and dry it with a clean kitchen towel.
  • Trim the ends: Place the squash on its side while holding firmly with your non-dominant hand to stabilize it on the chopping board. Trim the top and bottom of the squash by cutting about ½-inch off each end removing both the stem and the root.
  • Cut it in the middle & Peel: You can peel the whole butternut squash but I find that it is easier to manage and peel it when it is smaller in size. To do so, cut it from the middle while it is laying on its curvy side. Hold the cut butternut squash firmly in one hand and peel it away from yourself while turning it as you peel to ensure that it is evenly peeled.
  • Cut the belly section into cubes: Place the bottom (belly part) vertically with the larger bottom flat side down. Since we already trimmed the bottom part, it should be stable (and not wobbly.)
  • Cut it vertically down the middle with a sharp chef’s knife.
  • Using a dinner spoon or an ice cream scoop, remove the seeds. Save the seeds to roast them later if you prefer.
  • Slice each half into 1-inch half-moon slices and then cut each slice into one-inch cubes.
  • Cut the neck section into cubes: Place the neck (the top section) of the squash upright on your cutting board. Cut it vertically down the middle using a sharp knife.
  • Cut each half into 3 pieces (vertically) and then dice each slice into one-inch cubes. As you are dicing it, do your best to cut them equal in size for even cooking or roasting.

Video

Notes

  • To halve a whole butternut squash: Trim the top section by cutting 1/2-inch from the top. While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. I recommend cutting one side first and then turning it around and cutting the other side next.As you are cutting you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it. This is the part where you do not want to rush and be slow and steady. If preferred, remove the seeds with a spoon or ice cream scoop before using the butternut squash halves in your recipe.
  • When cutting butternut squash, it is imperative that you use a sharp knife and a sturdy surface. Using a dull knife on a wobbly surface may result in an accident.

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 88g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 2640mg | Fiber: 15g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 79725IU | Vitamin C: 158mg | Calcium: 360mg | Iron: 5mg

The post How To Cut Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cut-butternut-squash/feed/ 0
Roasted Whole Butternut Squash https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-butternut-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-butternut-squash/#comments Wed, 17 Nov 2021 02:59:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=46398 This Roasted Whole Butternut Squash recipe post is a sequel to the series I am writing on basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to also check out my detailed instructions on How to Cut Butternut Squash, How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes, and Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves. Ingredient List This hearty baked butternut squash recipe requires only four ingredients. You will need...

The post Roasted Whole Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

This Roasted Whole Butternut Squash recipe post is a sequel to the series I am writing on basic how-to posts on butternut squash. If you need a refresher, be sure to also check out my detailed instructions on How to Cut Butternut Squash, How To Roast Butternut Squash Cubes, and Air Fryer Butternut Squash Halves.

Roasted halved butternut squash on a sheet pan

Ingredient List

This hearty baked butternut squash recipe requires only four ingredients. You will need one large butternut squash (2-3 pounds) cut in halves, olive oil, kosher salt, and ground black pepper.

My rule of thumb for the basic roasted butternut squash halves is to use 1 tablespoon of olive oil, 1/2 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/4 teaspoon of black pepper for every 3 pounds of whole butternut squash. If yours is smaller or larger, feel free to use less or more.

Ingredients on a sheet pan

Seasoning Ideas

You can flavor your roasted whole butternut squash using various different spices and herbs. Below are a few of my favorite seasoning ideas:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh herbs are a great addition to your roasted butternut squash halves. Savory herbs like fresh sage, rosemary, thyme, and parsley pair well and complement the natural nutty flavor of butternut squash.
  • Spices: You can get as creative as you want here, but a few of my favorite spices to sprinkle on butternut squash halves are ground cumin, ground coriander, chili powder, and even (a pinch of) cayenne pepper.
  • Sweeteners: Maple syrup or brown sugar elevate the vegetable’s natural sweetness and taste heavenly, especially if you are serving it as a side dish as a part of your Thanksgiving menu.

How To Cut Butternut Squash In Half

Before talking about how to roast butternut squash halves, I want to share my safe method for cutting a butternut squash in half. You must use a sharp Chef’s knife and a sturdy cutting board to avoid any injury.

person showing how to halve butternut squash in a collage
  1. Trim the top: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on the chopping board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem by cutting about ½-inch off on each end. When I am cutting it in half, I skip trimming the bottom part. However, it is a personal preference; if you want, you can trim the bottom part as well.
  2. Cut it in half: While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom) in the middle. I recommend cutting one side first and then turning it around and cutting the other side next. You may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it as you are cutting it. This is the part where you do not want to rush and be slow and steady.
  3. Remove the seeds: If preferred, remove the seeds with a large spoon or ice cream scoop before roasting butternut squash halves.

How To Bake Butternut Squash Halves In The Oven

  1. Preheat your oven to 375 degrees F.
person showing how to roast whole butter squash in a collage
  1. Prepare the Butternut Squash Halves: Place the butternut squash halves cut side up on a large baking sheet. Lightly brush olive oil over the top until evenly coated. You can also use your hands for this. Sprinkle with 1/2 teaspoon salt and ground black pepper. 
  2. Bake the Butternut Squash: Roast in the oven for 50-55 minutes or until it turns golden brown and is fork tender. You can also check doneness by inserting a knife into the belly section (the thickest part) of one of the butternut squash halves. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
  3. Cool and Scoop: Allow the butternut squash halves to cool for about five to ten minutes before using them in your recipe.

What To Do With Roasted Butternut Squash Halves

You can use roasted butternut squash halves in a variety of recipes. You can use the halves as a whole and stuff them with your favorite whole grain or scoop out the flesh to use in recipes. Below are a few delicious ways that I use whole roasted butternut squash in recipes:

baked butternut squash halves on a sheet pan
  • Serve it as it is: Top it off with a few tablespoons of butter while it is still hot, let it melt, and season with salt and pepper to serve it as a simple side dish. By the way, this is my favorite way of serving them.
  • Turn it into a delicious dessert: Drizzle freshly roasted still-warm butternut squash halves with honey or maple syrup and sprinkle it with ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon. Top it off with a few scoops of vanilla ice cream and sprinkle them with your favorite nuts (i.e., pecans, walnuts) or seeds (like roasted pumpkin seeds).
  • Stuff your roasted butternut squash halves with filling: Similar to how I did with my Stuffed Acorn Squash recipe; you can fill your squash halves with a simple quinoa filling. This is especially a great easy side dish for the holidays.
  • Make mashed butternut squash: Scoop out the flesh and mash it to serve as an alternative to Mashed Sweet Potatoes as a simple side dish.
  • Use the flesh to make roasted butternut squash soup: My Butternut Squash Soup recipe is made by cooking cubed butternut squash in vegetable broth. It takes about 30 minutes for squash cubes to cook in that recipe. However, if I am in a rush and have some leftover roasted butternut squash, I use it to make a delicious soup in about 20 minutes.
  • Make Pasta Sauce: Roasted butternut squash makes a delicious pasta sauce. Simply scoop out the flesh and process it in a food processor until it reaches a creamy consistency. And if you need a great recipe, this Butternut Squash Pasta sauce is one that I made and liked.
  • Make Hummus: As an alternative to your favorite classic hummus, try using this roasted butternut squash in your next hummus to dip veggies or crackers into. This Butternut Squash Hummus recipe is easy and quick to make.
  • Use As A Pie Filling: Because of the natural sweetness of butternut squash, it makes for a delicious Thanksgiving pie! Add the filling to your favorite pie crust recipe for a delicious alternative to pumpkin pie.

Make-Ahead and Storage

Butternut squash can easily be made ahead of time and reheated on Thanksgiving Day or a busy weeknight. The method of storing butternut squash depends on how you plan to use it. 

You can store it as whole roasted halves or scoop out the flesh and store it in a container. Either way, you can get ahead with a little bit of advance preparation.

  • To make ahead: Follow the instructions below and roast butternut squash halves up to three days ahead.
  • To Store: If you are planning to serve your butternut squash in halves as a whole, first allow the squash to come to room temperature. Then, wrap the halves up in plastic wrap and place in the refrigerator until you are ready to warm up again. If you are storing the scooped-out squash, allow it to come to room temperature before transferring it into an airtight container and placing it in the fridge.
  • Reheating: When you are ready to eat your delicious butternut squash, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and transfer the squash to an oven-safe dish or roasting pan. If you are keeping your squash in halves, place your squash on the baking sheet and place it in the oven for 10-15 minutes until warmed thoroughly.

Expert Tips:

  • Roasting time: Please keep in mind that the roasting time might change based on the size of your butternut squash. To prevent over baking, I recommend keeping a close eye on it after the 45th-minute mark.
  • Cover them to keep them warm: If you are using your whole roasted butternut squash for your Thanksgiving meal, cover them with aluminum foil to keep them warm while working on other recipes.

FAQs

Can you roast whole butternut squash?

Yes, you can. However, to make it easier (and quicker), it is best to halve it vertically first, place it on a sheet pan (cut side up), season it, and then roast it in the oven.

How long to roast whole butternut squash at 400?

Depending on the size of your butternut squash, it takes about 45-50 minutes to roast whole butternut squash halves.

How long to roast whole butternut squash at 425?

It takes about 40-45 minutes to roast butternut squash halves at 425 degrees F.

Do you need to peel whole butternut squash before baking?

No, you do not. Since you will most likely either fill the baked squash halves with something or scoop the flesh to use in your recipes, you do not need to peel halved butternut squash.

What to do with leftover baked butternut squash?

There are so many things you can do with roasted squash. Roasted Butternut Squash Soup, Squash Hummus, Butternut Squash pasta sauce are to name a few.

If you try this Roasted Whole Butternut Squash recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

roasted whole butternut squash halves on a sheet pan from top view
Print

Roasted Whole Butternut Squash Recipe

Learn how make roasted whole butternut squash with my step by step guide. Make a batch, use some right away and store the rest for later.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 1 Butternut Squash
Calories 297kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large 2-3 pounds butternut squash
  • 1 tablespoon of olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 375 degrees F. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Trim the stem: Place the whole butternut squash on its side on your cutting board. Hold it firmly in the middle with your non-dominant hand. Trim the stem (the top) by cutting about ½-inch off.
  • Halve it: While still holding it firmly on its side, cut it vertically (or from top to bottom direction) in the middle. I recommend cutting one side first and then turning it around and cutting the other side next. As you are cutting you may have to jerk it back and forth while applying a little pressure to loosen it*. Remove the seeds with a spoon.
  • Place the halved butternut squash cut side up on a baking sheet lined with parchment. Brush the cut side with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  • Roast in the oven for about 50-55 minutes or until it turns golden brown. The timing might be a bit more or less depending on the size of your butternut squash. You can also check doneness by inserting a knife in the flesh of the squash. If it comes in and out easily it should be ready to go.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes, use it in your recipe right away or scoop the flesh to use it later.

Notes

*This is the part where you do not want to rush and be slow and steady.
The basic ratio of ingredients that I use for roasted butternut squash halves is 1 tablespoon of olive oil, 1/2 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/4 teaspoon of black pepper for every 3 pounds of whole butternut squash. If yours is smaller or larger, feel free to use less or more.
Make-Ahead & Storage
Butternut squash can easily be made ahead of time and reheated before serving. The method of storing butternut squash depends on how you plan to use it. 
You can store it as whole roasted halves or scoop out the flesh and store it in a container. Either way, you can get ahead with a little bit of advance preparatio.
  • To make ahead: Follow the instructions below and roast butternut squash halves up to three days ahead.
  • To Store: If you are planning to serve your butternut squash in halves as a whole, first allow the squash to come to room temperature. Then, wrap the halves up in plastic wrap and place them in the refrigerator until you are ready to warm up again. If you are storing the scooped-out squash, allow it to come to room temperature before transferring it into an airtight container and placing it in the fridge.
  • Reheating: When you are ready to eat your delicious butternut squash, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F and transfer the squash to an oven-safe dish or roasting pan. If you are keeping your squash in halves, place your squash on the baking sheet and place it in the oven for 10-15 minutes until warmed thoroughly.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 297kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 1176mg | Potassium: 1503mg | Fiber: 7g | Vitamin A: 1585IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Roasted Whole Butternut Squash appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-whole-butternut-squash/feed/ 4
Roasted Eggplant Halves https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-halves/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-halves/#comments Tue, 10 Aug 2021 18:53:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43327 Roasted Eggplant Halves are one of my most versatile and delectable dishes. With any stuffing you want, they can become a mouthwatering main course, like my Turkish Ground Beef Stuffed Eggplant and Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipes. Or, scoop out the flesh to turn it into a tangy and bold baked eggplant side dish, like my Eggplant Yogurt. There’s no question why creamy, caramelized eggplant halves make the perfect base for...

The post Roasted Eggplant Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Roasted Eggplant Halves are one of my most versatile and delectable dishes. With any stuffing you want, they can become a mouthwatering main course, like my Turkish Ground Beef Stuffed Eggplant and Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipes. Or, scoop out the flesh to turn it into a tangy and bold baked eggplant side dish, like my Eggplant Yogurt.

There’s no question why creamy, caramelized eggplant halves make the perfect base for some of my favorite Middle Eastern recipes. And if you’re on the hunt for basic and easy-baked eggplant recipes, you’ll love learning how to make Whole Roasted Eggplant, Sauteed Eggplant, and Fire Roasted Eggplant, too!

roasted eggplant halves on a gray plate

Why Should You Try This Method

With so many easy recipes using oven-baked eggplant halves, it’s no surprise that this recipe is a fan favorite! Here are just a few reasons why you’ll fall in love with this simple dish:

  • Easy and hands-off, this cooking method beats all others in terms of how simple it is. 
  • This method eliminates the bitter taste found in other roasted eggplant recipes—even when eggplants are out of season!—because of its unique pre-salting technique.
  • Make quick, healthy, and satisfying dinners any night of the week by stuffing your low carb baked eggplant halves with anything from bulgur wheat pilaf to ground beef.

What Type of Eggplants to Use?

Most recipes using eggplant are flexible in the type of eggplant you can use, which means you can take the stress out of your next trip to the local grocery store.

Globe Eggplants

For this recipe, I prefer to use globe eggplants which are a type of round, large eggplant (the ones you see in the photos.) Not only are they more widely available in the U.S., but they’re also large enough that each of your oven-grilled eggplant halves can serve as a perfect single-portion meal. If you can get your hands on it, its close cousin, Italian eggplants, would also work for this recipe.

Graffiti Eggplant

Graffiti eggplants are usually the smaller, teardrop-shaped version of eggplant. Though you can certainly use this type of eggplant to make oven-roasted eggplant halves, keep in mind that small eggplants cook more quickly and will yield smaller portion sizes.

How to Roast Eggplant Halves?

Out of all the ways to cook aubergine, roasted eggplant halves are quite possibly the easiest and most versatile. Kick up your feet and let the oven do the work with this simple recipe.

Person showing how to score eggplant halves
  1. Prepare the Eggplants: Rinse the eggplants under cold water, dry them with paper towels, and cut each in half lengthwise. Once you have each eggplant cut in half, score their insides with the tip of a sharp knife so that you create a diamond crosshatch pattern about one inch deep. Be careful not to pierce the skin.
Person salting the aubergine halves
  1. Salt the Eggplants: Place the eggplant halves onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil, cut side facing up. Season them with an even, single layer of kosher salt to draw out excess moisture. Let them sit for 30 minutes.
  2. Preheat the Oven: Set the oven to 400 degrees F.
Person squeezing out the liquid from eggplants
  1. Prepare for Roasting: Gently squeeze the extra moisture from the eggplant halves over a sink or large bowl, and pat them dry with a paper towel.
Person drying off the eggplant with a sheet of paper towel
  1. Dry them off: Using a sheet of paper towel, pat dry each half of eggplant.
Person brushing eggplants with oil
  1. Lightly Oil: Brush eggplant halves evenly with olive oil and arrange them on the rimmed baking sheet, cut surfaces facing down.
Eggplant halves on the baking sheet face down
  1. Bake: Bake the eggplant slices in the hot oven for 45-60 minutes, or until the eggplant turns golden brown and collapses. Remove the caramelized eggplant halves from the oven and let them cool for 20 minutes.
Oven baked eggplant halves from the top view

Tips for Oven Baked Eggplant Halves:

Learning how to prepare eggplant for baking shouldn’t be a hassle. Anyone can become an expert on oven-baked eggplant halves with these pro tips!

  • Lining the Sheet Pan: Using a lined baking sheet cuts clean-up time in half. However, using an unlined sheet pan can reduce eggplant baking time by increasing contact between the eggplant halves and the hot metal.
  • Salting the Eggplants: It’s important not to skip salting your eggplant halves. Because eggplants have so much water in them, salt is the best way to draw out the extra moisture so that the eggplants don’t absorb all the oil used to roast their outer layers.
  • Removing the Salt: Because this recipe uses such a small amount of salt, you don’t have to worry about removing the seasoning once the moisture has been drawn out of the eggplant halves. However, if you prefer, you may rinse the salt off the eggplant halves after waiting a full 30 minutes. Just be sure to dry the eggplant halves with a paper towel afterward.

Eggplant Dishes To Try Using Eggplant Halves:

There are hundreds of recipes using eggplant halves, which means you’ll never run out of different ways to use this delectable weeknight dinner recipe.

Person filling baked aubergine halves with bulgur wheat
  • Scoop out the eggplant flesh to make a party-ready dip, like my bold and smoky Eggplant Yogurt or baba ganoush.
  • Stuff your roasted eggplant halves with bulgur wheat pilaf to make Mediterranean Stuffed Eggplant, or you can use my Seasoned Quinoa to add a gluten-free, zesty, herby, and flavorful twist.
  • Make a meal meat-lovers can’t resist by filling each eggplant half with ground beef, ground chicken, or even ground lamb!
  • Drizzle your roasted halves with lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper for a delicious side dish or snack. You can even take it to the next level by presenting the halves atop a bed of fresh thyme sprigs for a light, herby taste.
  • Eat them with your favorite vinaigrette for a light yet filling eggplant salad. Tangy and sharp Lemon Vinaigrette and Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette make a great addition to this easy eggplant recipe.

How to Store

Because eggplant halves can be roasted in advance, this recipe is a great way to end the struggle of dinner meal prep.

  • Storage: Though they’re better fresh, eggplant halves can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to four days. Remember to bring them to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, place the eggplant halves in a 300-degree F. preheated oven for 8-10 minutes.
  • Freezing: Because eggplant halves tend to lose their shape when exposed to cold temperatures, I don’t recommend freezing them.
    Instead, you can freeze the flesh. To do so, scoop out the flesh, place it in a bowl lined with a colander, wait for it to drain out all of its juices, and place it in an airtight container.

FAQs

If you’re just starting to learn what to do with aubergine (what they call eggplant in the U.K.), it’s important to know what to expect. Take the guesswork out of cooking with this easy guide.

Can you cook eggplant in the oven?

Yes, you can! You can cook Whole Roasted Eggplants in the oven using my go-to recipe, or you can cut them into smaller pieces—like halves or slices—to speed up their roasting time.

How long to roast eggplant halves?

It will take 45-60 minutes to roast eggplant halves, depending on their size. Larger eggplants will take longer. The key is to watch for signs the eggplant halves are fully roasted: when they collapse and the bottom side turns golden brown. 

What temperature to roast eggplant halves?

I find that 400 degrees F. is the best temperature at which to roast eggplant halves.

Do you have to peel an eggplant before cooking?

Nope! Cooking eggplant with skin on is completely fine. Not only is eggplant skin edible, but it’s also packed with antioxidants and fiber.

What does roasted eggplant taste like?

Roasted eggplant has a deliciously creamy texture and a mild, smoky taste. As such a versatile base, it’s no wonder why this recipe is the perfect dish to play up with other flavors and fillings.

Halved roasted eggplants on a plate
Print

Roasted Eggplant Halves Recipe

Learn how to prepare and roast eggplant halves for using it in stuffed eggplant recipes with my foolproof method
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 4 halved eggplants
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 globe eggplants
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil

Instructions

  • Rinse eggplant under cold water and dry with a kitchen towel or paper towels.
  • Cut eggplant in half lengthwise. Then using the tip of a knife, score the flesh into a diamond cross-hatch pattern going about an inch deep making sure to not pierce the skin.
  • Transfer the eggplant halves cut side up onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Season evenly with the kosher salt.
  • Let them sit for 30 minutes on the sheet pan.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F (or 200 degrees C).
  • Over a kitchen sink or a bowl, gently squeeze the eggplants to get the extra moisture out. Pat-dry the cut face of the eggplants using a paper towel.
  • Brush the halves evenly with olive oil.
  • Arrange eggplants face down on the baking sheet.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 45-60 minutes or until the eggplant collapses and the bottom side turns golden brown. Let it cool on the counter for at least 20 minutes.
  • Gently turn the cut side up and use in your recipes.

Notes

  • I wrote the recipe for only 2 eggplants but you can easily multiply this recipe and use as many eggplants as you want.
  • Storage: Though they’re better fresh, eggplant halves can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to four days. Remember to bring them to room temperature before storing them. To reheat, place the eggplant halves in a 300-degree F. preheated oven for 8-10 minutes.
  • Freezing: Because eggplant halves tend to lose their shape when exposed to cold temperatures, I don’t recommend freezing them.
    Instead, you can freeze the flesh. To do so, scoop out the flesh, place it in a bowl lined with a colander, wait for it to drain out all of its juices, and place it in an airtight container.
  • Lining the Sheet Pan: You can line your baking sheet with parchment paper or aluminum foil, but I find that using an unlined sheet pan can reduce eggplant baking time by increasing contact between the eggplant halves and the hot metal. Still, if you prefer easier clean up, line your sheet pan.
  • Salting the Eggplants: It’s important not to skip salting your eggplant halves. Because eggplants have so much water in them, salt is the best way to draw out the extra moisture so that the eggplants don’t absorb all the oil used to roast their outer layers.
  • Removing the Salt: Because this recipe uses such a small amount of salt, you don’t have to worry about removing the seasoning once the moisture has been drawn out of the eggplant halves. However, you may rinse the salt off the eggplant halves after waiting a full 30 minutes. Just be sure to dry the eggplant halves with a paper towel afterward.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 586mg | Potassium: 525mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 53IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Roasted Eggplant Halves appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-halves/feed/ 2
How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:32:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43048 I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original recipe for karniyarik is made by frying eggplants in oil in a skillet, I like the hands-off approach of baking whole eggplants in the oven instead. Plus, it is healthier. You can also make karniyarik by cooking eggplants on the gas stove (or on the stovetop) or by using roasted...

The post How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I recently added a Turkish eggplant dish referred to as karniyarik to my collection of Turkish recipes. While the original recipe for karniyarik is made by frying eggplants in oil in a skillet, I like the hands-off approach of baking whole eggplants in the oven instead. Plus, it is healthier.

You can also make karniyarik by cooking eggplants on the gas stove (or on the stovetop) or by using roasted eggplant halves. However, in this post, I will show you how to roast a whole eggplant (or aubergine as it is called in the UK) in the oven with step-by-step photos and will answer all your questions about the basic whole roasted eggplant recipe.

Whole roasted aubergine on a baking sheet from top view

What Type of Eggplant Should I Buy For This Method?

I tested this recipe with both standard globe eggplants (the ones you see in the pictures) and graffiti eggplants, both of which are the most common variety of eggplants that you can find in American grocery stores.

When shopping for eggplants for roasting in the oven, there are a few things I recommend paying attention to:

  1. As the TV show host Amy Thielen suggests, eggplant should be heavy for its size, firm to touch, even colored with a shiny skin, and without any bruises.
  2. Take a few moments and select eggplants that are similar in size for even roasting.

With that being said, you can use this method for other kinds of eggplants like Japanese eggplants or Chinese eggplants. The time of roasting in the oven would change (possibly requiring less time) but the method would still be the same.

How To Prepare Eggplant for Baking

To prepare whole eggplants for baking:

Person washing and drying eggplants
  1. Rinse: Start by rinsing them under cold water. If there is a sticker on it, this is the time to remove that as well.
  2. Dry: Using a kitchen towel or paper towels, dry each eggplant thoroughly. You do not need to peel the skin.

How To Cook Whole Aubergines in the Oven

The steps for oven-roasted whole eggplant recipe are as follows:

  1. Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
Person poking holes in an eggplant on a baking sheet
  1. Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  2. Arrange: Place eggplants on the baking tray on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
Person placing eggplants to roast in oven
  1. Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
Baked whole eggplants right out of the oven
  1. Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

How To Use Whole Roasted Eggplants in Recipes:

The uses for whole roasted eggplants are endless, but below are a few basic eggplant recipes to put them to use:

Eggplant recipes, karniyarik and eggplant yogurt side by side
  1. Roasted Eggplant Pulp: Slice open the belly of the roasted eggplants, scoop out eggplant flesh with a small spoon and transfer into a bowl to use in recipes like eggplant dip with yogurt, Baba ghanouj, or add it in salads (such as this Eggplant Salad), stir fries, or dips (with pita chips on the side.) You can discard the skins. 
  2. Stuff it with or whole grains: Using a knife, create a slit belly (from top to bottom) in the center of each eggplant, gently open it to stuff it with ground beef or lamb (like we do in Turkish Stuffed Eggplant.) Or fill it with simple grain dishes like Bulgur with Vermicelli or Seasoned Quinoa for a light lunch like I did in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe.
  3. Remove the skin and chop it up: I think this is one of my favorite ways to cook eggplant as a side dish. To do so, gently peel the skin of the whole baked aubergines, transfer the flesh onto a cutting board and give it a rough chop. Transfer into a large bowl, drizzle with fresh lemon juice, a drizzle of olive oil, kosher salt and pepper and sprinkle it with fresh parsley. Serve it as a simple side dish with dinner recipes.

FAQs

What temperature to roast whole eggplants?

The best temperature to roast whole eggplants is 400 degree F.,which is about 204 degrees C.

How long to roast eggplants?

The eggplant baking time depends on the size of the eggplants. However, globe eggplants usually roast between 40-60 minutes in the oven.

Do I need to salt the whole eggplants before roasting them in the oven?

You do not need to salt them before roasting them in the oven. However, I recommend seasoning roasted eggplant flesh properly before using it in your recipe.

How do you know when eggplant is done cooking?

You will know that the eggplant is done cooking when it starts to lose its perfect round shape, starts to collapse onto itself, is soft to the touch, and is charred on the outside.

Do you need to peel eggplant before roasting?

You do not need to peel eggplant before roasting it. As a matter of fact, I recommend against peeling as the skin protects the flesh from burning and/or overcooking leaving you with a perfectly roasted soft and creamy whole eggplant.

Do you eat eggplant skin and seed? 

Roasted eggplant skin is edible and if some of the remains of the charred skin gets into your recipe it only makes it better by carrying over some of the delicious smoky flavor. The seeds are also edible. However, if you want you can remove the larger seeds before using it in your recipe.

Do you recommend roasting whole eggplants in the oven for making baba ganoush?

You can use this method for making baba ghanoush. However, if you are after the delicate smoky flavor of burnt eggplant that this Middle Eastern dip is known for, I recommend cooking eggplants on the gas stove on an open flame instead.

Whole roasted Eggplant on a sheet pan right after it comes out of the oven
Print

How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven

Learn how to roast a whole eggplant in the oven to use in recipes like karniyarik (Ground Beef Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, or Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 3 servings
Calories 1kcal

Equipment

  • Baking Sheet
  • Aluminum Foil
  • Parchment Paper

Ingredients

  • 3 Whole Globe Eggplants*

Instructions

  • Heat the oven: Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with aluminum foil and set it aside.
  • Rinse and dry: Wash eggplants under cold running water. Dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. There is no need to peel the eggplants for this method.
  • Poke Holes: Using a fork or tip of a sharp knife, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. This is a crucial step to prevent the eggplant from exploding and creating a mess in your oven.
  • Arrange: Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and transfer them into the preheated oven.
  • Bake in the oven: Roast until they are burst, collapsed, and softened making sure to turn them every 20 minutes. This process should take about 50-60 minutes depending on the size of your eggplants.
  • Allow them to cool: Remove from the oven and let them cool before using in your recipe.

Notes

  • When buying eggplants at the store, take a moment to select ones that are similar in size for even roasting.
  • The timing might change based on the size of the eggplant. I would recommend checking it every 20 minutes and turning them to make sure they are roasting evenly.
  • You can use this exact method for other types of eggplants. However, smaller eggplants would roast faster so it is recommended that you keep an eye on them as they roast.
  • Storage: You can roast a whole eggplant, bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for upto 2 days.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whole eggplants after they are roasted. If you want to freeze, I recommend first peeling them before placing them in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Calories: 1kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 2mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 1mg

The post How To Roast Whole Eggplant In Oven appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-roast-whole-eggplant-in-oven/feed/ 7
Fire Roasted Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:29:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43128 It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it. However, in my opinion, the method that delivers the most flavor is by cooking it on the stovetop on a direct flame. If you are not familiar with this method, you might think of it being similar to grilling it but it is not. Instead, we cook eggplants over a...

The post Fire Roasted Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that roasting a whole eggplant in the oven is the most hands-off method of cooking it. However, in my opinion, the method that delivers the most flavor is by cooking it on the stovetop on a direct flame.

If you are not familiar with this method, you might think of it being similar to grilling it but it is not. Instead, we cook eggplants over a direct flame on the gas burner by turning every few minutes to ensure even roasting. Some people also refer to this method as chargrilling as the eggplants get charred during the cooking process.

Fire roasted eggplants on a plate served by a person

Why Cook Eggplant on A Gas Stove – Pros & Cons

Before I show you how to use this method, I want to lay out the pros and cons of it so that you can decide for yourself. 

Pros:

  1. Delicate smoky flavor: Having been cooking eggplant since I was 10 years old, I do not know any other method that delivers the authentic smoky flavors that eggplant is known for. 
  2. Fast: Depending on the size of your eggplants, you can roast a whole eggplant in about 15-20 minutes. In my experience, this is faster than roasting it in the oven or grilling it.
  3. Easy to batch cook & freeze: You can have several burners on and roast several eggplants at the same time. This way, you can roast a large batch, use some in recipes and freeze the rest for later. This is especially a good method if you are growing eggplants in your garden.
  4. No need to salt eggplant: You do not need to take the step of salting the eggplant before cooking it.

Cons:

  1. Gas stove: You need a gas stove with an open flame. I tried a few other ways, like grilling on a gas grill, but I couldn’t get the char that the direct flame delivers.
  2. It is not hands off: While it is quicker, you have to keep a close eye on it and turn it in every few minutes to ensure even roasting.
  3. It is messy: Below I will show you a quick tip to minimize the cleaning, but still there is a little bit of cleaning afterwards.

How To Fire Roast Eggplant on A Gas Stove Top:

For this method, I used the most popular (and widely available) globe eggplants. However, you can use other eggplant varieties like Italian eggplant and graffiti eggplant as well.

Person preparing eggplant for fire roasting
  1. Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside.
Person laying the bottom of a stove with aluminum foil
  1. Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located (as seen in the photo above) to make it easier for cleaning purposes later on.
Person cooking eggplants on a gas stove on direct fire
  1. Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
Roasted eggplants on stovetop
  1. Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
Person peeling fire roasted eggplants under cold water
  1. Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  2. Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh (aka pulp) to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes.
    Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under the running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
roasted eggplant pulp seeds being taken off by a person
  1. Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use (more on how-to freeze that below.) It is optional, but if there are large seeds, you can remove them with a knife.

How To Store & Freeze:

  • Storage: Place fire roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher (affiliate link) or Zip Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 

Helpful Tips:

  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, it will make your recipe soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.
  • Be sure to season well: If you give your fire-roasted eggplants a taste, they might taste a bit bland. But you should think of it as a blank canvas begging to be flavored. You can make a quick tahini sauce by mixing tahini paste with fresh lemon juice, a few minced garlic cloves, olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper and drizzle it over eggplants. Or, give them a rough chop and mix with fresh produce like tomatoes, green or red onions, fresh parsley to make a chopped eggplant salad.

FAQs:

Do I need to remove the seeds?

The seeds are edible but you can remove the large visible seeds if you want. If your eggplants are older, sometimes seeds might have an unpleasant bitter taste so be sure to give it a quick taste to decide whether or not to remove them.

Do I need to salt eggplant before cooking on the gas stove?

No, you can salt it after it is chargrilled and peeled.

Is eggplant healthy?

Yes, it is. According to Healthline, ” Eggplant is a high-fiber, low-calorie food that is rich in nutrients and comes with many potential health benefits.”

Other Basic Cooking Methods For Eggplants:

Aubergine Recipes You Might Like:

fire roasted eggplants on a plate
Print

Fire Roasted Eggplant Recipe – Cooking eggplants on stovetop

Learn how to make fire roasted eggplant by cooking eggplants on the stove top over direct flame to use in recipes like Stuffed Eggplants, Baba Ganoush, and Baingan Bharta.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 eggplants
Calories 115kcal

Equipment

  • Gas stove
  • Tong
  • Colander

Ingredients

  • 2 globe eggplants

Instructions

  • Rinse & Dry: Rinse eggplants under cold running water. If there is a sticker on them, remove it. Dry with a kitchen towel or a paper towel. Set them aside. There is no need to peel the eggplant for fire roasting it.
  • Prepare your gas range: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil making sure to keep the burners exposed. I usually cut out the part where the burners are located to make it easier for cleaning purposes after the roasting process is completed.
  • Turn the burners on: Turn the burners on medium-heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. I usually put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones.
  • Roast: Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs being very careful to not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
  • Let them cool: Transfer the now-fire roasted eggplant onto a plate and let them cool. This may take between 10-15 minutes.
  • Peel & Drain: Place a colander over a large bowl. When eggplants are cool enough to handle, peel them under cold running water by gently removing the black skin making sure to keep the flesh intact. If some burnt bits of skin are left behind that is okay. Discard the rest of the skin. Transfer the eggplant flesh to the colander and let it drain for 10-15 minutes*. Alternatively, you can skip the whole peeling under running water part and use a small spoon to separate the white flesh from the charred skin.
  • Use it in your recipe or freeze for later use: When ready to use, give it a rough chop or mash them on a cutting board (or food processor) according to the recipe you are following. Or, freeze for later use.

Notes

  • I listed only 2 eggplants in the ingredients list but you can cook as many eggplants as you like.
  • I used globe eggplants but you can use other eggplants like graffiti eggplant, Italian eggplant, etc. The timing might be different but it would still work.
  • Storage: Place fire-roasted eggplant in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing: Once the roasted eggplants are fully drained, place the eggplant pulp in a freezer bag like Stasher or Zip-Lock and get the air out of it as much as you can. 
  • Do not skip the draining process: This is especially important if you are going to make baba ganoush. If you skip this step, your recipe will turn out soggy. 
  • Keep a close eye on the eggplants as they are cooking: For safety purposes, be sure to not leave the side of your eggplants as they are roasting on the gas stove.

Nutrition

Calories: 115kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 1049mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Fire Roasted Eggplant appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fire-roasted-eggplant/feed/ 2
Can You Freeze Quinoa? https://foolproofliving.com/can-you-freeze-quinoa/ https://foolproofliving.com/can-you-freeze-quinoa/#respond Fri, 23 Jul 2021 16:02:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=42874 I recently received an email from a reader asking me, “Can cooked quinoa be frozen?” And if so, how to freeze it properly so that she can use it in her weekly meal plan. The short answer to that question is yes, but there are a few things you need to know for the best way to freeze quinoa. This post is a sequel to the collection of how-to quinoa...

The post Can You Freeze Quinoa? appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I recently received an email from a reader asking me, “Can cooked quinoa be frozen?” And if so, how to freeze it properly so that she can use it in her weekly meal plan. The short answer to that question is yes, but there are a few things you need to know for the best way to freeze quinoa.

This post is a sequel to the collection of how-to quinoa basics. I have already written extensively about How To Season Quinoa, How To Rinse Quinoa, and How To Cook Quinoa Perfectly. If you need a refresher, be sure to check those out as well.

Frozen quinoa portioned out with text on the image

Why Should You Freeze Quinoa?

  • Save time: The main reason to freeze quinoa is to save time. Quinoa freezes well and defrosts quickly, helping you easily incorporate it into salads, soups, or simply serve it as a side dish with any of your dinner recipes
  • Eat Healthy: Having some cooked quinoa on hand helps you eat healthy. Quinoa is a complete protein, meaning that it contains all nine essential amino acids that our bodies cannot make on their own. Adding a cup (or two) cooked quinoa in salads, soups, or skillet meals is a quick, healthy and easy way to up your daily protein intake. Also, since it is a gluten-free pseudo grain, it can be consumed if you have celiac disease.

How To Freeze Cooked Quinoa?

I usually cook a few batches of tricolor and white quinoa on my meal prep day, portion it out, and freeze in the fridge. Here are the steps I follow:

Prepare Quinoa:

Person measuring and rinsing quinoa
  • Measure it for perfect results. I have been cooking quinoa for years and I have learned along the way that the best way to cook quinoa perfectly is to measure it. This way you can easily follow my perfect quinoa to water ratio of 1 part quinoa to 2 parts water. Eyeballing it might result in mushy quinoa. 
  • Rinse Quinoa. There are a few reasons why you should wash quinoa before cooking but the most important one is to get rid of its bitter taste caused by its natural coating, saponin. 

Cook quinoa:

I have shared a few basic ways of how to cook quinoa in detail on this blog, which are below. All of these methods can be multiplied easily if you’d like to cook quinoa in bulk.

PRO Tip: One of the easiest ways to flavor and season quinoa is to cook it in chicken stock or vegetable broth. If you are planning to use your cooked quinoa in savory recipes I highly recommend using stock instead of water.

Bring it to room temperature

It is crucial to make sure that the cooked quinoa comes to full room temperature before freezing. If you miss this step you will end up with chunks of frozen quinoa that has a mushy texture when it is defrosted.

You can do this in two ways:

Person fluffing cooked quinoa
  1. Let cooked quinoa sit for at least 4 hours. If you have time, let the cooked quinoa come to room temperature on its own. Fluff it with a fork before freezing.
Person spreading quinoa on a baking sheet to cool off
  1. Spread it on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper (Recommended) For faster cooling, spread cooked quinoa on a sheet pan on an even layer. Depending on the temperature of your kitchen, it takes about 20-30 minutes for it to cool completely to room temperature.

Portion It Out & Label

Person placing measured cooked quinoa in a plastic bag to freeze
  1. Portion out the cooked quinoa: Using a measuring cup, portion it out. I usually like to save them in one cup and two-cups increments to use in quinoa salads or simple quinoa bowls like my Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl recipe
Person getting the air out of freezer bag with cooked quinoa in it.
  1. Store: Place now-cooled quinoa in either a resealable plastic bag (such as a Ziploc Bag), heavy-duty freezer bags, or reusable silicone bags (affiliate link) like you see in the pictures.
  2. Remove the air as much as possible: Gently press the bag to get the air out of it as much as you can and seal tightly. This is an important step to prevent freezer burn.
Labeled quinoa in freezer bags
  1. Label: Write the date and amount of quinoa you are freezing on freezer friendly labels and stick it to each bag.
  2. Freeze: Place in the freezer and let it freeze for at least 24 hours before defrosting.

You can follow the same freezing process for leftover quinoa as well.

How Long Does Cooked Quinoa Last In the Freezer?

When stored properly, frozen quinoa will last in the freezer for up to 6-8 months.

How To Defrost Frozen Quinoa?

The best thing about frozen quinoa is that there is no need to remember to take it out of the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Instead, you can take it out of the freezer and let it thaw on the counter for 45 – 60 minutes before using it in your recipe.

You can enjoy cooked quinoa cold or quickly warm it up in the microwave or on the stove top.

If you are warming it up on the stove top, I recommend adding a teaspoon of oil in the pan and stirring occasionally to warm it so that it won’t stick to the bottom of the pan. If it feels dry, feel free to add in a few tablespoons of water as it cooks.

You can also add frozen quinoa directly to soups and skillet meals. This might extend the cooking time for a few extra minutes but it will be much faster than cooking it from scratch.

person showing cooked quinoa in plastic bag

FAQs:

How long does cooked quinoa last in the fridge?

Cooked quinoa will last in the fridge for up to 5 days as long as it is stored in an airtight container.

How do you know if quinoa has spoiled?

You can tell that quinoa has gone bad if it smells bad and has a change in its texture and/or aroma. This would usually be due to the presence of mold or bacteria, which may be visible. 
If it doesn’t look right or if it has an unpleasant smell, discard it immediately.

Can you freeze quinoa salad with veggies?

It depends on the quinoa salad recipe you are using. As a rule of thumb, I would not recommend freezing salads made with fresh leafy salad greens and vegetables.

How long does dry quinoa last?

Since quinoa is sold dry, it has a long shelf life. Dry uncooked quinoa will last for up to 3 to 4 years in its original packaging as long as it is kept in a dry, cool dark place such as a pantry or a cupboard.
Most health food stores sell quinoa in their bulk bin section. If you buy it from there, I recommend purchasing it in small quantities and using it within a month or two.

Can you freeze uncooked quinoa?

You can. Unopened packs of quinoa can be stored in the freezer. If you open the packet and use some, be sure to get the air out as much as possible.

Should I keep dry quinoa in the fridge?

You can store uncooked, opened packets of dry quinoa in the fridge. Doing so will help keep it fresh for a longer period of time and will especially help with keeping it fresh if it is approaching its expiration date.

Does the type of quinoa I use change the freezing process?

It does not. You can use the same freezing method for white, red, tricolor or black quinoa.

Freezer-Friendly Quinoa recipes

Because of the increase in the popularity of gluten-free diets in the last decade, quinoa has taken its well deserved place in most pantries.

In our household, we are not following a strict gluten-free diet but I include quinoa in my daily cooking because of all of its benefits, ease of cooking, and earthy flavor. Below are a few freezer friendly recipes I make often:

Equipment You Will Need:

Below are the equipment I own, use, and recommend for freezing quinoa. They are affiliate links.

Frozen quinoa packets in different color reusable bags
Print

How to Freeze Cooked Quinoa?

Can you freeze cooked quinoa? The short answer is yes, but here are the foolproof steps to freeze quinoa to have it ready for you whenever you need.
Course Side
Cuisine American
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 pouches

Equipment

  • Freezer friendly storage bags

Ingredients

  • Cooked Quinoa

Instructions

  • Cool quinoa: Spread cooked quinoa on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper on a single layer. Depending on the temperature of your kitchen, it takes about 30 minutes for it to cool completely to room temperature.
  • Measure: Using a measuring cup, portion it out. I usually like to save them in one cup and two-cups increments to use in quinoa salads or simple quinoa bowls.
  • Store: Place cooked quinoa in either a resealable plastic bag (such as a Ziploc Bag), heavy-duty freezer bags, or reusable silicone bags like you see in the pictures.
  • Get the air out as much as you can: Gently press the bag to get the air out of it as much as you can and seal tightly. This is an important step to prevent freezer burn.
  • Label: Write the date and amount of quinoa you are freezing on freezer friendly labels and stick it to each bag.
  • Freeze: Place in the freezer and let it freeze for at least 24 hours before defrosting.

Notes

  • If you need help on cooking quinoa be sure to check out my post on How To Cook Quinoa Perfectly
  • When stored properly, frozen quinoa will last in the freezer for up to 6-8 months.
  • To defrost: The best thing about frozen quinoa is that there is no need to remember to take it out of the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Instead, you can take it out of the freezer and let it thaw on the counter for 45 – 60 minutes before using it in your recipe.
  • You can use this method for any type of quinoa. White quinoa, red quinoa, black quinoa and tricolor quinoa would all work.

The post Can You Freeze Quinoa? appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/can-you-freeze-quinoa/feed/ 0
Instant Pot Black Rice https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-instant-pot/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-instant-pot/#respond Fri, 09 Jul 2021 00:44:30 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=41665 It is no secret that simple whole grain recipes make the perfect side dish. I prefer cooking them in an electric pressure cooker as they cook faster with very little hands-on cooking time. I know you like it because my Instant Pot Quinoa, Instant Pot Jasmine Brown Rice, and Instant Pot Wild Rice are some of the most popular recipes on this site. Today, we are adding one more recipe...

The post Instant Pot Black Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that simple whole grain recipes make the perfect side dish. I prefer cooking them in an electric pressure cooker as they cook faster with very little hands-on cooking time. I know you like it because my Instant Pot Quinoa, Instant Pot Jasmine Brown Rice, and Instant Pot Wild Rice are some of the most popular recipes on this site.

Today, we are adding one more recipe to the collection with this quick black rice in Instant Pot recipe. If you are like me, a fan of this ancient Chinese whole grain rice, you will be surprised to see how easy it is to cook it in an electric pressure cooker. Plus, compared to cooking black rice on the stove top or in the rice cooker, this method is hands-off and delivers perfect results every time.

Forbidden rice in a bowl with a leaf of parsley on top

Serve it as a side dish with chicken, beef, or vegetarian main dishes or turn it into a quick and flavorful salad using my Black Rice Salad recipe.

Why I Love This Recipe:

  • No Need for Soaking the rice: If you have the ingredients on hand, you don’t have to plan ahead to make this tasty side.
  • Consistent: Cooking forbidden rice in an instant pot delivers perfect results every time without any fuss, which is why it is my favorite method of cooking it.
  • Hands Off: You won’t have to keep an eye on this black rice. The active cooking time is minimal, so you can make it and get back to your other dishes.
  • Good for You: This gluten-free side has impressive health benefits like high levels of protein and dietary fiber content with antioxidant and anti-inflammatory properties.

Ingredients:

This  Instant Pot black rice recipe technically requires only two ingredients: black rice and water. It is optional, but you can also use a pinch of salt and a teaspoon of oil (such as olive oil, avocado oil, or ghee) for flavor.

Ingredients for the recipe are on a marble backdrop

In terms of the cooking liquid, you can swap water with vegetable broth or homemade chicken stock for more flavor.

What Brand Black Rice Should I buy?

When shopping for black rice (aka Chinese Forbidden Rice), you might find some other varieties like Black Sticky Rice (aka black glutinous rice or Thai black rice) or Black Japonica Rice.

I tested this recipe with Nature’s Earthly Choice (affiliate link), Lotus Foods (affiliate link) brands of Chinese black rice, and Rice King Black Sticky Rice. All of them delivered great results.

Check out my Forbidden Rice recipe post to learn more about the types of black rice.

Forbidden Rice to Water Ratio For Cooking In Instant Pot

The ratio for Instant Pot forbidden rice to water is easy to remember: one cup of black rice will require one cup of water (or chicken stock or vegetable broth).

How much water you use depends on how much rice you would like to make. To double it, use two cups of black rice with two cups of water.

How to Make Black Rice in Instant Pot?

Person showing how to rinse black forbidden rice with two photos
  1. Rinse Forbidden Rice: Start by rinsing the rice in a fine-mesh strainer under cold water until water runs clear.
Person showing steps of cooking black japonica rice in a pressure cooker in four how to photos.
  1. Place Black Rice in Instant Pot: Transfer the black rice to the Instant Pot, and pour in the liquid and a pinch of salt, if using.
  2. Secure the lid: Once you secure the lid, move the steam release valve to the sealing position.
  3. Select Manual/Pressure Cook: It typically takes about 5-7 minutes for the Instant Pot to come to pressure. Press the pressure cook button to cook on high pressure for 17 minutes if you are cooking Chinese black rice and 20 minutes if you are cooking Black Glutinous Rice.
  4. Use the Natural Pressure Release: When the cooking cycle is complete, use the Instant Pot natural release setting for 8-10 minutes, then move the steam release valve to the venting position to release any remaining pressure. You don’t need to use the quick release for this recipe.
Person showing cooked black glutinous rice on a wooden spoon over pressure cooker
  1. Serve: Carefully open the lid, fluff rice with a fork, and serve. Or use it in one of the other black rice recipes.

How to Store and Reheat?

  • Storage: You can store leftover rice for up to three days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.
  • Reheating: Reheating black rice is simple. You can put it in a bowl in the microwave or heat it gently in a saucepan on the stovetop. You may have to add in a few tablespoons of water if it is too dry.

Expert Tips and Variations:

How to Serve?

This dish is so versatile that you can pair it with nearly anything. It can effortlessly become a side dish, part of a main, or even a dessert.

FAQs:

How Long Does It Take to Cook Black Rice in Instant Pot?

The active cooking time will depend on which type of black rice you use. Chinese black rice/Forbidden rice in Instant Pot will take about 17 minutes of pressure cook time. Black glutinous rice will be about 20 minutes to cook in the Instant Pot.
However, keep in mind that it typically takes 5-7 minutes for the Instant Pot to come to pressure first. Then you will cook the rice as listed above (from 17-20 minutes). After, it takes about 10 minutes for the pressure to release. So, most black rice dishes come together in an Instant Pot in about 30 minutes total.

How Much Does One Cup Uncooked Black Rice Yield After It Is Cooked in an Instant Pot?

One cup of uncooked black rice typically yields three cups after cooking.

How Long Does Black Rice Keep?

Uncooked black rice is shelf-stable, which is another reason it makes for a great last-minute side dish. Uncooked black rice will stay fresh in a dark and dry pantry for up to two years.
After you’ve cooked the black rice, put it in an airtight container in the refrigerator, and it will last up to three days.

Do I Need to Grease the Inner Pot of My Instant Pot Before Cooking Black Rice?

No need to use olive oil or butter is necessary, it won’t stick which makes this a healthy, low-calorie recipe.

Is Black Rice Gluten-Free?

Yes, black rice (or even the black glutinous rice) is gluten-free making it great side dish for people with celiac disease or gluten sensitivities.

cooked black rice in a bowl in front of an instant pot
Print

Instant Pot Black Rice Recipe (Pressure Cooker Method)

Learn how to cook black rice in an instant pot with my easy foolproof method. Packed with numerous health benefits, this delicious grain is going to be your next favorite side dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Asian
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 17 minutes
Coming to pressure & release pressure 12 minutes
Total Time 31 minutes
Servings 3 cups
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup black rice aka forbidden rice
  • 1 cup water chicken stock or vegetable broth
  • Pinch of salt optional

Instructions

  • Rinse forbidden rice in a fine-mesh strainer under cold water until water runs clear.
  • Transfer it to the Instant pot, pour in the liquid, and a pinch of salt, if using.
  • Secure the lid. Move the steam release valve to Sealing position.
  • Select Manual/Pressure Cook to cook on high pressure for 17 minutes.
  • When the cooking cycle is complete, let the pressure naturally release for 8-10 minutes, then move the steam release valve to Venting position to release any remaining pressure.
  • Carefully open the lid. Fluff it with a fork and serve.

Notes

  • The nutritional values below are for 1 cup cooked black rice.
  • The active cooking time will vary based on the type of wild rice you are cooking. If you are using:
    • Chinese black rice/Forbidden rice: It will take about 17 minutes cook time.
    • Black glutinous rice in pressure cooker: It will take about 20 minutes.
    • Black Japonica rice in Instant Pot or pressure cooker: It will take about 20 minutes.
      However, keep in mind that it typically takes 5-7 minutes for the Instant Pot to come to pressure first. Then you will cook the rice as listed above (from 17-20 minutes). After, it takes about 10 minutes for the pressure to release. So, most black rice dishes come together in an Instant Pot in about 30-33 minutes total.
  • Storage: You can store leftover rice for up to three days in the refrigerator in an airtight container.
  • Reheating: Reheating black rice is simple. You can put it in a bowl in the microwave or heat it gently in a saucepan on the stovetop. You may have to add in a few tablespoons of water if it is too dry.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 8mg | Potassium: 138mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Instant Pot Black Rice appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-instant-pot/feed/ 0
Black Rice in Rice Cooker https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-in-rice-cooker/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-in-rice-cooker/#respond Fri, 09 Jul 2021 00:40:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=42130 Today, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of whole grain dishes with this Rice Cooker Black Rice recipe. Consider this a sequel to my foolproof recipe for Black Rice on the stove following the quickest method of cooking this ancient grain, Instant Pot Black Rice recipe, which comes together in about thirty minutes. This Black Rice in Rice Cooker recipe is timeless and easy. Known as the...

The post Black Rice in Rice Cooker appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Today, I am adding a new recipe to my collection of whole grain dishes with this Rice Cooker Black Rice recipe. Consider this a sequel to my foolproof recipe for Black Rice on the stove following the quickest method of cooking this ancient grain, Instant Pot Black Rice recipe, which comes together in about thirty minutes.

This Black Rice in Rice Cooker recipe is timeless and easy. Known as the Emperor’s rice in ancient China, the health benefits of black rice are well-known. It contains powerful antioxidant properties, Vitamin E, and fiber that help fight against cardiovascular disease.

A bowl of cooked forbidden rice in front of an aroma rice cooker

Why You Should Make Black Rice in Rice Cooker

  • Hands Off: No need to babysit when cooking black rice in a rice cooker. Just get it started and let it do its thing.
  • Reliable: You get perfectly cooked black rice every time.
  • No Soaking Necessary: You don’t need to soak the black rice, so it is perfect for those times when you did not plan ahead.
  • Easy to Include in Your Meal Prep: There aren’t many complicated steps or ingredients. It stores well and pairs with most main dishes.

Ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe are in small cups

This dish comes together with just four simple ingredients: water (or chicken stock or vegetable broth), salt, any type of vegetable oil (or butter), and black rice. Using fewer ingredients allows the black rice taste and naturally nutty flavor to shine through.

What type/brand of black rice should I use?

As I covered in detail in this black rice recipe post, there are currently three main types of Black rice sold in the grocery stores in the United States (affiliate links): 

  1. Heirloom Forbidden Black Rice by Nature’s Earthly Choice  
  2. Black Japonica Rice™and Black Pearl Rice by Lundberg Family Farms
  3. Thai Black Glutinous Rice or Black Sweet Rice (aka Thai Black Sticky Rice ) 

I have tested this recipe with every one of these types of black rice and other than the texture (Glutinous rice was a bit more stickier than the others), the cooking ratios were the same.

Water to Black Rice Ratio for Rice Cooker

For those wondering how much water or how much rice you need, the ratio of water to black rice is 1 ¾ to 1.

In other words, for each cup of black rice, you’ll need 1 ¾ cups of water, chicken stock, or vegetable broth. Since it is more universal, I use a standard cup measuring cup rather than the cup that comes with the rice cooker.

How to cook forbidden rice in a rice cooker?

I used my Aroma rice cooker (affiliate link) to cook black rice. Depending on the rice cooker you are using there might be a slight difference in the method so be sure to check your manual before cooking.

Person washing black rice in sink using a fine mesh strainer
  1. Rinse the Rice: Place black rice in a medium-mesh strainer and wash under cold water until it runs clear.
  2. Grease the Inner Pot: Cover the rice cooker insert with a tablespoon of vegetable oil (or a tablespoon of butter) to prevent sticking. I use a sheet of paper towel to distribute the oil evenly throughout the insert.
Person showing steps to preparing black forbidden rice in a rice cooker
  1. Combine the Ingredients: Add rinsed black rice, liquid of your choice, and a pinch of salt to the rice cooker. Give it a stir.
  2. Close the Lid and Select a Setting: Put the lid on and press the brown rice setting (or brown rice mode) on your rice cooker. If your rice cooker does not have that function, just press “cook.”
  3. Let It Cook: It should take somewhere between 50-60 minutes for it to cook completely.
person fluffing cooked purple forbidden rice in a rice cooker
  1. Fluff and Serve: Once it is done, open the lid and fluff the cooked rice with a fork before serving.

How Long Does It Take?

The cooking time for black rice in my Aroma Rice Cooker (affiliate link) was about 50-60 minutes. Though the timing might be a bit more or a bit less depending on the brand of rice cooker you are using.

Expert Tips For Success

  • Grease the Bottom: Black rice – especially black glutinous rice (Thai Black Sticky Rice) – will stick unless you use some oil. 
  • Use chicken stock or vegetable broth for cooking liquid: As it is the case with cooking quinoa, bulgur, and wild rice, using chicken stock or vegetable broth immediately elevates the dish and makes it more flavorful. You can use all broth or mix a portion of it with water.
  • Drain excess water: During my recipe testings I did not have an instance where I had excess water at the bottom of the rice cooker insert but if that happens to you simply drain the liquid before serving it.
  • Don’t Wear White: Black rice stains clothes and hands easily, so be careful when handling it.
A bowl of purple rice in a bowl with a spoon on the side

FAQs:

Do I have to rinse black rice before cooking in the rice cooker?

Popular recipe website TheKitchn suggests that rinsing black rice before cooking will wash away its nutrients too. However, I found other resources say that giving it a quick rinse removes excess starch and prevents it from having a mushy texture at the end. 
I do not rinse black rice if I am cooking it on the stove top or in my pressure cooker. And honestly, mine never turned out mushy.
However, I do rinse it in my rice cooker as the manual recommends doing so. So, I recommend checking your manual to see if it offers specific instructions to cook black rice and follow it accordingly.

How to cook black glutinous rice in a rice cooker?

The method and water to black rice ratio for cooking black glutinous rice is the same. Mix 1 cup of rinsed black sticky rice with 1 ¾ cups of water (or chicken or vegetable broth), close the lid, and set it to “brown rice” setting.

Is black rice and purple rice the same thing?

Yes, because of its dark purple color black rice is also called purple rice or purple forbidden rice.

A bowl of cooked black rice in front of a rice cooker
Print

Black Rice in Rice Cooker Recipe

If you are looking for a hands off method for cooking black rice you are in the right place. Cooking black rice in a rice cooker is easy and deliver perfectly cooked rice every time.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Asian Cuisine
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 3 cups
Calories 268kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 1 cup black rice
  • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable or chicken stock
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt optional

Instructions

  • Place black rice in a medium-mesh strainer and wash under cold running water until it runs clear.
  • Grease the rice cooker insert with a tablespoon of vegetable oil to prevent sticking. I use a sheet of paper towel to distribute the oil evenly throughout the insert.
  • Place rinsed black rice, liquid of your choice, and salt. Give it a stir.
  • Put the lid on and press the brown rice setting on your rice cooker. If your rice cooker does not have that function, then just press “cook”.
  • It should take somewhere between 50-60 minutes for it to cook completely.
  • Once it is done, open the lid, and fluff it with a fork before serving.

Notes

  • The nutrition information below is for 1 cup of cooked black rice.
  • Depending on the rice cooker you are using there might be a slight difference in the method so be sure to check your manual before cooking.
  • Storage leftover black rice in an airtight container in the fridge up to 5 days.
  • You can follow the same recipe and water to rice ratio to cook Black Glutinous Rice in the rice cooker. 

Nutrition

Calories: 268kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 399mg | Potassium: 138mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Black Rice in Rice Cooker appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/black-rice-in-rice-cooker/feed/ 0
How to Cook Quinoa On Stove https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-quinoa-on-stove/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-quinoa-on-stove/#comments Mon, 17 May 2021 17:27:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=41073 I don’t know about you, but I can eat quinoa every day. That probably explains why I have so many quinoa recipes on this blog. In today’s post, we are going back to basics, and I am sharing everything you need to know about How to Cook Quinoa on the Stovetop Perfectly. I have already shared my foolproof recipes for Microwave Quinoa, Rice Cooker Quinoa, and Instant Pot Quinoa. So,...

The post How to Cook Quinoa On Stove appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I don’t know about you, but I can eat quinoa every day. That probably explains why I have so many quinoa recipes on this blog. In today’s post, we are going back to basics, and I am sharing everything you need to know about How to Cook Quinoa on the Stovetop Perfectly.

I have already shared my foolproof recipes for Microwave Quinoa, Rice Cooker Quinoa, and Instant Pot Quinoa. So, consider this a sequel.

White, red, black, and tricolor cooked quinoa fluffed in pan with wooden spoon on the side

If you need a refresher on basic cooking methods like this one, be sure to check out my detailed 101 posts on How To Cook Wild Rice, How To Cook Bulgur Wheat and How To Cook Black Rice posts as well.

How To Prepare Quinoa

Person measuring and rinsing quinoa
  • Measure Quinoa: Whether you cook white, red, black, or tricolor quinoa, I recommend measuring it first. I usually use a cup measure, but you can find detailed weight information for measuring different types of quinoa below:
    • 1 cup dry (raw) white quinoa: 6.7 ounces – 190 gr.
    • 1 cup dry red quinoa (aka brown quinoa): 7 ounces – 198 gr.
    • 1 cup dry black quinoa: 7 ounces – 198 gr.
    • 1 cup tricolor quinoa (aka rainbow quinoa): 7.1 ounces – 201 gr.
  • Rinse Quinoa Under Cold Running Water: To rinse quinoa, place it in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse thoroughly under cold water for 30 to 60 seconds or until the water runs clear. 

Why rinse quinoa? Quinoa has a natural coating called saponin. Saponin, a chemical compound with a bitter taste, is a self-defense mechanism to protect itself from microbes, birds, insects, and other foraging animals in its natural habitat.

While most quinoa sold on the market today has its saponin removed, rinsing quinoa ensures that any leftover saponin residue is entirely removed, making sure that its bitter taste doesn’t carry over to your perfectly cooked quinoa.

Want to know more about rinsing quinoa? Check out my post about How To Wash Quinoa.

Quinoa To Water Ratio (Quinoa Proportions)

When it comes to cooking quinoa on the stovetop, regardless of the type/color of the quinoa you are using (i.e., white, red, black, and tricolor quinoa), the ratio of quinoa to water is 1 to 2. 

In other words, for every 1 cup of quinoa, you use 2 cups of liquid. In terms of liquid, you can use water, chicken stock, or vegetable broth. 

With that being said, the question of how much water to use for cooking quinoa has been a source of discussion in some popular websites like TheKitchn and Goop. Both websites swear by a 1 to 1 ¾ cup ratio (meaning 1 cup of quinoa to 1 ¾ cups of liquid) when cooking quinoa on the stove. 

Intrigued, I put both ratios to test and cooked a batch of each type of quinoa in my kitchen. In the end, I honestly thought that the difference in taste was very minimal. 

Yes, the 1:2 ratio was moister (and perhaps a tiny bit more watery), whereas the 1: 1 ¾ ratio had a drier and denser texture, but I felt like they were pretty similar.

In all my testings, I felt the more important thing was to let it rest for at least 10 minutes after the cooking was completed. In my opinion, as long as you are using a pot with a tight-fitting lid and letting it rest after it is cooked, you will end up with a perfectly cooked and fluffy quinoa in either ratio.

Interesting Find: In the cookbook, The Everyday Superfood Quinoa (affiliate link) states that the ratio of water to quinoa will also depend on the age of your dry quinoa. The older the seeds, the more water you will need.

While I do my best to buy my quinoa from a supermarket with a high turnover, it is good to know that the age of the dry quinoa also plays a role in the cooking ratio.

How To Make Quinoa? Step By Step Instructions

The basic process for cooking quinoa on the stovetop is as follows:

Quinoa cooking instructions step by step in four photos
  1. Place rinsed and drained quinoa, water (or chicken broth or veggie broth), and a pinch of salt (optional) into a pot with a tight-fitting lid. Stir it and put the lid on.
  2. Turn the heat to medium-high and bring it to a boil. It should take about 3-4 minutes for it to come to a boil.
  3. As soon as it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it simmer. 

Even though the step-by-step photos I am sharing here show cooking instructions for white quinoa, you can use the same method for cooking black quinoa, red quinoa, and tri-color quinoa.

How Long To Cook Quinoa:

Now, you might be asking yourself, what is the ideal cooking time for quinoa? During my testing for the best quinoa recipe, I found that the timing changes based on the type of quinoa you are using. 

Once it comes to a boil, the optimal simmering time for each type of quinoa is below:

  • White quinoa (aka Pearl Quinoa): 15 minutes
  • Red quinoa (aka Brown Quinoa): 18 minutes
  • Black Quinoa: 20 minutes
  • Tri-Color Quinoa ( aka Multicolor or Rainbow quinoa): 18 minutes (the timing might change based on the brand you are using)

How To Tell When Quinoa Is Cooked?

An image showing properly cooked quinoa

You will know that the quinoa is done cooking when most of the liquid in the pan is absorbed with tiny air holes on the surface, and some of the quinoa seeds look like they have popped open, revealing the germ of the kernel.

What If I Am Left with Liquid in The Pan After It is Cooked?

During my testings, I learned that while the general 1 cup quinoa to 2 cups liquid work for most packaged quinoa brands, with a few brands, I was left with some liquid at the bottom even after the cooking time was completed and my quinoa looked like it was fully cooked.

If that happens to you, you can do one of two things:

  • Drain the liquid: Let your quinoa rest for 10 minutes and drain the liquid using a strainer.
  • Let it rest longer: Let it rest with the lid on for 30 minutes or so. It should absorb all the liquid as it sits. The texture might be a little bit mushy, but you’ll still have a perfectly cooked quinoa.

How To Make Fluffy Quinoa:

Once the quinoa is cooked, turn off the heat and let it sit covered for 10 minutes. When ready to serve, gently fluff it with a fork.

Person fluffing perfectly cooked quinoa with a fork

During my recipe testings, I found out that letting it rest covered without touching is the secret to perfectly cooked quinoa that is perfect every time. If you skip this step, you will likely end up with mushy quinoa that is somewhat sticky.

How Much Does 1 Cup Quinoa Make?

The answer to this question depends on the type of quinoa you are using. I tested every kind of quinoa and measured each type in my kitchen using my own kitchen scale. Below you will find the weight measurements of each type of cooked quinoa.

Four cooked quinoa types are in bowls from top view
  • White Quinoa: 1 cup of dry quinoa yields approximately 3 ¾ cups of cooked quinoa that is equal to 19.50 ounces.
  • Red Quinoa: 1 cup of red quinoa yields approximately 4 cups of cooked red quinoa that is equal to 24 ounces.
  • Black Quinoa: 1 cup black quinoa yields approximately 3 ½ cups of cooked quinoa that is equal to 21 ounces.
  • Tri-Color Quinoa (aka Multi-Color): 1 cup multicolor quinoa yields approximately 4 cups of cooked quinoa that is equal to 18.80 ounces.

How To Flavor Quinoa?

If you look at the stovetop quinoa recipe below, you will see that it is a basic one. While you can certainly enjoy it by itself, you can make it super flavorful and delicious with just a few minor changes.

Person flavoring quinoa with oil and chicken stock

And since there are so many ways you can flavor your quinoa, I wrote a detailed blog post about How To Make Quinoa Taste Good. However, below are a few ways to get you started:

  • Add some seasoning to the pot during the cooking process: Some of my favorite quinoa seasoning ingredients are a dried bay leaf, a clove of garlic (used as a whole), fresh herbs (like chopped parsley or dill), or a pinch of salt and some freshly ground black pepper. Simply add the seasonings of your choice into the pot at the same time with the liquid and cook as directed.
  • Add in a tablespoon of butter or coconut oil: Adding a little bit of fat into the cooking liquid enhances the flavor. I love a tablespoon of butter, but you can use any oil (i.e., coconut oil, avocado oil, olive oil) you have on hand. Simply add your favorite oil into the pan while you add the liquid and cook as directed. 
  • Cook quinoa with chicken stock instead of water: Cooking quinoa in vegetable or chicken stock is probably the easiest way to flavor it. You can simply swap the water with your choice of stock and use the same amount for cooking your quinoa. Alternatively, if you prefer, you can also use half water and half stock. As long as you follow the 1 cup quinoa to 2 cups of liquid ratio, you should be fine.

Best Way To Store Cooked Quinoa:

Store cooked quinoa in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze quinoa to have it on hand in a quick and efficient way. If you want to know more about freezing quinoa, be sure to read my post on How To Freeze Cooked Quinoa.

Equipment Needed to Cook Quinoa on Stovetop: 

To cook the perfect quinoa, you will need the following equipment:

  • Fine Mesh Strainer: Using a fine mesh strainer is by far the best way to rinse quinoa. This fine mesh strainer (affiliate link) is the one I use and recommend. 
  • A Pot with a lid: I recommend using a pot with a tight-fitting lid that does not have a hole in it so that you can easily trap all the water (and steam) in the pot. Since I usually cook one cup of quinoa, I prefer this pot (affiliate link) that is 7-inches in diameter. It is the white pan you see in the photos.
  • A Fork: Once the quinoa is cooked and rested, I use a dinner fork to fluff it.
  • Airtight Container: I am a big fan of these meal prep containers (affiliate link) to store cooked quinoa.

FAQs:

What is Quinoa?

Quinoa is an ancient grain (pseudo-grain) with a nutty flavor that originated in the Andes in South America. Pronounced “KEEN-wah,” Healthline calls it one of the healthiest foods on the planet as it is highly nutritious and packed with several minerals and vitamins. Additionally, quinoa is considered a “complete protein,” a term used for foods containing all nine essential amino acids that our bodies cannot make on their own.

Do you have to soak quinoa before cooking?

If you are unsure whether the quinoa you purchased has had the saponin removed (this might be the case if you are buying from a bulk foods section of your supermarket), I recommend soaking it.

To soak quinoa, place it in a bowl and cover it with enough water to cover it by 1-inch. Let stand, stirring a few times for at least 5 minutes or up to 2 hours. Drain it through a fine-mesh sieve and rinse thoroughly under cold water for 30-60 seconds.

Do You Add Salt When Cooking Quinoa?

It is a personal choice, but if you want your cooked quinoa to be properly seasoned and flavorful, I recommend adding ½ teaspoon of kosher salt for every cup of raw quinoa.

Does Quinoa Absorb Water Like Rice?

Yes, it does. The cooking time would be different, but quinoa would absorb water like white rice.

What is the ideal quinoa portion size per person? How much quinoa to cook per person?

When I serve quinoa with chicken, beef, or vegetable main dishes, I usually serve between ½ to ¾ cup of cooked quinoa per serving. If you cook one 1 cup raw quinoa, it should provide you with four servings as a side dish. 

The Best Quinoa Recipes:

The best thing about quinoa is that it has various uses and can be enjoyed for breakfast, lunch, and dinner. With its mild and nutty flavor, it is easy to incorporate into various dishes. Below are a few of our favorite easy quinoa recipes:

Perfectly cooked quinoa in a bowl with a spoon on the side
Print

How To Cook Quinoa on Stove Recipe

Learn how to make quinoa on the stovetop to make perfectly cooked and fluffy quinoa every time. I made sure to cover proper cooking times for each type of quinoa (white, red, black, and tricolor quinoa).
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 156kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup white quinoa
  • 2 cups water (Chicken Stock or Vegetable Broth would also work)
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place raw quinoa in a fine-mesh strainer and rinse under cold water. Drain.
  • Place rinsed and drained quinoa, water (or chicken broth or veggie broth), and a pinch of salt (optional) into a pot with a tight-fitting lid. Stir it and put the lid on.
  • Turn the heat to medium-high and bring it to a boil. It should take about 3-4 minutes for it to come to a boil.
  • As soon as it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until all of the liquid is absorbed.
  • Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes (covered). Fluff it with a fork and serve.

Notes

  • You can use this recipe to cook red, black and tricolor quinoa as well. However, be aware that the cooking time might vary. For red quinoa let it simmer for 18 minutes, for black quinoa let it simmer for 20 minutes, and for multi color quinoa let it simmer for 18 minutes.
  • 1 cup raw white quinoa yields approximately 3 3/4 cups of cooked white quinoa.
  • How to tell when quinoa is done cooking? You will know that the quinoa is done cooking when most of the liquid in the pan is absorbed with tiny air holes on the surface, and some of the quinoa seeds look like they have popped open, revealing the germ of the kernel.
  • For additional flavoring you can add in a tablespoon of olive oil or butter into the cooking liquid. You can also use chicken or vegetable stock instead of water as your cooking liquid.
  • Best way to store: Place cooked quinoa in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Want to use a different technique to cook quinoa? Check out my Microwave Quinoa, Pressure Cooker Quinoa and Rice Cooker Quinoa recipes.

Nutrition

Calories: 156kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 299mg | Potassium: 239mg | Fiber: 3g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How to Cook Quinoa On Stove appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-cook-quinoa-on-stove/feed/ 11
Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-chicken-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-chicken-stock/#comments Tue, 11 May 2021 23:01:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=441 The first time I saw Ina Garten make chicken stock, I was happily surprised because it was exactly how my mom made it. Watching her on that day, I could feel the smell of chicken simmering on the stove for hours. I think we can all agree that homemade chicken stock is superior to any brand you buy at the grocery store. Packed with fresh ingredients (like vegetables and herbs)...

The post Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The first time I saw Ina Garten make chicken stock, I was happily surprised because it was exactly how my mom made it. Watching her on that day, I could feel the smell of chicken simmering on the stove for hours.

I think we can all agree that homemade chicken stock is superior to any brand you buy at the grocery store. Packed with fresh ingredients (like vegetables and herbs) and whole chicken, it provides a nice balance of flavor. Plus, you can make it work with whatever vegetables you have on hand. 

Chicken stock in a plastic container at the front with a person in the background

I love to use it as the base for Hearty Chicken and Vegetable Soup, Crockpot Chicken Tomatillo Soup, Chicken Wild Rice Soup, and so much more!

Why You Should Make This Recipe

I like to think of homemade stock as liquid gold. I love it because it’s:

  1. Taste and quality are far better than anything you will buy in a box.
  2. Easy to prepare and can simmer on the stove while you’re meal prepping for the week.
  3. A two-for-one recipe since you can use the leftover chicken and save the scraps, too!
  4. It can be made with whatever vegetables (or scraps) you have on hand. Take the below recipe for chicken stock as a place to start and adjust it according to what you have in your fridge. More on that below.

Ingredient Notes + Substitutions:

The ingredient list includes medium carrots, celery stalks (with leaves), parsnips (optional), large yellow onions, a whole head of garlic, kosher salt, fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh dill, whole peppercorns, roasting chickens, and cold water.

Ingredients are placed in bowls on a marble backdrop

Below are a few helpful notes, including a few substitutions:

  • Whole Chicken vs. Chicken Pieces: In her recipe, Ina Garten uses three 5-pound roasting chickens (aka whole chickens) and cooks them in a 16 to 20-quart stockpot (such as this Le Creuset Stock Pot (affiliate link)). If you do not own a stock pot that big, use the largest pot you own. If you do so, use one large (or two smaller) roasting chickens instead. You can also use 7-10 pieces of chicken parts if you prefer.
  • Chicken to water ratio: Ina uses 7 quarts of water for three whole chickens. If your stock pot is smaller, I recommend covering the chicken and veggies with water by at least 1-2 inches.
  • Do I have to peel vegetables when making chicken stock? No need to peel anything. Like my mom, Ina washes all the veggies under cold tap water, cuts them into large pieces, and adds them to the stockpot. The peels are good for the stock and leave many good things behind, like more flavor, color, and vitamins.
  • Spices & Seasoning: Ina uses a combination of black and white peppercorns in terms of spices. She also suggests seasoning the liquid well with 2 tablespoons of Diamond kosher salt (affiliate link).
  • Vegetables: While Ina uses carrots, celery, onions, parsnips, and garlic, you can use other vegetables as well. If I have them on hand, I also like to add mushrooms, leeks, shallots, red onion, and one or two bay leaves.

How to Make Chicken Stock from Scratch?

Barefoot Contessa’s chicken stock recipe takes about four hours to make. I like to make it on days when I will be hanging about the house or getting my meal prep together for the week. Simply:

Showing how to make homemade chicken stock with step by step photos
  1. Place all ingredients in a large pot. (I used a Dutch oven but if you do not have one, use the biggest one you have on hand).
  2. Add water and bring it to a boil.
Chicken stock simmering in a large pot
  1. Turn it down to medium-low heat and simmer it uncovered for 4 hours. Remove the surface fat with a spoon as necessary.
Person straining stock over a bowl with a ladle
  1. Strain the entire contents of the pot in batches through a fine-mesh strainer. 
  2. Pack the liquid in airtight containers and refrigerate for a week or freeze up to 4 months.

Helpful Tips On Straining:

Admittedly, the straining part is my least favorite part of making my own chicken stock. If you feel the same way, here are a few ways to make it easier:

  1. Use a large glass bowl (or a measuring bowl) with an easy pour spout: This makes it so much easier to pour the hot chicken stock into containers later on.
  2. Put your ladle to use: Remember, the whole thing is still very hot, so it is easier to use a ladle to move the contents of the pot into the container fitted with the strainer.
  3. Be sure to leave room for expansion in the freezer: As you pour the chicken stock into the airtight containers (I like these 1 quart deli containers), be sure to leave an inch of space at the top for expansion in the freezer. 

How to Store & Freeze

  • Storage Instructions: Let the chicken stock cool down and then place in the fridge. They will last for 5-7 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing Instructions: I let them sit in the refrigerator overnight before moving them into the freezer. Once frozen, they should be good for up to 6 months.
  • Thawing Instructions: To thaw, place the frozen chicken stock in the fridge the night before. If short on time, the chicken stock can also be thawed in a large bowl of cool water on the kitchen counter.

What to do with the solids/leftovers?

In her recipe, Barefoot Contessa suggests discarding the solids, including the chicken and vegetables. This is the part where I disagree with her.

I can’t get myself to throw away all that cooked chicken and vegetables. Having worked in hotel kitchens in my previous life, I follow in the footsteps of some of the restaurant chefs I worked with and re-use them.

Leftover vegetables and shredded chicken in freezer bags

The leftover chicken carcass and vegetables are perfectly okay to use once more to make even more stock when needed. To do so, simply:

  1. Remove the cooked chicken meat from the bones, shred it into small pieces, freeze or use it in any one of the following recipes (keep reading!).
  2. Take the cooked chicken bones and leftover veggies, place them in a large plastic freezer bag, label, date and freeze for up to 3 months.
  3. When ready to use, no need to thaw! Use frozen and make it a part of your next batch of chicken stock. I usually combine it with more raw chicken and veggies to make it super rich and tasty.

5 Ways To Use Chicken Stock In Recipes:

  1. Use it as a base in homemade soups and stews. Or in any recipe that calls for liquid (as I used in my Chicken Stroganoff recipe)
  2. Cook grains like wild rice and quinoa in chicken stock (instead of water) to make them even more flavorful.
  3. Keep it on hand to use as braising liquid when cooking vegetables and meats.
  4. Substitute chicken stock in place of wine if you prefer not to use alcohol in your cooking.
  5. Combine it with milk to make bechamel sauce (or roux).
Chicken stock in freezer friendly containers cooling down on the counter

Recipe Ideas:

Now that you are left with some delicious chicken stock and some shredded chicken, here are some chicken recipe ideas to use them in:

Tips for Success:

  • Season well. Ina uses two tablespoons of Diamond Crystal Kosher Salt (affiliate link) to bring out the chicken, vegetable, and herb flavor. I also like to give it a taste once it is cooked. It should taste properly seasoned. If not, stir in ½ teaspoon more and taste again. 
  • Cool to room temperature first. Strain and pour into individual containers, slightly cover and cool for a few hours or until it is no longer warm. Chill the stock overnight in the fridge before placing it in the freezer on the next day.
  • Scrape off the fat, if desired. As it is simmering on the stovetop, you might notice a layer of fat at the top of your chicken stock. If you prefer to get rid of the fat, use a spoon to scrape it off.

FAQs

What is the difference between chicken stock and chicken broth?

Chicken stock is made from the meat and the bones, whereas chicken broth is made from the meat (no bones). Because the bones release gelatin and more flavor during cooking, the chicken stock tends to have a richer flavor.

How long to boil chicken stock?

Chicken stock should be simmered, partially covered, on the stovetop for 4 hours.

Equipment Used:

While you don’t need any special equipment to make Ina Garten’s chicken broth, here are a few equipment suggestions that might make your life easier. Please be advised that these are affiliate links:

This recipe has been adapted from Ina Garten’s, Modern Comfort Cookbook (affiliate link).

Homemade chicken stock in containers
Print

Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock Recipe

Like it is in many kitchens in America, Ina Garten's chicken stock recipe is a classic in my kitchen too. This recipe is foolproof and made with every day ingredients. I think having homemade chicken broth in your fridge is the easiest way to elevate any dish. Try it, it won't disappoint.
Course How To
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours
Cooling time 2 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 quarts
Calories 951kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 whole chickens* (4-5 pound each)
  • 3 large yellow onions unpeeled and quartered
  • 6 carrots unpeeled and cut in thirds
  • 4 celery stalks with leaves cut in thirds
  • 4 parsnips unpeeled and cut in thirds (optional)
  • 20 fresh parsley sprigs
  • 15 fresh thyme sprigs
  • 20 fresh dill sprigs
  • 1 head garlic unpeeled and cut in half crosswise
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
  • 2 teaspoons whole black peppercorns

Instructions

  • Place the chickens, onion, carrots, celery, parsnip (if using), fresh herbs, garlic, salt and peppercorns in a large 16 to 20 quart stockpot*. Add 7 quarts water.
  • Bring it to a boil over medium-high hear. Lower the heat to medium-low and let it simmer (uncovered) for 4 hours.
  • Strain in batches using a colander.
  • Pour into 1-quart airtight containers. Let them cool down on the kitchen counter for 1-2 hours. Place in the fridge or freeze on the next day.

Video

Notes

  • What if I do not have a large stockpot like hers? If you do not have a 16-20 quart stockpot, use the largest one you have. If you do so, you can use 1 large or 2 small whole chickens instead. If you do not have a whole chicken, I would recommend using 7-10 chicken pieces instead.
  • What to do with the leftover cooked chicken, chicken bones and vegetables? In her original recipe, Ina Garten suggests discarding them. I prefer to remove the chicken and bones, use shredded chicken in recipes and bones for the next time I make chicken stock. I place them in freezer bags and freeze them in the fridge until I am ready to use them.
  • Storage Instructions: Let the chicken stock cool down and then place in the fridge. They will last for 5-7 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing Instructions: I let them sit in the refrigerator overnight before moving them into the freezer. Once frozen, they should be good for up to 6 months.
  • Thawing Instructions: To thaw, place the frozen chicken stock in the fridge the night before. If short on time, the chicken stock can also be thawed in a large bowl of cool water on the kitchen counter.
  • Scrape off the fat, if desired. As it is simmering on the stovetop, you might notice a layer of fat at the top of your chicken stock. If you prefer to get rid of the fat, use a spoon to scrape it off.

Nutrition

Calories: 951kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 74g | Fat: 58g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 286mg | Sodium: 2651mg | Potassium: 1443mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 11145IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 136mg | Iron: 5mg

This homemade chicken stock recipe was originally published on May 2013. It has been updated with new photos, information, and recipe in on May 2021.

The post Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-chicken-stock/feed/ 20
Blueberry Puree https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-puree/ https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-puree/#comments Mon, 12 Apr 2021 14:00:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=40338 When it comes to topping pancakes and waffles, I am a big fan of my homemade blueberry sauce. While I love that sauce, I prefer a less sweet condiment when I want to flavor drinks.  When blueberries are in season, I buy them in large quantities and make this blueberry puree recipe. I use some right away (hello, Blueberry Margaritas!) and freeze the rest for later.  Substitute homemade fresh fruit purees for...

The post Blueberry Puree appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
When it comes to topping pancakes and waffles, I am a big fan of my homemade blueberry sauce. While I love that sauce, I prefer a less sweet condiment when I want to flavor drinks. 

When blueberries are in season, I buy them in large quantities and make this blueberry puree recipe. I use some right away (hello, Blueberry Margaritas!) and freeze the rest for later. 

Blueberry puree is placed in a jar by a person

Substitute homemade fresh fruit purees for sugar store-bought syrups to add the bounty of nature into your everyday recipes including cocktails, breakfast bowls, smoothies, and desserts.

Ingredients:

The list of ingredients for this blueberry puree recipe is determined by how you plan to use it. If you are:

Ingredients on a white backdrop from top view
  • Making blueberry puree for a baby, you will need fresh blueberries and water. If you use frozen blueberries, I recommend thawing them before pureeing them. 
  • Making it to use in cocktails, mocktails (aka non-alcoholic beverages), smoothies, or as a topping for oatmeal and steel-cut oats, you can use both fresh and frozen blueberries and flavoring agents like fresh lemon or lime juice and sweeteners like honey syrup.

How To Make Blueberry Puree?

  1. Give them a rinse: Place blueberries in a colander and dip them in a bowl of cold water. Gently shake the colander in water and then drain. I do not recommend washing blueberries under cold running water as the pressure can crush them (source.)
Blender with fresh blueberries before and after they are blended
  1. Blend: Place blueberries in a blender such as a Vitamix (affiliate link). Add in ¼ cup of water and puree until smooth, 30-45 seconds on medium-high speed.
    If you are making it in any way other than to use it as baby food, you can skip the water and use honey syrup and lime/lemon juice instead.
person pouring blueberry puree sauce in a jar and putting a lid on it
  1. Store: Place it in a jar with a tight lid or use it in your recipe right away.

Storage and Freezing Instructions:

  • To Store: Place it in an airtight jar and tighten it with the lid. As long as it is stored in the fridge, it should stay fresh for up to 3 days.
  • To Freeze: Portion puree into an ice cube tray and freeze it overnight. Transfer to a freezer bag for up to 3 months.
  • To Thaw: Place a cube into an airtight container and let it thaw overnight in the fridge.

Ways To Use It:

Helpful Tips:

  • No blender, no problem: If you do not have a blender, you can also use a food processor. You may have to blend it longer, but it would totally work.
  • Blending smoothly: In the recipe below, I used 2 cups of blueberries as my Vitamix will not do a good job of blending a lesser amount. However, if you have a smaller blender, you can puree fewer blueberries or adjust the recipe accordingly.

Other Blueberry Recipes You Might Like:

Blueberry Puree is placed in a jar by a person
Print

Blueberry Puree Recipe

An easy Blueberry puree recipe to use as baby food or as a flavoring agent in cocktails, cakes, oatmeal or even as a pancake sauce. This is the quickest way to incorporate blueberry flavor into your recipes.
Course Naturally Sweetened
Cuisine American
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 42kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups fresh blueberries* rinsed and picked over
  • 1/4 cup water

Optional ingredients (Based on the recipe you are using):

  • 2 tablespoons lemon or lime juice
  • 1 tablespoon Honey Syrup*

Instructions

  • Place blueberries in the bowl of a blender*.
  • If you are making this as baby food, pour in water. If you are making it to use in drinks, oatmeal, smoothies, etc, you can add in flavorings like lime juice and honey syrup instead of water.
  • Blend in medium-high speed until smooth, 30-45 seconds.
  • Pour into a jar, cover it with a lid, and store in the fridge until ready to use.

Notes

  • This recipe yields 1 1/4 cups of blueberry puree.
  • The jar you see in the photos is a Weck Jar (affiliate link).
  • You can easily and quickly make honey syrup at home in less than 5 minutes.
  • You can use frozen blueberries as well. For best results, I recommend to thaw them before blending.
  • If you do not have a blender, you can also use a food processor. You may have to blend it longer but it would totally work.
  • To store: Place it in an airtight jar and tighten it with the lid. As long as it is stored in the fridge, it should stay fresh up to 3 days.
  • To Freeze: Portion puree into an ice cube tray and freeze it overnight. Transfer to a freezer bag for up to 3 months.
  • To Thaw: Place a cube into an airtight container and let it thaw overnight in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 42kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1mg | Potassium: 57mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 40IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Blueberry Puree appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blueberry-puree/feed/ 8
Honey Simple Syrup https://foolproofliving.com/honey-simple-syrup/ https://foolproofliving.com/honey-simple-syrup/#comments Sun, 11 Apr 2021 19:56:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=40329 It is no secret that simple syrup is an essential ingredient if you are a fan of making cocktails regularly. However, did you know that you can also make simple syrup using honey (aka honey water) and use it the same way you use simple syrup made with sugar? I have been committed to sharing naturally sweetened desserts for over 6 years now, and this is one of those staples that I...

The post Honey Simple Syrup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that simple syrup is an essential ingredient if you are a fan of making cocktails regularly. However, did you know that you can also make simple syrup using honey (aka honey water) and use it the same way you use simple syrup made with sugar?

I have been committed to sharing naturally sweetened desserts for over 6 years now, and this is one of those staples that I always have on hand. It takes only a few minutes to make and deserves a spot in your pantry if you are into a healthier way of sweetening your food. 

Honey Syrup placed in a glass jar with water and honey on the side

Why should you make your own honey water recipe?

  1. It is an excellent refined-sugar-free alternative to sweeten your cocktails, coffee, or even baked goods.
  2. You can definitely buy honey syrup from the store, but it will cost you somewhere around $10-$30 (Starbucks’ Honey Blend Syrup sells for over $20). Following this honey syrup recipe, you can make as much as you need more economically.
  3. When you make it at home, you know what goes in there. In other words, no preservatives, no additives, and no pasteurization. Plus, you can use your favorite honey.

Ingredients & Ratio of Honey To Water:

All you need is honey and water. My go-to ratio for honey simple syrup is 1 to 1. In other words, you will need 1 cup of water for every cup of honey.

Ingredients for honey water from the front view held by a person

This ratio provides a liquid texture with a runny consistency, which is why people also refer to it as “honey water.” If you want the texture to be thicker (more of a richer texture), you can increase the honey amount and use the ratio of 1 ½ part honey to 1 part water.

How To Make Honey Syrup?

The steps to making honey-based simple syrup can not be easier. Simply:

Person adding honey and water to a saucepan from front view
  1. Place honey and water into a small saucepan over medium low heat. 
  2. Heat just until honey is completely dissolved. You do not need to bring it to a boil (more on that below); we just want to come to a full liquid state.
Person mixing liquid honey and placing it in a glass jar
  1. Place in a heat-proof jar with a tight-fitting lid (such as a mason jar or a weck jar – affiliate link). Let it come to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

Important Tip – Do not boil honey!

If you ever tried your hand in dissolving honey in cold water (or any other cold liquid), you know that it is almost impossible to do so. You have to thin it out in warm water first. 

However, this does not mean you should boil it. According to Bee Healthhoney should not be heated rapidly over direct heat. Because excessive heat can have detrimental effects on the nutritional state of honey.

That is why we do not want to bring it to a boil. Instead, we are just dissolving honey in water to thin it out and make it easy to mix into drinks and food more quickly.

The best thing about that is that it takes about 2 minutes to completely dissolve, so you don’t have to wait too long in front of the stovetop.

How Long Does It Last?

Honey simple syrup will last up to 1 month as long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge. I am a big fan of Weck jars (affiliate link), but a mason jar would also work.

Ways To Use It:

The uses of honey syrup are endless. Here are a few ways I use in my daily cooking:

Person putting the lid on a jar of honey syrup

Variations & Flavor Combos:

Use this basic recipe to make your own flavored honey syrup. Here are a few variations:

  • Honey Lavender Simple Syrup: Of the heat, steep 3 tablespoons of edible lavender flowers (affiliate link) for every cup of honey syrup for a minimum of 15 minutes up to an hour. The longer it sits, the stronger it will be. Strain and store in an airtight container.
  • Ginger Honey Syrup: Peel an inch of fresh ginger root and chop it into small pieces. Bring water and ginger to a boil and let it simmer uncovered for 20 minutes. Strain. Add honey and mix until it is fully dissolved.
  • Use fresh herbs like rosemary and mint: Add in a handful of fresh mint leaves or a few sprigs of rosemary and let them steep for a few hours.

FAQs:

What type of honey should I use? 

I usually use local organic honey that I buy from our local farmers’ market. However, raw honey (aka “as it exists in the beehive”) can also be used. While you can use regular store-bought honey, I try to stay away from it as some producers add sugar to bring down the costs.

Can I make honey simple syrup in the microwave? 

I would not recommend heating honey in the microwave. Instead, you can heat up the water in the microwave, add in the honey until it is fully dissolved.

Honey simple syrup in a glass jar
Print

Honey Simple Syrup Recipe

This honey syrup recipe requires only 2 ingredients and 5 minutes to make. Make a batch and use it to sweeten cocktails, mocktails, coffee, tea and even baked goods in a natural way.
Course Sweets
Cuisine American
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup (approx.)
Calories 687kcal

Ingredients

  • 2/3 cup honey
  • 2/3 cup water

Instructions

  • Place honey and water in a small saucepan over medium low heat.
  • Cook until honey fully dissolves*, 1-2 minutes.
  • Place in a heatproof jar, bring it to room temperature and seal with a lid before storing.

Notes

  • *No need to bring it to a boil: We are heating it until it dissolves. I would highly recommend not heating it any longer as excessive heat can have negative effects on the nutritional state of honey.
  • A note on the Texture of this honey syrup: Be aware that the texture of this honey syrup is very liquid-y and that is normal. If you want it to have a thicker texture you can use an additional 1/2 cup honey.
  • How long does it last? Honey simple syrup will last up to 1 month as long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge. I am a big fan of Weck jars (affiliate link), but a mason jar would also work.
  • What type of honey should I use? I usually use local organic honey that I buy from our local farmers’ market. However, raw honey (aka “as it exists in the beehive”) can also be used.

Nutrition

Calories: 687kcal | Carbohydrates: 186g | Protein: 1g | Sodium: 17mg | Potassium: 118mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 186g | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Honey Simple Syrup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/honey-simple-syrup/feed/ 2